I 
 
 ■ m 
 
 * A^ I 
 
 
# t ■ 
 
 i [FORCE COLLECTION.] 
 
 f UNITED STATES 
 
ELEMENTS 
 
 OP 
 
 GREEK GRAMMAR. 
 
 By (II kUNCEY A. GOODRICH. 
 
 \LE COLLEGE. 
 
 FOURTH EDITI< 
 
 • R l> IMIK 
 
 — O©^ 
 
 HAKTFORD 
 
 PUBLISHED BY O. D. COOKE k CO. 
 1827 
 
ft 
 
 
 DISTRICT OF CONNECTICUT, ss. 
 
 BE IT RE viEMBERED, That on the fifth day of December in 
 the fifty-second year of the Independence of the United States of 
 America, Chauncey Allen Goodrich, of the said District, hath de- 
 posited in this office the title of a Book, the right whereof he claims 
 as Author, in the words following, to wit : 
 
 '•Elements of Greek Grammar; By Chauncey A. Goodrich. Used 
 in Yale College." 
 
 In conformity to the act of Congress of the United States, enti- 
 tled, " An act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the 
 copies of Maps, Charts, and Books, to the authors and proprietors 
 of such copies, during the times therein mentioned, v and also to the 
 act, entitled, " An act supplementary to an act, entitled 'An act for 
 the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, 
 charts, and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies 
 during the times therein mentioned,' and extending the benefits 
 thereof to the arts of designing, engraving, and etching historical 
 and other prints." 
 
 CHAS. A. INGERSOLL, Clerk of the District of Connecticut. 
 \ true copy of Record, examined and sealed by me, 
 CHAS. A. INGERSOLL, Clerk of the District of Connects 
 
 IREADWAY AND ADAMS PRINT., NEW-HATEN 
 
ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 The materials for the first edition of this work, were 
 derived chiefly from the Grammar of Hachenberg. Nu- 
 merous additions were made, however, from other 
 sources, and the plan entirely new-modelled, in con- 
 formity to the existin I instruction in this coon- 
 try, in gh three editions, it has re- 
 • d ;k < « tter from the later 
 1 man Grama and, in the present edition, the 
 articles <>n thet Midd the con- 
 struct the Infinitive and of Participles, and (im- 
 eral Princij rernment, hi n re-written 
 and enlarge d ; the Par [rregular \ - 
 
 w article has 
 <\i'*\ on tin I fficull forms 
 
 tion . I en introd rid fuller 
 
 rules given ; than arc or- 
 
 dinarily to 1 i ith, in \\<>rk kind By t 1 
 
 work h i har- 
 
 Dd the n 
 r on the title 
 
 Tl miliar I. 
 
 ftrould admit. The 
 and Sj nta\ 
 
 ted in a largeT tj pe 
 
 ad, in a 
 
 i m the Adam's mar. 
 
 ady familiar to the learner. 
 In nd annotations adapted to I 
 
 ilu you >f students, it would f>e 
 
 : into the theory i 
 
 of distinction in the forms of 
 itruction ittempl has been made however, to 
 
 of more ad\ 
 subjects, in the introde on the Mi< 
 
jv Advertisement, 
 
 Voice, Tenses, Moods, construction of the Infinitive 
 and of Participles, and General Principles of Govern- 
 ment. Within a narrow compass are here given the 
 principal conclusions, at which Matthias " has arrived, 
 in several hundred pages of his larger Grammar; 
 though, of course, with the omission of uncommon 
 forms of construction, and with that imperfection of 
 statement, which must necessarily attend every attempt 
 to compress so great a mass of matter, within such lim- 
 its. In accordance with the same plan, the abstract of 
 Middleton's Treatise on the Article, which was placed 
 under the head of Syntax in the first edition, is retained 
 in the Appendix. It has been hoped, that Instructors 
 would find, in the general views of the language thus 
 presented, important principles, which may be illustra- 
 ted and explained from time to time, with great advan- 
 tage to the pupil. 
 
 To the larger Grammar of Matthiae, the author is in- 
 debted for most of the improvements made in this work. 
 When Buttmann has been consulted, the eighth Berlin 
 edition printed in 1818, has been used. The article on 
 Dialects was taken, with but little alteration, from the 
 Glocester Grammar ; the list of Anomalous Verbs was 
 formed, with additions and corrections, on that of Valpy; 
 and a late Grammar of Ewing, has furnished a part of 
 the remarks on Prosody. 
 
 A considerable number of typographical errors have 
 been detected in the two preceding editions, which were 
 printed at a distance from the author, and beyond the 
 reach of his inspection. The present edition, it is hop- 
 ed, will be found more correct. 
 
 As to occasional errors in the accents, he is confident 
 of indulgence from those at least, who have been taught 
 by experience, the difficulty of securing entire accura- 
 cy in this respect, with workmen not regularly educa- 
 ted to their use. 
 
 New Haven, Dec. 1st, 1827. 
 
 N. B. The rule for putting the Relative, by Attraction, in the 
 same 6ase with the Antecedent, was accidentally omitted onpagc 
 119 during the Author's absence from town. 
 
ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 THE ALPHABET. 
 
 THE GREEK LETTERS ARE TWENTY-FOUR. 
 
 RE. 
 
 A a 
 
 B/3g 
 
 rj 
 
 A* 
 
 E: 
 
 I I 
 
 N fJL 
 
 Oo 
 
 n # * 
 
 Trl 
 Tu 
 
 *x 
 
 NAM! 
 
 
 TOWER. 
 
 'AX<pa 
 
 alpha 
 
 a 
 
 BrpOL 
 
 beta 
 
 b 
 
 ^afxfxa 
 
 gamma 
 
 g hard. 
 
 
 delta 
 
 d 
 
 .Xov 
 
 cp<ilon 
 
 e short. 
 
 ?*"* 
 
 
 z 
 
 
 eta 
 
 e long. 
 
 
 theta 
 
 th 
 
 
 iota 
 
 i 
 
 
 kappa 
 
 k 
 
 
 lambda 
 
 1 
 
 K-5 
 
 inu 
 
 m 
 
 
 nu 
 
 n 
 
 
 xi 
 
 X 
 
 o fiixpov 
 
 omicron 
 
 o short. 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 P 
 
 jfi 
 
 rho 
 
 r 
 
 tfiyixa. 
 
 ;ma 
 
 s 
 
 raZ 
 
 tau 
 
 t 
 
 \j >^iXov 
 
 upsilon 
 
 u 
 
 <p7 
 
 plii 
 
 ph 
 
 x r 
 
 chi 
 
 ch aspira 
 
 
 psi 
 
 ps [ted. 
 
 ya. 
 
 omega 
 
 o long. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
2 Letters, 
 
 SIXTEEN letters, viz. a, s, i, o, u, ,8, y, o, x, X, ,a. v 5 
 *, p, tf, r, were introduced from Phenicia into Greece, by 
 Cadmus, fifteen hundred years before Christ. Their form 
 was originally that of the Phenician characters, and was 
 gradually changed to the present.* Eight were afterwar-'s 
 added, viz. 73, w, <p, %, 0, £, |, •+', in the fifth or the sixth 
 century before Christ. These, being merely substitutes 
 for existing letters, came slowly into use. 
 
 They were first used by the Ionics ; and afterwards 
 by the Attics, though not in public records till 403 A. C. 
 Hence the new alphabet of twenty-four letters was cailed 
 'Iwvixa ypajuumctTa; and the old alphabet of sixteen letters, 
 'Arcixa ^potjuojxara, which continued in use among the iEo- 
 lics. 
 
 Greek was originally written in capitals without spares 
 between the words ; as, ENAPXHHN0A0r02KAI0A0r02 
 HNnPO2TON0EON. 'Ev ajxjj Sjv 6 Aoyog. xod 6 Aoyog Jjvffpos 
 ' rov @sov. The sma ller ch aracters were formed from the 
 larger, between the seventh and ninth centuries, for con- 
 } /i^ % ^^cnience in writing. The lines of Manuscripts were called 
 juj,, J.#T'r(pi, and the contents often estimated by their number.! 
 jT/ Thus, ypocrrov sv (tri'/oig tfyj, (end of the Epistle to the Philip- 
 
 plans,) denotes that the manuscript had 208 cW^oi or lines. 
 
 To the letters may be added the rough breathing ["J" 
 or English H ; as, "Ofi^pos, Homeros ; e s|w, hexo. 
 
 1. r ihe aspirate, or English H, was originally a letter 
 amonor the Greeks. In the old inscriptions, HEKATON is 
 written for Ixarov ; and UJi for 9 ; KH for y, &c. It was 
 afterwards divided into two parts, PP. The former re- 
 taining the original sound, was called the rough breathing. 
 The latter was called the smooth breathing; and denoted 
 that slight emission of breath, which naturally precedes all 
 the vowels at the commencement of a syllable, when not as- 
 pirated. These characters I 1 were gradually rounded 
 into their present form, ['] rough breathing, [ ] smooth 
 breathing. 
 
 2. When u or p begin a word they have always the rough 
 breathing ; as u&op, "P'/j-rwp. In the middle of a word, if p 
 be doubled, the first has the smooth, and the second the 
 rou^h breathing ; as, a^jv. 
 
 3. The Attics frequently use the rough breathing when 
 
 *Vide Shuckford's Connexions, vol. i. p. 256. 
 tVide Marsh's Michaelis, vol. ii. p. 526. 
 
Letters. 
 
 others use the smooth The JEolics and older 
 
 quently change the rough breath* 
 'h. 
 Le iled int<> Vowels and Consonants. 
 
 The vowels i en ; two lonjr. r,, u ; two sh< 
 
 thi tful, «. ', 
 
 1 f ;on of v\ and w, 6 and o were used 
 
 the U ls *Aorf soui E and O ; and o v 
 
 as a in 
 ithci 
 
 The diphtb \ proper, viz. ai, a\.. 
 
 l. Diphthongs always end with to vowels 
 
 an 
 
 the ".. 
 
 and w a* 
 
 into Mutes, Liquids, and 
 
 Th< 
 
 ill, 
 
 Tin 
 
 i : x, kh ; 6, th. 
 hav< ie smooth. 
 
 perpendicularly, 
 
 d are called ( 
 
 
4 Syllables. 
 
 There are four Liquids ; X, p, v, p, to which tf is some- 
 times added. 
 
 There are three Double Consonants, £, g, 4*. 
 £ represents 6V. # 
 
 I *s< ys> xs- 
 
 4> **£, fis, <?>£. 
 
 Hence, when these letters are thus joined, the double 
 letter is substituted. 
 
 1. This may be particularly remarked in declension and 
 conjugation ; as, "A^a-^i for "A£a/3tfi, from "Agafig ; Xs'gw for 
 Xsytfw, from X57W ; tfXegw for atXsWw, from tfXs'xw 5 'aXs/^w for 
 f aXs/ptfw, from 'aXeupw. 
 
 2. Among the JEolics, who never used the double con- 
 sonants, dS was put for £, transposing the letters, because <5 
 never immediately precedes tf.j 
 
 r, before x, y, x> £> has the sound of ng ; as, 'Hyyzkog, 
 anggelos. 
 
 The letters v, p, *, g, .4,, are called final consonants, 
 because words not derived from foreign languages, end 
 in no others. 
 
 Except ix 9 ht } and £^, supposed to be derived from e% and 
 
 SYLLABLES. 
 General Rules in the Formation of Syllables. 
 
 1. When mutes come together, the smooth must be uni- 
 ted with smooth, middle with middle, and rough with rough ; 
 hence if one is determined, the other is made to correspond ; 
 as irvcpQriv for irCnrdriv ; XsXs^ds for X£Xsx£s ; from ypoupw, by 
 adding rog, ypa/XTog ; by adding Jyjv, ypa/35^v. 
 
 Exception 1. A rough mute sannot be doubled; but the 
 first is changed into its cognate smooth one ; as, Scwrqjw for 
 Sacptpu ; Bax^os for Bap^os ; <n-r06s for <ndd6s. 
 
 2. The preposition sx may be followed by a letter of any 
 kind ; as, sx/3aXXw, exQXt^ig. 
 
 II. Two successive syllables, in the same word, do not 
 begin with a rough letter ; lest they should occasion too great 
 
 *It cannot be too strongly impressed on the mind of the learner, 
 that \p and | are mere representatives of the letters against them, and 
 may always be resolved into them= 
 Vide Rule IV. p. 5; 
 
Syllables. 5 
 
 a harshness of language. To avoid this, the first commonly 
 becomes smooth ; as, f|jeuxa for Hfpjam ; tfsyoijxa for (psyu-y- 
 xa ; ridvxa for Ss&uxa ; rj'd^ui for didr^ki ; xb^qjxol for X^X uxa > 
 5 for dpix^j from fyl£. 
 
 The second letter is rarely changed ; but it is regularly 
 done in imperatives in Gi, which are changed into n ; as, 
 GcVi for pd«« fur rutpfcfc. 
 
 Ex. The passive termination G>jv, with its derivatives, 
 changes the rirst rough letter in only two words (Guttv and 
 BeTvcu) in all others both are retained as fywqv. The 
 same is true of most otiier cases of derivation, as ptLxstidou, 
 Kopiv£6div. 
 
 III. When the rough breathing and a smooth mute come 
 together, they unite and form a rough one ; as, <xa\Qs-\,is 
 from tfavr' a; ; for xur'ug; fliJ uf/bTv for (x=V uufv ; 
 
 '*X -- 
 
 for v jlotiov. The Ionics retain the 
 
 smooth ii. frw. 
 
 IV. The In <*»£»*"» are dropped before (f, as ap- 
 
 ap* «.£w ; atfw for ai(fw, from a<$w, 
 kto, from 
 
 unchanged except be- 
 fore 
 
 I. in declension, and 
 
 in t! 
 
 When with tin dropped (by rule 
 
 [V, the preced rata from 
 
 .ito fi, and o into 
 . reg. 
 Tin ition, and in 
 
 lenity iii 
 
 I y before th <a. 
 
 Into fx 
 Before the liquids X, ffr, p, into those letters respectively, 
 
 .'ji. 
 But v r< enclitics, as rovys, and 
 
 in the pi 
 
 VI. B( in the middle of a word, 
 
 1. The Labi d into fju ; as, XiXsi/x- 
 
 fico for - 
 
 n and x, into y ; as, diooytuu for fc&xpoj ; 
 
 Xete^/jta* for 'KsXe^at. 
 
 1* 
 
6 Syllables. 
 
 Except a/cp, av%(x6g, and a few others. 
 
 VII. A letter is sometimes inserted between two other 
 letters, to prevent an unpleasant concurrence of sounds : 
 Particularly when fx precedes X, or £, the letter /Sis often in- 
 serted ; as fA£tf»j|x/3^'a, from pstfog and ^fjug'ga ; fxs'fj^Xvjxa for 
 /xg/wg'XTjxa. 
 
 When v precedes g , the letter 5 is frequently inserted ; as, 
 avdpog for dvg'fos. From the same attention to harmony, we 
 find, d,a/3po-7os for d/3po<ro£, &c. 
 
 From a regard to sound, r in the preposition xoltol is fre- 
 quently changed into *ie and x, before 9 and % ; as, xax^sStfoej 
 for xoLTw/sv(fai ; and into /3, 7, 5, #, X, fju, v, f . before those 
 letters respectively ; as, xd|£oov for xara||oov, he. 
 
 N. B. T%e preceding rules are very important for the 
 resolution of anomalies, in the inflections of nouns and 
 verbs. 
 
 VIII. The letter v is annexed to datives plural in *, and to 
 all third persons of verbs ending in s or 1, when the next word 
 begins with a vowel ;* as, yovsutfiv avrQv ; sduxsv airoTg. 
 
 $ 1. E/'xotfi takes v after it ; as, e'ixotfiv civdgsg ; also tfavratfatfi 
 and some others. 
 
 2. The poets sometimes add v when the next word begins 
 with a consonant. The Ionics omit the v even before a 
 vowel. 
 
 On the Change, Increase, and Retrenchment of Syllables, 
 
 1. Metathesis is the transposition of letters and syllables ; 
 as xugrsgog for xgarspog. This often extends to the breath- 
 ings ; as, xiduv.for pprwv ; Qaxiwv for ror^jwv, from ra^vg. 
 
 2. Prosthesis is the prefixing of one or more letters to a 
 word ; as ssixotfi for Etxotfi. 
 
 3. ^Epenthesis is the insertion of one or more letters with- 
 in a word ; as, tfouXus for croXfe. 
 
 4. Paragoge is the annexing of one letter or more to a 
 word ; as, Xoyoitfi for \6yoig. 
 
 5. Aphere3is is the cutting off of letters from the begin- 
 ning of a w T ord ; as, oVsfoiryj for dfaegonrrj. 
 
 6. Syncope is taking from the middle of a word ; as, 
 /;X£ov for 'JjXvdov. 
 
 * Called N Uc\kvotik6v. and used to avoid a concurrence of vowels. 
 
Etymology. 7 
 
 7. Apocope is taking from the end of a word ; as, Scixgu 
 for Jaxfuov. 
 
 8. Apostrophe (')cuts offa, s, f, o,from the end of a word, 
 when the next word begins with a vowel ; as, tout* iXfiyov for 
 
 TOLbTO 
 
 1. TT£pf, rp<5 and 3n, with datives in t, are not affected by apostrophe 
 The apostrophe is not always used where it -might be, especially in 
 
 ;?. Long vowels and diphthongs are often removed by apostrophe 
 among the P<M for iyib olta ; jliXop hyA for pvXopai iyu>. 
 
 »wcl of the su« :iitted ; as. 
 
 wyaOi for u> ayade. 
 
 two words are drawn t- r iyui 
 
 <?ira for Kai 
 ■ I for k,u ii ; kUk for Kai U ; %u>iru)S lor Kai 5ffu>j ; pSertv for p$ iarlv ; 
 
 9. Tm< rates the pans of compound words, by an 
 intervem. fur jolTolv xa : 
 
 Dwelfl which might form a 
 diphf 
 
 II. Is into a diphthong ; 
 
 contraction with a <*/.■■ iore 
 
 of til 
 
 ; >arate v iich 
 
 i for part . and he ; 
 
 u r Points ok 
 
 (0 
 
 (;) 
 
 it at top, 
 The j . . . 
 
 -—♦*©©— 
 
 ETYMOLOGY 
 
 The Parts of Speech in Greek are nine, viz. Article, 
 
Article. 
 
 Noun, Adjective, Pronoun, Verb. Participle. Adverb, 
 Preposition, Conjunction. 
 
 Interjections are included among Adverbs. 
 
 There are three Numbers ; the Singular, which de- 
 notes one ; the Plural, which denotes more than one ; 
 and the Dual, which denotes two or a pair. 
 
 The dual is not found in the New Testament, nor in the 
 iEolic dialect. It was used chiefly by the Attic and Ionic 
 writers, and not even by them in the earlier periods. 
 
 The Genders are three ; Masculine, Feminine, and 
 Neuter. 
 
 The Cases are five ; Nominative, Genitive, Dative, 
 Accusative, and Vocative. 
 
 ARTICLE. 
 The Article is a word prefixed to a noun, for the pur- 
 pose of designation or distinction : as, 6 avdp&wros, the 
 man. It corresponds, (though not exactly,) to the 
 English definite article, and is thus declined.* 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. 6, $, t6.^ 
 G. t£, t^js, tx. 
 D. <rco, ryj, rw. 
 A. <r6v, <rqv, to. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. tgj, t<x, tw. 
 G. D. to/v, Tan/, Ton;. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 01, al, t<x. 
 G r&v,r&V)rZv. 
 D. ToTg, Ta<£, roig. 
 A. <rkg,<rug, t<x. 
 
 1 . The Article has no vocative ; its place is supplied by 
 the adverb w. 
 
 2. When os or ys is annexed to the article, it has the force 
 of a demonstrative pronoun, as o<5s, fyk, to<5s, this, that. For 
 bSs the Attics use 65i. 
 
 3. The article was originally ros, ttj. to ; hence the toi of 
 the Dorics and Ionics ; and t in oblique cases, and in the 
 neuter. ' 
 
 * L. t the young student decline each gender of the Article by it- 
 self. The Feminine h will give him (with a slight variation) the ter- 
 minations of the first Declension of Nouns. The Masculine 6, and the 
 Neuter r6 give the terminations of the second Declension. 
 
Noun — First Declension. 
 
 NOUN. 
 
 There are three declensions of Greek nouns. 
 The first has four terminations, a, n, a ?, *£. 
 The second has two, of, ov, which among the Attics, 
 become ojs, &jv. 
 
 TJie third has nine, a, i, u, w, v, p, <r, g, 4>. 
 
 General Rules of Declension. 
 
 1. The nominative accusative, and vocative of the 
 dual, and of neuters, are alike ; and, in the plural of 
 neuters, end in a. 
 
 2. The dati\c singular ends always in i.* 
 
 3. The genitive plural ends in «v. 
 
 4. The vocative i- always like the nominative, in the 
 plural, and usually in the Bingul 
 
 Tli- i in i, in 
 
 all the dt plural usually in 
 
 FIRST D SION 
 
 Nouns of I on have four termm 
 
 oc, *i, feminiii' iline. 
 
 Th to have been ch 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 Oil, 
 
 
 \. A . Vd to. cia-d, 
 
 - CJV, 
 
 r . 
 
 
 
 
 (i . 1). Ta~v -n/x-cuv. 
 
 '•-0£j 
 
 
 
 . ffjfc-a*. 
 
 pg. Dual. Plural. 
 
 '-a, 
 
 
 '-ai, 
 
 
 \. A. \ -a, 
 
 ( j . r£hi fi 
 
 T "fl> 
 
 
 1). TftfC p 
 
 
 G. D. Tar; a 
 
 
 
 
 V. u (4i(f-ai. 
 
 the first and second declensions the Iota is subscript. 
 
10 
 
 First Declension. 
 
 Nouns ending in pa, a pure,* and a contracted,, have 
 the genitive in as, and the dative in a ;t as, 
 
 , Sil ¥* 
 
 N. 7] (piXi-a, 
 G. 9% <pi\i-as, 
 D. rr, <piXi'-a, 
 A tyjV (piXi-av, 
 V. go (piXj-a. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. <rot<piXi'-a, 
 G. D. Van; (piXf-aiv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. ai «piXi-ai, 
 G. <rwv (piXi wv, 
 D. Tafs ^i>J-ai£, 
 A. rag tyi\i~ag, 
 V. w (piXi-a*. 
 
 So likewise aXaXa, and some proper names as, Ar,5a. 
 Nouns in as are thus declined : 
 
 Sing. 
 N. 6 "rajxi-as, 
 G. <r£ ra,ai-s, 
 D. <rw<raf*i-a, 
 A. tov <ra|Xi-av., 
 V. w raai-a. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. Twrajxi'-a, 
 G. D. coJv rajXi-ajv. 
 
 Plural. 
 N. oi 9-ajuu-ai, 
 G. cgjv rajuLi-wv, 
 D. rols <ra|LM-ai£, 
 A. <r*£ <ra<ju-as, 
 V. w ra/x.'-ai. 
 
 Nouns in as, especially proper names, sometimes make 
 the genitive in a, after the Boric form ; as, 2acavas, G. a ; 
 particularly in Attic writers. Soph. Electra 137. 
 Some have both s and a ; as 'A^kas, 'A^r^and'Ag^ra. 
 
 Nouns ending in *js are thus declined : 
 
 ' Sing. 
 
 N- T£XWV-7]S, 
 G. <T£ (TsXtoV-S, 
 
 D. tw rifk&v-yii 
 A. tov <rsXwv->jVj 
 V. w «-aXwv-?]. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. tw <rsX^v-a ? 
 G. D. toiv rcXwv-aiv. 
 
 Plural. 
 N. oi TsXwv-ai, 
 
 G. TWVTcXwV-WV, 
 
 D. Tore reXwv-ai£, 
 
 A. t : s TsX^v-as ? 
 Y. w TcXojv-ai. 
 
 Nouns in oVtjs make the vocative in *j or a. All nouns in 
 Trjs, poetical nouns in <r*is 3 national denominations in ajs, and 
 compounds of tfoXw, jxsTgoj,' and <r£</3w ? make the vocative in 
 
 * A vowel is called pure, when it is preceded by another vowel with 
 which it does not form a diphthong ; as the a in &t\ia. 
 
 t The ancient Latins followed this method of making the genitive in 
 a? ; thus, Gen. Sing, terras, escas^ for terrce, cscce. Paterfamilias con- 
 tinues in use. 
 
 
nd Declension. 
 
 11 
 
 « ; a Also some proper names ; as, 
 
 ames in 5fc Lave the genitive in /, : as, 
 
 in ag and re had the nominative in a among the 
 /Holies, 1 J C I i « - 11. i>. I 
 
 I 
 
 Drop t .ica, 
 
 \en. 
 
 Th( lb two I and 
 
 which ai and wv. 
 
 I 
 
 \. \ \ . - 
 tal. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 iral. 
 
 V r 
 
 •a, 
 
 and 
 
12 
 
 Second Declension — Attic Form. 
 
 1. Many nouns in os are feminine ; some from a refer- 
 ence to a noun of that gender, understood ; as, s£*)fxo£, a de- 
 sert, i. e. zgr,pogyr h desert land. 
 
 2. ^ome substantives in o£ are common ; as, 6, y\ avQpu<iro$. 
 
 3. Nouns in w^are masculine, except names of cities and 
 islands, which are feminine ; together with these three, sw£, 
 aurora ; yaXug, a brother's wife ; aXws, a threshing floor : 
 Xp^b, a debt, is neuter. 
 
 ATTIC FORM. 
 
 This was an ancient form of declension, and is retained 
 in a few words only 
 
 It is made by lengthening the last vowel or diphthong into 
 
 w. and subscribing t ; as, Xayws for Xayos; Xayw for Xayi, 
 Xayw for "KouyoL 
 
 If a long precede o$, it is changed into s ; as, Xsw$ for 
 Xao's ; and dvwyswv for dvwya/ov. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. 6 Xs-w£, 
 G. ts Xs-w, 
 D. tw Xs-w, 
 A. tov Xs-wv, 
 
 Sing. 
 
 XT * ' ' 
 
 jl\. to avw^s-wv, 
 
 G. tS avwys-w, 
 D. tw avw^s-w, 
 A. to dvwys-wv, 
 V. w dvwys-wv. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. tw Xs-w, 
 G. D. Tofv Xs-wv. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. Twdvwys-w, 
 
 G. D. toJv dvwys-wv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. oi Xs-w, 
 G. twv Xs-wv, 
 D. toIsXs-gSs, 
 
 A. TS£ XS-W£, 
 
 V. w Xs-w. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. too dvw^S-w, 
 
 G. TWV OtVW^s-GJV, 
 
 D. to?£ dcvwys-w£, 
 A. to, ctvwys-w, 
 V. cj dvwys-oj. 
 
 1. The vocative is like the nominative ; and hence nouns 
 in os, of the common form, often have the vocative like the 
 nominative, after the Attic form ; as, (pi'Xos uMsve'kas, II. 8. 
 189. 
 
 2. The Attics often reject v in the accusative of this de- 
 clension, and almost always in the following words : ' Adws, 
 'AtfoXXws, suSi K&£, Xa/wcr. Sometimes in the neuter of 
 adjectives ; as, to dyajpoj for dyvjpwv ; in the accusative plu- 
 ral, toLs dXw for dXws. The Attics frequently decline nouns 
 of the third declension, according to this form ; as, /sXwv. 
 (Eurip. Ion. 1191.) for ysXwra from ys'Xws. 
 
Second Declension — Contractions. 
 
 H 
 
 CONTRACTIONS. 
 
 The terminations oug and ouv are contracted from o*s, hv • 
 
 €0£, 50V. 
 
 RULES. 
 
 1 . If the two last vowels are short, change them into q-j ; 
 as, o(f7s'ov, oVisv : but ££ makes n ; as, disX^ffo, a£e\<pio>?. 
 
 2. If not, omit the former one ; as, oVk's, o<r72 ; o'rfsoi, 
 o(rta ; ottfXoa, asfXa. 
 
 Sing. 
 N. oV7-sov, Sv, 
 G. &V7-&, a, 
 D. W-Aj, fi, 
 A. oV7-s'ov, Sv, 
 V. &<rt- -eov, av. 
 
 Sing. 
 N. v-o'os, St, 
 •G. v-6a, 5, 
 D. v-ocj, (J, 
 A. v-6ov, Sv, 
 
 V. V-6e, 5. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. oVI-su, fi, 
 
 G. D. qV7-6'qjv, orv. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. v-o'w, u, 
 G. D. v-ooiv, oiv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. oV7-s'a, a, 
 
 G. 0(f7-ECJV, OjV, 
 D. 0<f7-S0l£, ois, 
 \ YJ-s'a, a, 
 V. ; (77-=a,a. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. V-OGI, 0?, 
 
 G. v-oo-v, uv f 
 D. v-o'ois, or<r, 
 A. v-o*s, *£> 
 V. v-001, OK 
 
 So its Compounds s'Jvoos, &#*£, &c. Also, £oos, YVMft 
 rXfef, xp°o£, with their compounds.* Some contracts in ag 
 take the form of the third declension ; as, vif, <i. . c, D. 
 
 VOL 
 
 'IrjcfSs and diminutives in Sf are thus declined. 
 
 Sing. 
 N. 'Ir^Ss, 
 G. 'Irjtf-S, 
 D, 'I>j<r-S f 
 A. , l»]fl'-5v f 
 V. Uficr-S. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 D. Ajov-u, 
 A. Aiov-uv, 
 V. Aiov-5. 
 
 * The Compounds of *6os and £<$oj are not contracted in the nomin- 
 ative and accusative, and but seldom in the genitive plural ; as,cuvoa 
 KaMftoai not cw5, «aAip^«. G. ctow*, seldom itW 
 
 2 
 

 
 14 
 
 Third Declension. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 The terminations of this Declension are nine, \iz. 
 
 a, i, u, w, v, p, tf, g, 4/. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. 6 Ti7av, 
 G. ts Ti7avoc, 
 D. tw Ti7avi, 
 A. tov Ti7ava, 
 V. w Ti7av. 
 
 Sing.^ 
 
 N. to <r£)|xaj 
 G. ts tfojfjua7o^, 
 D. tw Coj/xa7i, 
 A. to tfwf/,a, 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V.«rwTi7avs, 
 G. D. toiv titocvoiv. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. tw (fwfxa7s, 
 G. D. to iv tfwjxaJoiv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. oi rtloLves, 
 G . twv Ti7avuiv, 
 D. toi£ Ti7a(fi, 
 A. TagTiTavaf. 
 V. w <n1aveg. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. TatfwfjiaTa, 
 G. Twv_tfw|xa7wv'/ V ' 
 D. T0I£ tfwjULatfi, 
 A. to, tf6jfjia7a, 
 
 GENDEH. 
 
 I. All nouns ending in sue, or having the genitive in vto£, 
 are masculine ; as, k /SatfiXsus, &c. The only exceptions 
 are some names of cities. 
 
 The following are Masculine with few exceptions. 
 Those ending in sip, r\p, wp, up, ?jv, ug, xg, ^ 9 ag-avTog, wv- 
 
 WV0£. 
 
 II. Nouns ending in ag-a8og, Tr)s-T*)T0£, avg, w, and ig ver- 
 bal, are always feminine ; as, r\ Xa/uwrac, &c. 
 
 The following are Feminine, with few exceptions. 
 Those ending in cci£, si$, iv, i£,Xs, v$, p£,uc;, (G. hoc, vSog, vfog) 
 wv-ovoc. 
 
 Some are common ; as, 6, 77 ysiVwv, &c. 
 
 III. Nouns ending in a, «|,i, u, wp,* oc-soc, ap-apoc, op-opoc, 
 ct^-aToc and ao£, are neuter ; as, to Cwjiacc, &c. 
 
 GENITIVE. 
 
 The Genitive Singular ends in 05 ; as, tit<xv, Timv-oc ; 
 tfw/jua, Cw/xoct-oc ; Xa/x^rac, XajUwra<$-o$ : opvi$, opvi0-oc. If the 
 
 * If not pergonal denomination* 
 
Third Declension. 15 
 
 syllable of the Nominative contains a long vowel, it is 
 usually changed into a short one in the genitive, and i and 
 . into s ; as, tfoifi^v, ?roif/.ev-os ; atfru, atfrs-os. 
 K is probable that all nouns of this declension ended ori- 
 ginally in g ; and that the genitive was formed by the in- 
 sertion of o before £, as is still the case with a large class 
 of them ; as, oyig, o$i-og ; f/£s, julu-6-s ; "Apa/3$, (''Apa^) 
 v Apa/3-o£, x>;pug, xrjpux-o-£. 
 
 1. * Terminations in Sg, r- :, dropped the first 
 letter ;t as, lk*ig for iXviSg-iSos ; x^P'S f° r X^P ,r ^' ,T0 ^ ; <P^£ 
 for (purg-urog ; 'udug for : joarg-a.rog ; opvig for opyrfg-rtog ; ava£ 
 for avaxr£, avaxro£. 
 
 Sometimes the preceding vowel was lengthened ;{ as, 
 tovg for Todg o5o$ ; xrsig for xrsvs *vof. 
 
 2. Sometimes the la<t letter was dropped ; as, vs'xrap for 
 vixrapg-apog ; £i'v for |iv£, £ivo£. In tbifl 
 
 vowel was commonly lengthened 
 
 Xifxrjv for Xip ; ; p for dc 
 
 ipog. 
 
 3. Sour for 
 tfuiiarg.arog ; jxs'Xi for | yfr 
 Xa>.r 
 
 AC 
 
 Tbc I formed 
 
 from Urging o$ into a j 
 
 A. cirav-a. 
 
 :. Nouns in whose geni- 
 
 i7v. 
 To : \ ,r XV , Xav. 
 
 '1 he poeU often violate this nil. 
 ■ xuv. 
 -Many nouns in g and uf, whose genitive is not in og 
 pure, have both a and v ; as, xopug, xo'pudo$, xoptda or * 
 
 * These changes are given as probable, rather than certain. 
 r By rule iv. pige 5. 
 J Vide rule v. page 5. 
 5 Except Aff, a**, Ace. A/«, Jupir- - 
 
 I) Those whoso last syllable has no accent ; when it is accented,^ 
 accusative if a only ; as, mpfe, 
 
] 6 Third Declension. 
 
 Zaps has x«pwa> and x<*>v. To these add compounds of 
 
 *wg ; as, faxutfovg, uxCtfoSa, or uxvtovv. 
 
 VOCATIVE. 
 
 The Vocative is, for the most part, like the nominative 4 
 as, r/rav, V. <nrav. 
 
 But the short vowel of the genitive, from the long vowel 
 of the nominative, remains in the vocative ; as, 
 Nora. Gen. Voc. 
 
 oterqp, tfars'pos, tfarsp. 
 
 "Ex-rwp, ^Exropos, "Exrop. 
 
 • 
 So likewise tfursp, "AtfoXXov and nottatfov, whose geni- 
 tives have a Zon^ vowel. 
 
 Nouns, (except those in rig and o$,) whose genitive is in 
 (& pure, drop g of the nominative, to form the vocative $ 
 as. 
 
 Nom. Gen. Voc. 
 
 ficHJiX-s-jg, -sos, /3caft\sv< 
 
 /Sous, (3odg, fiov. 
 
 /3oVpL , ^ > /3oVpuos, /3oVpu. 
 
 vou$, vooV, voU. 
 
 So, ^afc , tfouSdg, <?a7. 
 
 xXefe, xksiSdg, vJksi or xXsi£. 
 
 wtec, o££v. 
 
 "Avag has for its vocative, ova ; yuvij, yvvcu ; ff%, «2v -; 
 
 Certain nouns in eig and ct£, especially proper names, 
 which were originally adjectives or participles, have the vo- 
 cative like the nominative neuter of the primitive ; as, 
 Ai'as-Aiav, V. A'/av. 
 
 In proper names, the poets often reject the v 3 as, Afa for 
 A?av ; 0o'a for 0o'av. 
 
 Nouns in ws, and w-ooc, have the vocative in ei : as, ctU 
 S&s, V. alSoT ; rfx& } V. 9jx*7. 
 
 DATIVE PLURAL. 
 
 The dative plural is formed from the dative singular, by 
 changing the last syllable into <fi ; as, (Tupa-ri, (tupa-ft j 
 fSi%£-l, rsi^e-dt : (pkoy-i, (<pXoy-<ft') (pXoSJi ; "Apa/3-», ("Apa/3- 
 
Third Declension — Contractions. 17 
 
 <h) "Apa-^i. If v precede the last syllable, it is dropped ;* 
 as, Tirav-i, rira-tfi ; fltav-ri, ira-a'i ; and if 5 or o precede the 
 v, they are changed into their corresponding diphthongs St 
 and a ; as, Xiov-Ti, Xsa-tfi ; <ru<pds'v-ri, rvy&eT-tfi. 
 
 Nouns ending in <7, preceded by a diphthong, annex i to 
 the nominative ; as, 05s, fi*<S\ ; /3euriXsfc, £a<riX*u<ri ; irifc, 
 vautfi. 
 
 Syncopated nouns in >jpt have the dative in adi ; as, tfa- 
 T*jp, craTpowri ; So, dtff^p, dtfrpatf* ; dp>;v, dpvoj, dpvatfi ; uifcj 
 
 Xf^i is from the obsolete x-f$> and f*aprv<ri from (ft6fru& 
 
 CONTRACTIONS. 
 
 Many nouns of this declension are contracted. 
 
 1. Two vowels are contracted into a single vowel or 
 diphthong; as. fe^a, rfijpl ; rff)gf*ff, rf f)p£. 
 
 By dropping a consonant, two vowels are brought to- 
 gether, which are af erwards contracted ; as, xr'para, xe'paa, 
 xspa. 
 
 3. A vowel is sometimes dropped entirely ; as, *arr t p 9 
 *wfyo&", *arpo£ ; I viv. 
 
 Some nouns are contracted in all the cases, and some in 
 a part only. 
 
 In the oblique cases, there it no contraction, unless the 
 former vowel is short, or a doubtful vowel used as short. 
 
 It should be remembered by the learner, that 
 The short vowels are, - - - e, t, 
 
 Which have their corresponding long ones, - tj, u. 
 
 And their corresponding diphthon. - "i,ov. 
 
 The following are the rules of contraction for this declen- 
 sion, and likewise for all contracted Yerf 
 
 1. When a short vowel is doubl* changed into its 
 corresponding diphthong ; but 55 of the dual commonly be- 
 comes vi ; as, (3u<fi\ssSi (SoufiXsTg j Airro'os, Ai?r*£. In verbs, 
 Ji^i'Xfc, iyi\s7 ; irjXoofxsv, <$TjX*fjLev. In the dual, Arjfw^. 
 
 The dual sometimes follows the rule ; as, ffxfkse, <r* / 
 
 2. When both the short vowels meet, they are contract- 
 
 * By Rule v. p. 5. 
 
 t Except yaorffpi yaarijpwt. 
 
 t An example in verbs is given, for the use of the student when he 
 feache* the Contract Verbs. 
 
18 
 
 Third Declension. 
 
 ed into s ; as, tsi'x^S* r&X** 5 fi° s *> £**• In verbs, <f>iXsV 
 fJtgv, <J>iX2jul£v ; (JyjXo £<rs, (JtjXsts. 
 
 3. A short vowel before a is changed into its correspond- 
 ing long one,* and a is dropped ; as, sap, ^p 5 Arjroa, A-yjrw ; 
 rinX<rsoii, WW/}. But ea pure becomes a ; as, xp £ ' £a > XP 6 ^- 
 
 4. A short vowel before 1 forms a diphthong with it ; as, 
 rsi'/s'i) Tsfysi ; A^roY, Ar\ro7. 
 
 5. E before a long vowel or diphthong is dropped ; as, 
 *HpaxksY\$, 'HpaxXSjs ; rs^swv, **9$*' l n verbs, (piXs'w, 
 (piXw. 
 
 6. t O before a long vowel is (with the vowel) contract- 
 ed into & ; as, <fyX6w, <fyXw ; $rfk6r\re, SrfKorB. 
 
 O before a diphthong unites with the second vowel of the 
 diphthong; as, <5t]X6oi, (JrjXo? ; (fyXosi, fojXor ; fojXor}, Sr\Ko7 ; 
 &]X6ou, (fyXS. But in the termination osw, 1 being rejected, 
 it is contracted into s ; as, (fyXoew, <5tjXSv. 
 
 7. When a precedes 0, 01, s or w the contraction is into 
 w ; when otherwise, into a ; as, /3oaa<fi, ^owtfi ; tfao£, tfw£ ; 
 TifiaofjLSv, T»fi-wfASv ; ripas, <nf*a. In diphthongs, 1 is subscrib- 
 ed ; as, Tifxasi, ri/xa ; Tifjiarj, T^a ; opaoiro, opcljro. 
 
 8. Neuters in a$ pure and pa$, reject <r in the oblique 
 cases, to produce a concurrence of vowels ; as, xs'para, xi- 
 paa, xs'pa. 
 
 9. » If the former vowel be long, or 1 or u, strike out the 
 other ; as, tijatjsv, tjjjiSjv ; o<pi£$, o(pr$ ; tftv^ia, tfivTjrfi ; /3oV- 
 puss, fiorpvg. 
 
 FIRST FORM OF CONTRACTS. 
 
 Two terminations 
 names of men. 
 
 os neuter ; vs feminine, except 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. 7) Tpi*}p-^, 
 
 G. 9% rpi>jp-so£, *S> 
 D. <nj rpi»?p-s7, si, 
 A. t^v rpi>;p-ea, *j, 
 V. w Tp^jp-ss. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. 
 
 Ttt Tpl^p-S£, *J, 
 
 G. D. 
 
 <ra?v «-pn>]p-soiv, oTv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. al Tp^p-ee^, si£, 
 G. T6JV <rpi^p-£wv, GJV. 
 D. <ra?£ rpirjp-etfi, 
 A. rets Tpirjp-sag, si£ v 
 V. d rpity-sss, s*£. 
 
 * Or, as in one case, into its corresponding diphthong t as, &\n$ioc, 
 r This rule applies only to verbs. 
 
Third Declension — Second Form of Contracts. 19 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 ri rclx-os, 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 N. rot «i^-£a, ij, 
 
 G. 
 
 rxreixsosy *$, 
 
 rwTei'x-^,>j, 
 
 G. rwv tsi^- swv, gjv, 
 
 D. 
 
 toj r?Q£-f7, st 9 
 
 
 D. roTg TSi^-etfi, 
 
 A. 
 
 ro «ix-o^, 
 
 G. D. 
 
 A. toI rs/^-ea, tj f 
 
 V. 
 
 <*/ re7x' 3- 
 
 roTv rci^-soiv, o7v. 
 
 V. uTSi^-sa, 13. 
 
 1. Proper names in x\sr\g are, by the Attics, contracted 
 into r)g ; as, 'HpaxXsV, *HpaxX?j£-*s. The Ionics retain the 
 uncontracted form. 
 
 2. In some nouns ending in eo£, the 1 is entirely dropped; 
 as, tftft'os, G. oVc'sos, tiz&g. Sometimes they are otherwise 
 contracted ; as, tfcftf, tf«rt;i, Da. PI. tf-r^Ccfi. 
 
 3. The Attics often change sa, when preceded by a vow- 
 el into a ; as, XP=- a > XP= a ^ rom XP £ '°£- 
 
 4. Proper names in md compounds of feVof , a year, 
 often take the form of the first declension, in the accusa- 
 tive and vocative singular, and the nominative and accusa- 
 tive plural ; as, 
 
 A^JJLC^gVtJV 
 
 t2 AtjfAotff 3 1 . 
 
 rig AqfMtfd 
 
 ol §c7ai7ai, t*£ 4ir7ou7o^. 
 
 SECOND FORM OF CONTRACT- 
 
 Two terminations, is feminine, a few masculine* and 
 common ; « neuter. 
 
 . : Sin s- 
 
 G. rS 09-soj, £<•*, 
 D. rcji 09 li, 
 A. tov 091V, 
 I 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A.V.TW0>f£, 
 
 G. D. ro7v o^i'oiv, o^ecjv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 G. twv o^iwv, 
 D. coif o^ftfi, 
 A. ^&p-£a^, ^, 
 
 V. w 0<p-£££, £lf. 
 
 * Masculine, 3/X^4f, ty<;, X7<-Xfof «fr,/iaf>if, p<f*rif, *•<*#<*, rp<Jr«v<j, itfiriis. 
 ; ^ij. Comm. Aarpi$, Kdccj, rips, fyvij, riypif, 0»V. 
 
£0 Third Declension — Third Form of Contracts. 
 
 Sing. 
 N. tfivyjiri. 
 G. (fivfyn'-ios, swg, 
 D. tfivV-'V, I, s7, 
 A. (Tiv^flTi, 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. tftviprj*. 
 G. D. tfivqflvfoiv, g£lv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. (tlVYIIfUt, 
 
 G. ClV^-lWV,8WV > 
 
 D. divr)iruft 9 
 A. tiivtyetoLy 
 
 The terminations sw£, sf, sojv, si's, belong to the Attics, and 
 are most in use ; the other to the Ionics, who used the 
 form ios, or sog indifferently, but commonly ei in thedative. 
 For the accusative in v, a is sometimes found. 
 
 THIRD FORM OP CONTRACTS. 
 
 Three terminations, sug, % masculine ; u neuter. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. 6 (3a<fik-£vs, 
 G. tS fia<fik-sog,(iu)g) 
 D. tw /3a<frX-g'Y, sr, 
 A. tov /3a<fjX-g'a, 
 V, w /3a<frX-si/. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. o tfg'Xsx-us, 
 G. t2 tfekix'Sug, 
 D. tcj «rgXg'xg7, er, 
 A. tov tfg'Xsx-uv, 
 V. w #g'Xex-u. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. to a<r7-u, 
 
 G. tS cLtfl-sog, (gw$,) 
 
 D. tw atf7-e7, s7, 
 
 A to a<f7-u, 
 
 V. w aC7-u. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A.V. 
 
 tw ^atfiX-gg, ?j, 
 
 G. D. 
 
 Ton/ /3atfjX-g'oiv. 
 
 Dual. 
 ^ N. A. V. 
 
 Tw tfgXg'x-gg, 17, 
 
 - G ' D \ 
 
 T0IV tfgXgX-g'oW. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 , ?• A " V * 
 
 tw a(f7-gg, 5), 
 
 G.D. 
 
 tow do^-g'oiv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. oS (3atfik-isg, e7g> 
 G. t£v /SatfiX-g'wv, 
 D. Tofe 8a<fikev<ft, 
 A. t*£ (3a<fih-scig,s7g % 
 V. w /3ao"iX-gg£, $7$. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. oi tfsXsx-ssg, s7g, 
 G. TOJV tfgXgx-g&Jv, 
 D. to?s <jre\ix~s<ft, 
 A. rzgtfsKix-sag, s7g t 
 V. ci tfgXg'x-gg£j gfc, 
 
 Plural. _ 
 
 N. to. dtf7-ga, >?, 
 G. t&v a(r7-gwv, 
 D. Tofe atf7- gCi, 
 A. toL a<r7-ga, Sj, 
 V. w atf7-gct, ?j. 
 
 1. The Attic genitive in sws is most in use. Sometimes, 
 though rarely, th^accusative singular is in ij ; as, BatfiXSj, 
 and among the older Attics, the nominative plural is in 
 jj£ ; as, BatfiXijs. 
 
 2. Nouns in gu£ pure, contract sw$, into w£ ; and sa> into 
 * 5 as ? X o8 ^> Gen. x o£ 'w£> X ^ > Ace. x o£a * X <*' 
 
Third Declension — 4th and 5th Form of Contracts. 21 
 
 Some nouns in us, make the genitive in uo$, dative u7, 
 nominative and accusative plural vg ; as, i'xdfc, vos> 6'i f N. 
 and A. PL ix&fef , ixftfc. 
 
 FOURTH FORM OF CONTRACTS. 
 
 Two terminations, ws, w, feminine. 
 
 Sing. 
 N. y\ ^eii-w, 
 G. *% <p£»5-00£, ou$, 
 D. rvj (peiS-o'i, ol ', 
 A. t^v (paiJ-oa, w, 
 V. w <psi5-o?. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. ra 9si5-w, 
 G. D. tolTv yu8-w. 
 
 Plural. 
 N. a» <psi<5-oJ, 
 G. tojv (psi^-ojv, 
 D. frig (pnd-o7g 9 
 A. ras <p£i<5-ou£> 
 V. u) qpsij-oi. 
 
 1 . There are only two nouns in ug of this form, alSug and 
 ■},*£, which are rarely found out of the singular. 
 
 2. The dual and plural have the form of the second de- 
 clension. 
 
 FIFTH FORM OF C9NTRACTS. 
 
 Two terminations, *g pure, and p«s, neuter gender 
 Singular. 
 
 V co xipag. 
 
 
 
 G. rx xeparog, 
 
 «'pa*£, 
 
 xipwf. 
 
 D. rwxs'pa7i, 
 
 xspcu, 
 
 x*pa. 
 
 A. £o xipas, 
 
 
 
 V. u xipag. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 N. A. V. rd) xipale, 
 
 xipar, 
 
 xfya. 
 
 G. D. <roiv xspaloiv, 
 
 xtpaoiv, 
 Plural. 
 
 xspJjv. 
 
 .N. ra xs'pa7a. 
 
 xipaa. 
 
 xepa. 
 
 G. <tojv x£p&,7cjy, 
 
 xepawv, 
 
 XfpWV 
 
 D. T0?g xtpoitii. 
 
 
 
 A. <ra Xc'pa7a, 
 
 xs'paa, 
 
 xipa. 
 
 V. a) xs'pa7a, 
 
 xipaa, 
 
 xipa. 
 
 Some nouns are contracted by the omission of a 
 vowel. 
 
 I. In every case ; as, xeWwv. x*vwv. 
 

 22 
 
 Third Declension — Contractions* 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 SO)V. 
 
 Sing. 
 N. xsv-ewv, gjv. 
 G. xsv-suvog, wvo£, &c. 
 
 sap. 
 
 v " T 
 
 rs. gap, >jp. 
 
 G. gapo£, ^po^, &c. 
 
 aa$. 
 Sing. 
 N. Xaa£,Xa£. 
 G. Xaaos, Xc7o£, &c. 
 
 ai'g. 
 N. <5a1's, <5a£. 
 G. 6at<5os, 6a<5o£, &c. 
 
 
 2. In part of the cases ; as, duyow/jp, Aw^nip, dv^p,* 
 tfaryjp, (xyjrrjp, ya0V»ip.t 
 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. fluyal-^p, 
 G. Qvyal-ipog, pog, 
 D. ^uya7-gpi, pi, 
 A. Bvyal'Spa, pa, 
 V. 0uya7-gp. 
 
 N.A.V.0uya7-g'pg, pg, 
 G.D.0uya7-gpoiv, porv. 
 
 N. duya7-gpss, pg£, 
 G. 0uya7-g'pwv,pwv, 
 D. djya7-pdc'i, 
 A. 0uya7-gpa£, pa$, 
 V. duyar-gpgs, psg> 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. dv-7jp, 
 G. dv-gpoj, 5p6f , 
 D. dv«gpi, 5pi, 
 A. dv-g'pa, opa, 
 
 N. A. V. dv-g'pg, <5pg, 
 G. D. dv-gporv, SpoTv, 
 
 N. w-speg, Spsg, 
 G. dv-gpwv, <5pwv, 
 D. diM'dpa/fi, 
 A. dv-spag. £pa$ ; 
 
 V. ay-gp. 
 
 
 V. dv-spg£ ; <5pg$. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. tfa7 ?jp, 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. iral~speg, 
 
 G. tfa7-gpo£, po's, 
 D. ATal-lpi, pi, 
 A. tfa7-gpa, 
 V. *rd7-gp. 
 
 N. A, V. *a7-gpg,f>g, 
 G. D. tfal-gpoiv, po^. 
 
 G. cra7-gpwv, 
 D. flra7-powfi, 
 A. cra7-gpas, 
 V. *a7-g pgc, 
 
 * 'Avjyp inserts 3, because v never immediately precedes p. 
 
 i -Barfa ptrnp, yaorrj^ have no contraction in the accusative singu- 
 lar, or in the plural, to distinguish them from irdroa^ tfTpa, ydrrpa^ of 
 the first (Jeclension. 
 
Irregular Nouns. 
 
 23 
 
 Tarffyp differs from *a7^p and jx^p, by making the da- 
 tive plural yarfqptt. 
 
 Some nouns are contracted only in the nominative, 
 accusative and vocative plural. 
 
 Sing. 
 N. Spg, 
 
 G. £fl<5o£. 
 
 N. xXsiff, 
 
 G. x\ei86s. 
 
 N . Of Vl£, 
 
 G. ofvidcs, 
 
 Plural. 
 N. fj-ifcs, 
 
 A. sf-i<5a£, 
 
 e*. 
 
 8*. 
 
 V xX-rifa, } 
 \ .xX-fi3af, J £?£. 
 
 v.xx-sri^, ) 
 
 A. ojv-da*, ) Iff. 
 
 N.xaX 
 G.xaXxttdt£. 
 
 \ K&Xfl 
 
 A. xaXtf- 
 V . xaX*- 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. vafc, 
 G. vao£. 
 
 N. (361p>g, 
 G . (361pjo$. 
 
 G. jSofc, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. v-a > 
 A. v-aaj. J 
 V.v-aes, J 
 
 N. f361p-v£s, 
 A. /Sdff-uas, 
 V.jSolf-ve*. 
 
 A. /3-oa£, J 
 
 au£. 
 
 w*. 
 
 *£. 
 
 v Efio < m to have been contract- 
 
 ed to avoid the unpleasant concurrence of the letters 6g y 
 6$* which were not suili< ■♦ parated by the interven- 
 
 ing short vowel. Thk could not be done with the geni- 
 . B xXsiiog, opn6og } cpiosy because it would destroy their 
 characteristic. 
 
 1KREGUL AR NOUNS. 
 
 irregular Nouns are either defective or redundant. 
 
 DEFECTIVE. 
 
 Some are altogether indeclinable. 
 
 lie rule ir. p. 5. 
 

 S4 Irregular Nouns, 
 
 1* Names of letters 5 as, to aX<pa ; ts aX<p&. 
 
 2. Cardinal numbers from *sv1s tolxa7ov. 
 
 3. Poetic nouns which have lost the last syllable by apo- 
 cope ; as, to <5w for <Sw/jia. 
 
 4. Proper names derived from other languages ; as, 6 
 'Iaxw€, <rS 'Iaxw§. Feminines are sometimes declined 5 and 
 those which have taken Greek terminations ; as, 6 'Iocx- 
 
 W§0£. 
 
 Some have only one case ; as, N. S&£ 9 a gift, V. w 
 rav, friend.^ Dual, otitis, eyes. Plu. G. £<xwv, of good 
 things. V. wIIoVoi, O Gods. 
 
 Some have two cases ; as, N. <p0oi's£ or (pdofc, cakes ; A. 
 $0ola£. 
 
 Some neuters have the same word in three cases ; as, 
 N. A. V. ovap, £lfxocs, o<psXo£ ( /3ps7«£, &c. 
 
 Some have the singular only ; as, 7*7, aty, ol\$> -ttuj. 
 
 Some have only the plural ; as, names of festivals and 
 some cities. Aiovutfia, Bacchanalia m y 'AdJjvai, Athens* 
 
 REDUNDANT- 
 
 I. In the nominative, 
 
 .1. Of the same declension ; as, 
 
 '<} olv7i<$o7os to av7ioV7ov, an antidote. 
 
 © QoyoS) a yoke ; to £vyov, a balance. 
 6 tf7<x<Jjos, to ala&ov, stadium, &c. 
 
 In the plural of the second declension ; as, 
 detipog, a bond ; 01 detiixoi, toL Sstipa. 
 6 xuxkog, a circle ; 01 xuxXoi.. roc xuxXa. 
 6 Xi^vos, a candle ; oi Xi^voi, t<x Xu^va. 
 
 Names of Gods and men, being much in use, are more 
 redundant than others. Jupiter is reckoned to have had 
 
 ten ; Zsug, Asvg, BSsvg, Za$, Zfc, Afe, Z?jv, Zav. A»jv, Aav. 
 These, however, differ only in dialect, and may be reduced 
 to two, Afc,* and Z^v, which alone are declined. 
 
 N. G. D. A. V. 
 
 Afe, > Aios, Aji, Aia, 
 
 Zeus, $ Zsu. 
 Zrjv, Z^vos, Z*jvj, Z>jvo,- 
 
 * Ate has become obsolete. 
 
Irregular Nouns. 
 
 25 
 
 2. Of different declensions ; as, 
 
 7i /3o\rj 9 o /3oXos, a throw. 
 7) ktftfspa, o stfiaspos, evening. 
 % vixr), to vrxos-sos, victory, 
 
 o voyg-voi;, 6 voyg-voos, mind. 
 
 II. Redundant in the oblique cases, while the nomina- 
 
 tiveis the same. 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 1 V A 7 K, 
 
 "Ay*, 
 
 "AytSog, Agis. 
 
 o "Apjf, 
 
 »Ap t 
 
 "A£7)7os, "Afsos, Mars 
 
 o ju^-xrjs, 
 
 -XX, 
 
 -xV7os, a mushroom. 
 
 o 1(1*, 
 
 Jf«, 
 
 E£w7og, love, &c. 
 
 From these redundant nouns must be distinguished those 
 which, with different terminations, have different meanings ; 
 as, o tfTrog, grain ; to cnVoy, food. 
 
 Some nouns are peculiar to dialects ; as, fj *yXi), a gate, 
 Poet, o rrJXog, Ionic. 
 
 >'OUNS DERIVED FROM OTHERS FOR DISTINCTION OF SEX. 
 
 Nouns are often derived from other nouns, for distinc- 
 tion of sex. 
 
 1. In the first declension, the feminine is formed by 
 changing tj£, into ig-iSog, and rr\g into ti£-ti<$os, *rgig-rpi8og or 
 T£*a. 
 
 IVm. 
 rj Ix^lg-tSog, a Scythian woman. 
 7) «po<prJig-liSog, a prophetess. 
 7) ajXrflpis'lpiSog, a female piper. 
 7] >],aX7pia, a female singer. 
 
 Masc. 
 o 2xy(3r^, a Scythian. 
 6 tfpo<p»-/lT)s, a prophet, 
 o ayX>j7ii£, a piper. 
 6 ^a>.lr\g y a singer. 
 
 A few are formed from oug ; as, rj vsavij, from o veavlas, a 
 young man. 
 
 2. In the second declension, og is changed into a or t\ ; 
 and sometimes into ig-iSog and aiva. 
 
 Masc. 
 o (JoiJXog, a man servant, 
 o Ge6g, a God 
 4 oif*vo£. 
 b Xyxofc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 7] <$oyX>i ? a maid servant. 
 7] 0s'a. a Goddess. 
 t) onx\ig-i8og y a lamb. 
 f) Xuxaiva, a wolf. 
 
26 Patronymics. 
 
 In the third declension, wv is changed into aivct ; r t g, g, ^ 
 into tftfa ; ews, into sia, i$, or ifltfa ; vg 9 into utftfa ; ?jp, and wp, 
 into sipa ; oo£, into t/fc, w'lvrj or ag. 
 
 6 Xs'cov, a lion. r\ Xiawa, a lioness. 
 
 6 Kf?js, a Cretan. ^ KpSjtftfa, a Cretan woman. 
 
 6 KiXig, a Cilician. y KiXitfcTa, a Cilician woman. 
 
 o /iWiXsus, a king. r, /3a<fi'keia, a queen. 
 
 o 4<Jlr\g. 7) (fuflsigoL) a Saviour. 
 
 1. Some masculines have many feminines ; as, b 0*$*, fj Qia^ eiaiva. 
 h pcun\evs, king. ^ jSaot'Xcia, ^aviKicoa^ @aci\is, /WAiwa, queen. 
 
 2. Anciently the same word was used in both genders ; as, 6, >? 
 6fdf, 6, fjjarp6si 6, # rvpavvos, 6, >/ SeaTrortjs. 
 
 3. Some of these derivatives differ in signification; as, haiprj^ a 
 friend ; iratya, or iratptj, a concubine. 
 
 PATRONYMICS. 
 
 Masculine patronymics are formed from the primitive, by 
 changing the termination of its genitive into ao7js, latfrjs, and 
 
 1. Nouns of the first declension, and log of the second, 
 change the genitive s into afr(\g. Bopiag, Bops-a, Bop£-a<5*]£, 
 the son of Boreas ; "HXios-^HXi-s, e HXi-a^. 
 
 2. Other nouns change the termination of the genitive 
 into iSyg ; as, Kpovog-s. Kpov-ifoj£. Ai'a|,G. A/ax-o£, Aiax-i^. 
 NFV7wf-NsV7of-G£, Nedlog-iSrig. 
 
 3. But in aZZ nouns which have the penult of the geni- 
 tive long, the change is into iadr,g ; as, Aas'p7ij£-s, Aasp7-/a&i£. 
 v A7Xa$-av7o£, 'A7Xav7-ia&j£. 
 
 The Ionics form their Patronymics in iuv ; as, Kpovfov for Kpovi&vsi 
 from Kp<5voj. The Colics, in dSios ; as, 'Yppdtios for 'rppdSrjs. 
 
 Feminine patronymics end in fe, a$, ivq, or «v*j. 
 
 1. Those in is and as are formed from their masculines, 
 by casting off Sri • as, Nstf7opi's, daughter of Nestor, from 
 Ns<rtopi-&js, son of Nestor ; 'HXias from 'HXia^. 
 
 2. Those in 7)7$ are formed by changing the nominative of 
 the primitive into r'ig ; as, XpCtf-rig, Xputf-vs ; Ka5/xo£, Ka5- 
 
 3. Those in iv*j are formed from nominatives of the se- 
 cond declension in os impure, and of the third form of con- 
 tracts, in the third declension ; as, "ASgarfos, 'ASgouflivr,. 
 
 N7)£SU£,-N?)£iv?7. 
 
 

 Diminutives — Adjectives . 2 7 
 
 4. Those in wv?j, from nominatives in io$ of the second, 
 and iuv of the third declensions ; as, 'Ixa^iog, 'Ixajiwv*). 'Hs- 
 
 DIMINUTIVES. 
 
 1. Masculine diminutives end in ices, ag, ivtjs, iXo$, uXos, 
 i^vos, kTxgs, &c. ; as, <7ratfarias, a term of endearment, from 
 tu'X'tfoLg, a father, &c. 
 
 2. Feminine diminutives end in as, *, i7?,uXrj, a^, r^, 
 i(Txr) ; as, xjrjvfe, a little fountain, from xpvjvrj, a fountain, Lc. 
 
 3. Neuter diminutives end in wv, cuov, siov, oiov, kJiov, uXXiov, 
 axviov, a^iov, atfiov, kc. ; as, (rtfsdiov, a little sparrow, from 
 <r7.£s06g, a sparrow, &c. 
 
 4. One primitive has sometimes a variety of derivatives ; 
 as, from x6gr\, a girl, is derived xofiVxij, xofcttfiov, xogiov, xogi- 
 <5iov. # 
 
 ADJECTlVi 
 
 5 unification of the principal terminations. 
 I. Adjectives in ow^ raf, and oXrc, denote the quality of 
 objects from which they are derived; ns, £17. -liud- 
 
 dering, from 
 
 ;, oio$, and c. 4e origin, or 
 
 "belonging to;" as, a^oparoc:, belonging to the market; 
 carpCos, relating to the father ; jpazw's, belonging to paint- 
 ing. 
 
 3. Those in ric-vrcp. aXfos, wi note 
 fulht I f .11 of ti< 
 fcifMX? full of sand ; ooXcpoc, full of 
 craft. Those in $ pog and propensi- 
 ty ; as, oivyjpos, given to wine. have an active mean- 1 
 ing ; as, votfrjpog, causing distt 
 
 4. Those in rfhog and wX .te propensity ; as, tfiyij* 
 Xo$, given to silence ; -^euOwXoc:, prone to lying. 
 
 5. Those in ?of contracted into 5$ f and n*? s with the accent 
 on the ante-penult, denote the matter of which a thing is 
 
 * Amplificatives have various terminations. Masculines end iu 
 ias ; as, nuywvtas, having a great beard, from vifyw, beard : In oj ; as, 
 opfc/o;, a full grown iamb, from dps, a lamb. 
 
 Fuminines end in is; as, Uirif, a great torch, from Smts t a torch 
 Neuters end in toy j as, xtpp&iiovi a great stone, from gtp^rff, a stone. 
 
23 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 made ; as, xp^* G S <wr XP^ws* made of gold ; guXivos, made 
 of wood. 
 
 6. Those in t^og } denote chiefly fitness, passive or active ; 
 as, fxa^ifx^, warlike. 
 
 7. Those in jawv-ovos, which are chiefly verbals, denote 
 the active quality of the verb ; as, JXsfyx'wv, compassionate, 
 from sXslu. 
 
 Adjectives of three terminations. 
 The feminine follows the first declension of nouns ; 
 masculines in o$, the second ; all other masculines, the 
 third. 
 
 Sing. 
 N xaX-6s, y> ov, 
 G xaX-ou, S#, ou, 
 D xaX-w, 11, cj, 
 A xaX-dv ? ^v, 6v, 
 V xaX-s, >jj 6v. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V xaX-w, a, w, 
 G. D xaX-oTv ; an/, on/. 
 
 Plural. 
 N xaXof, ai, a, 
 G xaX-wv, wv, wv, 
 D xaX-oT$, cug, oTg 7 
 A xaX-ou£, ag y a, 
 V xaX-oi, a!, a. 
 
 Adjectives in os pure, and pos, have the feminine in a ; 
 
 as, <xgio£-a-ov ; fxaxpo^ -xpa, -xpov. 
 
 Except compounds of tfXoes and adjectives in so£, denot- 
 ing matter and color ;* as, xp^sos, *1» ov 5 <poivixeo$, r\, ov ; 
 also the numeral oyStos. But the neuter plural of these is 
 in a ; as, XP U ^* 
 
 Sing^ 
 
 N jxaxp-o's, <x, ov, 
 G |xaxp-ou, a&, ou, 
 D (xaxp-w. a, £, 
 A fxaxp-6v,<xv, ov, 
 V fJLaxp,s, a, ov. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N.A.Vfj»axp-w, a, w, 
 G.D fxaxp-olv, an/joTv. 
 
 Plural. 
 N fiaxp-oi, ai, a, 
 G fjuxxp-wv, wv, wv, 
 D jxaxp-o»£, afe, oj£, 
 A fxaxp-ou£, a$, a, 
 V juwxxp-oj, ai, a. 
 
 as. 
 
 1. Some adjectives of this form are contracted 
 
 Xpjtfeos-Sg, xp'^^'^j X?^ Sov '* v i & c « 
 otfrXoos-sj, ocjrXoyj-Tj, atfXoov-Sv, &c. 
 
 2. The defective adjective tfwos, or cfw£, contracted from 
 4cu>s or Coos, is thus declined : 
 
 Sing. N. o, 7), 0%, (*? tfa) to tfwv. 
 A. <rov, <rov ; <ro, tfwv. 
 
 * Except when p precedes tog ; as, apppws, -a-c* ; also, «f>fyeos and 
 
Adjectket. 
 
 29 
 
 Plur. N. 01, ai, tfwoi, (oy, <fo7) ra <fwa, tfa. 
 A. <rou£, Tas,tfw£, ra Cwa, (fa. 
 
 3. These four, aXXos, t*)Xixou7os, <ro<fou7os, and roiou7o£, have 
 the neuter in o ; as, aXXos-rj-o. 
 
 4. Compounds in og have commonly but two termina- 
 tions ; as, 6, ri adava7o£, to ddava7ov ; likewise most of 
 those in if*o£, sio^, aios, ios ; as, Soxipoc. But those in xo$, Xo$, 
 v of, pos, <ros so£, have three endings. 
 
 5. The Attics commonly give but two terminations to ad- 
 jectives of this form ; as, o, tj xaXo$, to xaXov. 
 
 Sing. 
 N. 0%-Cs, sTa, u, 
 G. 6f-5og, eias, s'oc, 
 D. of -si', $r, sia, si, sT y 
 A. of-^v, g?av, u, G. D. 
 
 V. og-u, sfo, u. jog-soiv, siaiv, s'oiv, 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 og-s's, sia, &, 
 
 Plural. 
 N. if-&? 9 Sik, sfai, sa, 
 
 G. og-s'&JV, SlWV, s'ojV, 
 
 D. of-s'<fi, eiai£, sVi, 
 A. og-s'as, si's, sia£, s'a, 
 V. i f fe f, e^, s?ai,sa. 
 
 1. The Poets often make the accusative of the mascu- 
 line and feminine singular in sa ; as, ddia. crop7iv, for adeiav 
 tfop7iv ; Sbpia ir6v7ov, for supuv 4r6v7ov. 
 
 2. Words belonging to this form, arc sometimes used 
 with only two terminations ; as, ©rjXus e&ptft), Od. i, 467. 
 
 Sing ; 
 \. k-cijv, S<fa, ov, 
 G.£x-6v7o£,a<rT)S,6v7©£, 
 D.sx-6v7i, ktfji, ov7i, 
 A.lx-6v7a,S<fav, 6v, 
 V.lx-wv,* So"a, ov. 
 
 wv. 
 Dual. • 
 N. A. V. 
 
 lx-ov7s, stfa,6v7e, 
 
 G. D. 
 5X-6v7oiv,^(faiv,6v7oiv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 NJx-6v7s£, *<fai, ov7a, 
 G.s"x-6v7wv, *<fwv, 6v7wv, 
 DJx-5(fi, ktfaig, 5(fi, 
 A Jx-6v7a£, iffa^, 6v7a, 
 V.sx-oVJs^atfai, 6v7a. 
 
 Sing. Dual. 
 
 N.tf-a& , a<fa, av, N. A. V. 
 
 G.tf-av76s,a<Ti')£,av76£,<i'-av7£, a<fa, av7s, 
 
 D.flr-av7i, outy, av7i, 
 
 A.^-av7a, atfav, av, tf-aVIoiVjatfa^o^oiv, 
 V.*-a£, a<fa, av 
 
 G. D. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N.tf-av7s£, dtfai, av7a, 
 G.ir-6Lvluv,tt<f£iV) av7wv» 
 D.tf-afl'i, a<fai£, atfi, 
 A.*-av7a£, cufa£, av7a, 
 V.*-av7s£, oufai, av7a. 
 
 * After this form, the participles of the Present, 1st Future, and 2d 
 Aorist Active are declined. 
 
 2* 
 
30 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 stg. 
 Sing. Dual. 
 
 N.^apj-eis, satfa, sv, 1 N. A. V. 
 G.xa>pi-sv1og,e<f<fri$,svlo$, xapi-sv7s, s'fltfa, 
 sv7s, 
 
 G. D. 
 ^api-sv7ojv 3 sV- 
 tfaiv, sVJoiv. 
 
 D.^api-?v7i, sVtfTj, sv7i, 
 A.^otp»-sv7a, stfffav, sv, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N.xapUv7s£, sotfai, sv7a, 
 G.^api-s^wVjStftfcJVjS^wv, 
 D.^api-sitfi, sVtfais, sitfi, 
 A.xapi-tv7a^,sVtfa^ ? sv7a, 
 
 V.^api-gv76j,s<rtfai, sv7a. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 G.rifA-5iv7o£,^<ftfrj£,$;v7o£ 3 
 
 D.<n{A-Sjv7i, r?tftf7], Sjv7i, 
 A.Ti|x->jv7a, Sjatfav. tjv, 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. 
 
 rifx-5jv7s, ^tftfa, 
 
 r ; v7s, 
 
 G.D. 
 
 <n|w->jv7oiv, V- 
 tfaiv, tjv7oiv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N.<n/x-?jv7ss, r}<f<fou, r)v1a, 
 G.Tj|x->jv7wv,rjfl'a'wv, tjv7wv, 
 
 A.rijx-Sjv7a£, yjatfas, 5jv7a, 
 V.«rui.-5jv7££> 5j(ftfai, Sjv7a. 
 
 0V£. 
 
 Sing. Dual. 
 
 N.<rXax-as,a(r<ra,ifv, I N. A. V. 
 
 G.#Xax-Sv7o£,&tftf'/)£,2v7o£, tfXax4sv7s, stf- 
 
 D.tfXax-Sv7i, stftfyi, 5v7i, 
 A #< rXatx-iv7a, itftfav, Sv, 
 « r J tfXax-Sv, > - , p. 
 
 (fa, Sv7s 
 G.D. 
 
 «7rXax-£v7oiv, 
 £tftfaiv,sv7oiv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N.tfXax-sv7s£, Srttai, Sv7a, 
 G. flrXax-£v7«v,s<jtfwv,$v7w¥, 
 D.tfXax-Stfi, k(f<faig i Stfi, 
 A . < Xax-s v7a£,&<T0'a£ , S v7a , 
 
 V .4rXax-Sv7s£,g<f<fa(, Sv7a. 
 
 Sing. 
 N.rs'p-rjv, siva, sv, 
 
 G.Tcp-SVO£,SlVrj£,SV0£, 
 
 D.rs'p-svi, sJvij, swf, 
 A.rs'p-sva, sivav, sv, 
 W.Te'p-SV, siva, sv. 
 
 * >jv. 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. 
 
 rip-svs, siva, svs 9 
 
 G.D. 
 rsp-svoiv, sivaiv, s'voiv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N.rsp-svs£, sivai, sva, 
 G.rsp-s'vwv, sivwv, s'vctfv, 
 D.rs'p-stfi, S('vai£, stfiy 
 A.Tip-svas, sivas, sva, 
 V.Tsp-svsg, sivai, sva. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Mi\ag and raXas borrow their feminine from the obsolete 
 IhsKa'mg and TaXaivog ; 
 
 * Tiptus has, in the vocative case, riptjev and npfc* whence we have 
 Tifirjv and nnjj in the contracted form. 
 t Contracted from irXocfov and TrAaata, the vocative of :r>a*&t« 
 
Adjectives 
 
 31 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N.f/iX-as, a*va, av, 
 G./x='X-avo£, ai'vTjj, avo;, 
 D.fxs'X-aw, aivij, avi, 
 A.jui-sX-ava, aivav, av, 
 V.jxsX-av, awa, av. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. 
 
 jxs'X-avs,aiva,avs. 
 
 G. D. 
 fjisX-avoiv, afvaiv, 
 avoiv. 
 
 Plural. 
 N.fxsX-av^, aivai, ava, 
 G.fXsX-avwv,aivwv, avwv, 
 D.fXs'X-atfi, aivais, atfi, 
 A.(xiX-ava^, aiva£, ava, 
 V.fjtsX-av^, aivai, ava. 
 
 In like raannner <raXa£. 
 
 Msyag borrows the feminine gender, with most of the 
 masculine and neuter, from the obsolete (ULiyaX-os, rj, ov. 
 
 Sing. Dual. 
 
 N. fiiy-oLS, iXtj, a, N- A- V. 
 
 G. jULcyaX-ou, v\$, ou, asyaX-w, a, w,, 
 D. fxsyaX-GJ, 77, oj, G. D. 
 
 A. fxsy-av, aXrjv, a, jUtsyaX-oiv, a<v, oiv, 
 V. /xsy-a, aXrj, a. 
 
 Plural. 
 N. fASyaX-oi, ai,a, 
 G. /JiSyaX-wv, cjv, wv f 
 D. fxsyaX-tis, ai£, oi$> 
 A. jJLfyaX-ou^, a$, a, 
 V. jxsyaX-oi, ai, a. 
 
 IloXCg borrows the feminine, and most of the masculine 
 and neuter, from the obsolete *oXX-<fe, 4f, ov. 
 
 Sing. Dual. 
 
 N. *oX-ife, >df, u, I N • A. V. 
 
 G. tfoX-Xou, X<c, XoG,toXX-w, a, oj, 
 
 D. tfoX-Xcj, X>j, X£, 
 \- ^oX-i;v,Xr,v, u, 
 V . -roX-u, X>j, & 
 
 G. D. 
 
 croXX-oIv, arv, on/. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 \. -0XX-01, a/, a, 
 1 i XX- wv, wv, wv, 
 D. croXX-ofe, afe, ofe, 
 A. ToXX-oife, a$, a, 
 ( .XX-oi, al, a. 
 
 1. toX^s is sometimes declined regularly by the poets, 
 like ogife ; as, tfoX-Js, t7a, y, &c. Iliad A. 56 
 
 2. IIoXXos, atoXXtj, «roXXov, is sometimes found regularly 
 declined in all the ca- 
 
 TERMINATIONS PECULIAR TO PARTICIPLES. 
 
 wv, outfa, ouv, 
 fife, Sftfa, sv, 
 
 2d Future Active- 
 
 i 1st and 2d Aorist Passive, and 2d 
 { Conjugation of Verbs in jju. 
 
 r, ou<r«, ov 3d I Conj j of Verbs . 
 
 U£, vtia, UV, 4th ^ J o ^ 
 
 w$, uia, os, Perfect Active and Middle. 
 
 *oj£, w(fa, w£, Perfect Middle Ionic. 
 
 CO 
 no . 
 
 !J 
 
 ci 
 
 66 
 
 * Contracted from a-wy, a-v<a, a-*?. 
 
33 
 
 Adjective*. 
 
 uv. 
 Sing. 
 
 N. *W-wv, oOVa, ouv, 
 G. <rutf-ouv7o£, &<tr\g, ouv7o£, 
 D. rutf-oCMi, sety, oOV7i, 
 A. *w-ouv7a, outfav, ouv, 
 V. <rutf-wv, oOVa, ovv. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. Tutf-ouv7s, &tfa, oGV7s, 
 G« D. *w-sv7oiv, stfajv, &v7oiv. 
 
 Plural. 
 N. <ru#-oCV7ss, outfai, 2v7a, 
 G. *w-ouv7wv, outfwv &v7wv, 
 D. cutf-oOVi, ouVai£, ourfi, 
 A. Tutf-o&VJas, ou(fa£, oOV7a, 
 V. <rutf-oOV7ss, oucTai, oOV7a. 
 
 OU£. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. 5i5-ous, ouVa, ov, 
 G. 8id-6vlog, outing, ov7o£, 
 D. <5i5-6v7i, oixfj), 6v7i, 
 A. 5i<S-6v7a, oOVav, 6v, 
 V. &5-ou£, oua'a, 6v. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. 5i<5-6v7s, ouVa, 6v7e, 
 G« D« <5i5-6v7ojv, outfaiv, 6v7oiv. 
 
 Plural. 
 N. SiS-ovlsg, oOVai, ov7a, 
 G. 5i5-6v7wv, oucfwv, ov7wv, 
 D. §iS-ov(ft, outfai^, 0OV1, 
 A. &5-6v7a£, outfas, ov7a, 
 V. <$i<J-6v7s£, outfai, 6v7a. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. c$ruq>-w£, ufa, 6^, 
 G. «rs<ru<p-67o£, ui'as, ©7o£, 
 D. Tsru<p-67i, uia, 67i, 
 A. Tsru(p-o7a, wav, 6$, 
 
 V. «T£TU(p-Wg, u?a, 0£. 
 
 Dual. 
 N« A. V. T£Tuq>-67e, via, 61s, 
 G. D. fsrv^-ofoiv, uiaiv, ©7o»v* 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 
 tt§4 
 
 Sing. 
 Tu<pd-sfe, srtfa, &, 
 <ruq>0-s'v7o£, s'\dt\g, ivrt£- 9 
 <ru<p0-sV7i, sidj\, s'v7i, 
 <ru<p0-s'v7a, siVav, g'v, 
 
 Dual. 
 A. V. <rv(p6-£vle 9 rftfa, sVfc, 
 D. <ru<pd-eV7oiv, sitfaiv, Mow. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 rupfl-sVfes, sfrai, sV7a, 
 ru(pd-^v7ojv, eitfwv, sVJgjv, 
 rucpd-sfri, s7d aig, s7<fi 9 
 rv(p&-sv1as> sitfag, s'v7a, 
 rvyt-ivlsg, sfrai, sv7a. 
 
 !*" 
 
 Sing. 
 
 £suyv-fe, OVa, uv, 
 £suyv-uv7o$, tfefys, uv7o£, 
 £aiyv-uv7*, uo% uv7i, 
 ^5u7v-uv7a, OVav, uv, 
 £suyv-u£, (Jcfa, uv. 
 
 Dual. 
 A. V. £suyv-uv7s, uVa, uv7s ; 
 D. £suyv-uv7oiv, utfaiv, uVJow* 
 
 Plural. 
 %svyv-vvlsg, uo'ai, uv7a, 
 £suyv-uv7wv, utfdiv, uv7wv, 
 £suyv-uVi, uVaj£, utfi, 
 £suyv-i5v7a£, utfas, uv7a, 
 £suyv-uv7ss, vVaj, uv7a. 
 
 tig contracted 
 Sing. 
 laV-w$, w<fa, w£, 
 sVf-wfos, wtfys, &ro$, 
 sV<r-w<n, City, Cki, 
 sfl'T-wra, wtfav^ w£, 
 
 Dual. 
 A. V. gVr-clks, wtfct, cSrs, 
 D. itfr- wrwv, wtfecw, wrwn 
 
Adjectives. 
 
 33 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 N. rsrjcp-oles, vTcu, o'7a 
 
 > 
 
 N. Itfr-wVes, c*xfaj, wra, 
 
 
 G. Tsni(p-67cov, urwv, o7wv. 
 
 G. £<f<r- wrwv, wtfci**, wrwv, 
 
 
 D. *reru<p-o'<j'i, uia*£> o<fi, 
 
 
 D. 5tfr-c3(J'i, wtfais, gjo*i, 
 
 
 A. TBrv(p-61a£, ufa£, 67a, 
 
 A. Itfr-ojras, utfas, wra, 
 
 
 V. rsru<p-67*£, uiai, e7a. 
 
 
 V. i(f<r-Cksg y wtfai, o>a. 
 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIONS. 
 
 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 
 
 *• 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. Plural. 
 
 
 M. and F. N. 
 
 M. F. and N. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 N. 
 
 N. 6V&>£-0£, OV. 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 N. £v<So£-oi, 
 
 a. 
 
 G. £v<S6g; — ou« 
 
 ev<J6g-w. 
 
 G. !v£6g — wv. 
 
 
 D. iv^of — cj. 
 
 
 D. iv56g — oi£. 
 
 
 A. Tv(5o^ — ov. 
 
 G. D. 
 
 A tv&f-ouf, 
 
 a. 
 
 V. frft£-t. 
 
 gv&g-o.v. 
 
 V. sv£o|-oi, 
 
 a. 
 
 
 up. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. Plural. 
 
 
 M.andF. N. 
 
 
 M. and P. 
 
 N. 
 
 N. fi£yaXf;r-up, op 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 \.(UL:^aX>JT-0p^, 
 
 opa. 
 
 G. (xsyaXijr — opo*. 
 
 fi.£yaX>jr-ope. 
 
 G. jjie^aXiir — opojv. 
 
 D. ^UyoCKrfr — opi. 
 
 
 D. jxiyaXrjr — op<fi. 
 
 A. fXfyaXV-opa» °p- 
 
 G. D. 
 
 A. fUyaXypr-opas 
 
 opa. 
 
 V. fAf^aXrjr — op. 
 
 fiS/ aXrjr-dpoiv. V. f/^yaXr/r-opes, 
 
 opa* 
 
 Sing. 
 
 a?. 
 .Dual. Plural. 
 
 
 If. and t N- 
 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 N. 
 
 N. a£iv-ct£, av. 
 
 \ AV. 
 
 ^ 
 
 avra. 
 
 Ci. asiv — avro£. 
 
 deiv-avrs. 
 
 ( i '.vruv. 
 
 
 D. aiiv — avn. 
 
 
 D. ds/v — atfi. 
 
 
 A. aciv-avra, av. 
 
 a d. 
 
 A. dgiv-avra£, 
 
 avra. 
 
 Y. dfiv — av. 
 
 dfiv-avcoiv. 
 
 V. cte»v-avT££, 
 
 avra. 
 
 Sing 
 
 Dual. Plural. 
 
 
 M. and F. N. 
 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 N\ 
 
 N. t^ap-i^, u 
 
 \ A. V. 
 
 N. s^ap-ires, 
 
 na. 
 
 G. si>x tt P — IT °£ # 
 
 sJ^ap 
 
 G. £vx u P — »Vojv. 
 
 
 I), eC^ap — m. 
 
 
 D. £jx**P — ,oV,# 
 
 
 A. s j^xp-ira & iv, i. 
 
 G. D. 
 
 A. £u^ap-iTa£, 
 
 ira. 
 
 V. s'J^ap— i. 
 
 Eu X ap- 
 
 T»IV. 
 
 ^ap-irc\c. 
 
 K*. 
 
34 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 
 
 
 u£. 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 N. 
 
 M. F. and N. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 N. 
 
 N. aSaxp»vg 9 
 
 u. 
 
 ^ N. A. V. 
 
 N. AScatp-veg, u£, 
 
 ua. 
 
 G. d&bcp — vog. 
 
 
 d<5axp-us. 
 
 G. d&xxp — uwv. 
 
 
 D. d^ocxp — u*. 
 
 
 
 D. d#axp — vtfi. 
 
 
 A. cc<$axp-uv, 
 
 u 
 
 G.D. 
 
 A. d£dxp-ua£, u£, 
 
 ua. 
 
 V. a5axp-u. 
 
 
 ddaxp-uow. 
 
 V. d&xxp-uss, vg> 
 
 uot. 
 
 
 otis.* 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 M. and P. 
 
 N. 
 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 N. 
 
 N. &V-0U£, 
 
 ouv 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 ^. Sitf-odes, 
 
 ©5a. 
 
 G. <5jV — oSog* 
 
 
 <5iV-o<5$. 
 
 G. <W — oowv. 
 
 
 D. <JjV — o5i. 
 
 
 
 D. <5iV — otfi. 
 
 
 A. 8itf-oSa & ou\ 
 
 ', ouv 
 
 G.D. 
 
 A. <5iV-o5a£, 
 
 o5a. 
 
 V. Sto-ws & ouj 
 
 ouv 
 
 . <W-65oiv. iV. &V-o5s$, 
 
 o<Ja» 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 PluraJ. 
 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 N. 
 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 N. 
 
 N. a||-if]v, 
 
 sv. 
 
 N. A. V. 1 
 
 <T. a^-svsg, 
 
 sva. 
 
 G. a^| — svo$. 
 
 
 a^-svs. ( 
 
 x. d|| — svwv. 
 
 
 D. oc|| — m. 
 
 
 1 
 
 ). a|| — stfi. 
 
 
 A. af^-eva, 
 
 i*. 
 
 G. D. 
 
 L a$£-iwg 9 
 
 sva. 
 
 V. a||— sv. 
 
 
 d||-£voiv # P 
 
 f. d||-svsc, 
 
 sva. 
 
 
 «s4 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 N. 
 
 
 ^ M. and F. 
 
 N. 
 
 N. suys-ws, 
 
 WV. 
 
 
 N. svys — w, 
 
 w. 
 
 G. suys — w. 
 
 
 N. A. V. evys-u. 
 
 G. svys — wv. 
 
 
 D. &2ys 03. 
 
 
 
 D. svys — w$. 
 
 
 A. svys — wv. 
 
 
 G. D« suys-^v. 
 
 A. svys-ug, 
 
 w. 
 
 V. sb'ys-ws, 
 
 wv. 
 
 
 
 V. Buys — w. 
 
 W. 
 
 * After the substantives of which they are compounded. Thus, 
 mv65vsi yv • G. -ovtos ; D. -ovrt ; A. -ovra, hv. Contracted compounds 
 of nouns of the 2d Declension : thus, tvv-vs w ; G. -* ; D. -y ; A. -w ; 
 V. ~y, av. In the same manner, those of pva ; as, Stpvtis, &c. 
 
 tThe Compounds of fywj, y*Aw>, sometimes those of Kipag, with on- 
 ly one termination ; as, &5<rtp-wj, ws ; G. wrfj. rrAfw? has three ter- 
 minations, 7r>/wy, rrA/a, irXiwv ; sometimes the neuter loses the final v ; 
 as, ayfjpv for ayijpwv* 
 
Adjectives. 
 
 35 
 
 
 
 •*- 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 n: 
 
 M. F. and 
 
 N. 
 
 M. and F. N. 
 
 N. dXrjd — r,$, 
 
 fc 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 
 \\ akrfi-iig, gij^sa,^.* 
 
 G. <xkr,Q — sog, 
 
 &- 
 
 dXr/d-SS, v 
 
 
 G. OL\f\& — iwv, wv. 
 
 D. dXrjd — s'V, 
 
 6?. 
 
 
 
 D. etXr^ — EtTl. 
 
 A. dXrjd-Ea, r}> 
 
 fc 
 
 G ; D. 
 
 
 A. akr\&-£a$, gi£, sa, 7j. 
 
 V. dXTjd-S£. 
 
 
 dXrjd-s'oJv, 
 
 on/. 
 
 V. dX»]0-sss, gJ$, g'a, ^1. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 OJV. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 M. and F- N. 
 
 N. yftr-w, 
 
 ov 
 
 
 
 N. yfir-ovfc:, ova. 
 
 G. ytir — &vo$. 
 
 
 N. A. V. yzW 
 
 -ovs. 
 
 G. ysir — ovojv. 
 
 D. ysiV — ovi. 
 
 
 | 
 
 
 D. ysir — otfi. 
 
 A. ystr-ova, 
 
 ov 
 
 G- D. yfir-o'vojv. 
 
 A. ytfr-fiwc, ova. 
 
 V. ysir — ov. 
 
 
 
 
 V. yffr-«il ova. 
 
 Comparatives in ojv are declined like ysfluv, except in 
 the accusatiu* singular, and the nominative, accusative 
 and vocative plural. 
 
 M. F. 
 
 I !lg. 
 N. fJLSl^-WV, jULfl^-CV. 
 
 G. (JLSl^-OVO^. 
 I). fA.£l£-0VI. 
 
 A. fASj£-»va jjifi^-oa /xs,,; fjLgl^-cv. 
 
 V. fXSl^-OV. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. p*f£«i 
 
 G. D« (Xcl^-OVOJV. 
 
 Plural. 
 N |*fi?-0itif |tfi£-06g fici^-ouj, fJL£i^-ova ^i^-oa fASl£-W. 
 
 G. |JL£l^-OVWV. 
 
 D. f/.ei£-o<ri. 
 
 ,a=i£-ovas fx=^-oaj f*si£-a£, juL£j£-ova|jisj£-oa fiei£-cj. 
 V. fxsi^-ovg^ |Agi£-oS£ {Asi£-*£, fAsi£-ova fi.gi£-oa fxsi£-w. 
 
 Some Substantives are contracted like fjuf i^.cjv ; as, 
 " Aro'XXwv, Ace. 'Atfo'XXwva, 'AiroXXwa, 'AsroXXoj. 
 
 * Those which have a vowel before M , arc contracted into I ; as, 
 
 iyuo, vyia. 
 
36 Comparison of Adjectites . 
 
 Adjectives with two terminations are sometimes declined 
 with three by the Poets ; as, spw-og, -09, ov. There are a 
 few which commonly take a distinct termination in the fe- 
 minine ; as, Ts'p-Tjv, -siva, ev, aiuw-os, -a, ov. 
 
 Compounds in r,s, and especially those in rr\g, have only 
 one ending ; as, vsysXnyspiryg, &c. In the jEolic and Do- 
 ric dialects, they end in *ra ; as, vj<psXr)y£ps<ra. 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF ONE TERMINATION. 
 
 These are mostly of the common gender, wanting the 
 neuter. They are, 1. Adjectives compounded with sub- 
 stantives which remain unchanged ; as, tfoXuxsip, &c. 2. 
 Those derived from tfar»jf and ju^t*]£ ; as, arfaTcof, &c. 3. 
 Adjectives in v\g-r\Tog, ug-urog, a£-a<5o£, ig-i8og 9 £ and ^ All 
 these take the form of the third declension of Nouns. 4. 
 Adjectives in *)$, and as, which take the form of the first 
 declension of Nouns ; as, £0sXov<j%-2 : these are all mascu- 
 line. 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Comparison is made in <rspos, ralog, or iwv, idlog. 
 1 . The comparative and superlative are formed by 
 adding rspog and <ra7os to the positive ; as, 
 
 fjuaxap, fxaxap-7spo£, jxaxap-<ra7o£. 
 oWXzs, owrXstf^epos, a^Xxtf-Talo^. 
 -os drops g ; as, fjuaxpo^, iiaxpo-lspog, fj,axpo-7a7o£ ; and if the 
 penult is short, changes into w ;* as, tfo<po's, tfo<pw-7spo$, (To^w- 
 7a7©£. 
 
 When the penult is doubtful, i. e. either long or short, it 
 may have or w ; as, ixavo's, /xavoVspoj, Jxavoraros, or ixavwrs- 
 po$, ixavw<ra<ro$. 
 
 -eiS is changed into eg ; as, -xpipieig, ^p'^'^P ^ X 06 ?'^"^ ^- 
 -a^, -?]£, and -us, add <rspos and ra7os to the neuter. 
 f^s'Xas, |wsXav-7spos, |iiosXav-7a7os. 
 eupus* eupu-7spos, supu-7a7os. 
 -wv and --^v to the nominative plural ; as, 
 tfw<ppwv, (fuxppuvitf-lspog, C«A)9p6jvsV-7a7of. 
 TSpyjv, <rspsvsV-7epos, rspevid-lalog. 
 
 * Else /our short vowels would come together. To avoid three* 
 Homer sometimes lengthens a short one. 
 
Comparison of Adjectives. 37 
 
 -| turns -sg of the nominative plural into i<f7spo$, itflcclog ; 
 as, jSXag, SXaxsg, j8Xax-«tr7spo^, /3Xax-i<r7a7o£. 
 
 The Attics compare many adjectives by itflepog, 'uflaloc ; 
 ai7spo£, a<7a7os ; icflspog, stflalog ; the last in common with the 
 Ionics ; as, 
 
 XaXo£, XoikitfTc po£ XaXiVraro^. 
 
 (p*'Xo£, <piXairspo£, <piXairaro£. 
 
 dcpdovog, dtpdovctiTSpag, dyQovirfTOLrog. 
 
 II. Some adjectives in v, have the comparison in iwv 
 
 and itrtog' ; as, -/}&£, >j&c«v, >;<W7os. 
 
 1. Some adjectives in og, derived from substantives, have 
 the comparison in iwv and itf7o£, formed from the original 
 word ; as, 
 
 x/xXo£, (from xdXXo$-so£,) xaXXi'wv, xaXXi<f7o£. 
 s^poV, (from I'x^-^,) ^' wv 5 ^X^^ ^' a * s0 regular. 
 oix7po£, (from oTxlog-ou.^) oi'x7itf7os, do. 
 
 aiV^po^, (from a/tfx ^ 50 ^) a'V^iwv, aityKflog, do. 
 dXysivfc, (from aX^os,) aXyiwv, aXy«iVo£, do. 
 f*axpo£, (from f/<>jxo£-so£,) f/.aa'a'wv. fj^xia^Gj, do. 
 So, /xixpo^, (from the verb (xi^ob.) fxs/'wv. jxsrtf7o^, do. 
 Xsp^, (ob.) X S 'P WV > x s, 'P ,(rT0 ^- 
 
 So likewise, 
 
 xaxo£, xaxiwv, (xaxw<rspo£,) xoLxicflog. 
 
 r ' I <pjX7spog*, <piX7a7o£. 
 
 , , i cLx-j7spo£, wxu7a7o$, 
 
 • J ( wxi'wv, tixuflog. 
 
 2. The termination kjv, with the preceding consonant, is 
 often changed into tftfwv, and by the Attics into <rr^v ; as, 
 
 fipaSjg. J '(J-HtfdtJ, \ ftpuSKfiog, also regular. 
 
 rax*'wv,t } 
 )a-rruv, A. ) 
 
 cttx'^> \ datfCwv, \ ra^iclog. do. 
 
 * For 0tXc5r«poj, ^(Awrorof. 
 
 t Ta^iwv became 6>a^iwv by transposition of the breathing ; (Vide 
 Metathesis, page 6,) and thence Bdsviav, 
 
 4 
 
Comparison of Adjectives, 
 
 sXcvxy^y gXatftfwv,* sXa^j^oc, dou 
 
 Msyas, as from peyvg, makes regularly (xey/wv, pfyufrog. 
 By the rule, fisyi'wv becomes /xs'atfwv, and, changing tfcf into £, 
 /xg'^av, which was lengthened into fxs/^wv ; so,6X/yo£, (oXj- 
 yi'wv, oXiWwv,) oXi'^wv, o\tyi<frog, also regular. 
 
 3. A letter is sometimes dropped in comparison ; as, 
 
 gotwv, gatf7o£, > s s 
 
 <pi'Xo£, <p/X7spos, <pi'X7a7o$, for <pfXJ>7spo£, <piXw7a7o£. 
 rfaXatos, iroikaflspog, tfaXaf7a7o£, for 
 
 tfaXaioIspos, tfoCKaiolalog. 
 ©s'psios, Qepsflepog, Qepsfloflog, for 
 
 0sp£*67&po£, 0sp£n7a7o£. 
 tfoXus, *Xsi'wv and crXgwv, <7rXsr<r7o£ 7 for 
 tfoXi'wv, tfoXuflog. 
 One is irregular in the comparative : 
 dyados, djuis/vwv, dya0w7a7o<r. 
 /3sXn'wv ? fiskw'tfrog. 
 
 COMPARISONS FROM PREPOSITIONS, 
 
 <po, #po<rspo£, [VpoTaros,] tfpojro^. 
 uflrsp, iffgprspos, u«7ripra<ro£, and utfaro^. 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 flrXofjtf/oVj •TrX^O'iaiVspo^, tfX^tfia'jraToc:, 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 Xgp5o£, XSp^l&JV, JCSp5lflVo£. 
 
 fio.tfiXeug, (Sa<ffksu<repog i (Ba&iXsvraros. 
 "Apyjg, dpsi'wv, apitfroj. 
 
 * For Aa^iW. t For fc&w, from obsolete $*<?$. 
 
 f For Kparim', ehanged into *pw»»>, and «pe<r<ru>v, and lengthened in!* 
 
Xu/neraU. 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 (ps'pw, p=p<rspo£. 
 Sometimes, particularly in the P<x comparatives 
 
 nd superlatives, are derived from comparative soper- 
 
 9 already in u~ <aXki{>yrepo$. 
 
 NUMERA1 
 
 Tin the alphabet to dem 
 
 iuu a for on* and p for a bund] 
 
 JUit then troduced 
 
 three otb j 
 
 pi, -7 
 
 with a strok- 
 
 
 1, 
 
 
 
 
 1 1. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 14. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 x> ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 q. 
 
 
 
 
 
 i • Wh . an oblique 
 
 - drawn OTCI tin i 
 
 number, was some- 
 r that nun JI 
 
 iron D ; H, BEKATO V one 
 
 hundred ; A thousand ; M, from Mi^pioi, ten 
 
 sand. 
 Letters thu II, may be placed together to 
 
 the amount of four, to express numbers ; as, I III. 4 ; AA1I, 
 1IH. MM); AAAA, 40; MMMM, 40,000. These let- 
 when inclosed within a II, were multiplied by five, 
 i 
 3. Each letter may denote a number, according to iU 
 place in the alphabet ; as, a, 1 : y, 3 ; and so on 
 
 I 
 
40 
 
 Numerals r 
 
 
 Cardinal Numbers, 
 
 Ordinal Numbers 
 
 €*, 
 
 one. 
 
 xpulog, 
 
 first. 
 
 (Sv'O, 
 
 two. 
 
 fisulepog, 
 
 second 
 
 ff*fe| 
 
 three. 
 
 rpilog, 
 
 third. 
 
 r&tfape?, 
 
 four. 
 
 rslaplog. 
 
 fourth. 
 
 irsvls, 
 
 five. 
 
 ttsjuiVJos, 
 
 fifth. 
 
 *• 
 
 six. 
 
 5x7o£, 
 
 sixth. 
 
 £*7a, 
 
 seven. 
 
 f^OfJLO^, 
 
 seventh. 
 
 ex7 w, 
 
 eight. 
 
 vy&MG) 
 
 eighth. 
 
 ^vvsa, 
 
 nine. 
 
 evvoc7o£, 
 
 ninth. 
 
 Isxa, 
 
 ten. 
 
 (5s'xa7o£, 
 
 tenth. 
 
 swSgxa, 
 
 eleven. 
 
 hdixalog, 
 
 eleventh, 
 
 &j<5sxa, 
 
 twelve. 
 
 SuSixahgj 
 
 twelfth. 
 
 jgxotfpgis, 
 
 thirteen. 
 
 rpufxajdixalog^ 
 
 thirteenth. 
 
 foxotfstftfap^, 
 
 fourteen. 
 
 TStftfapztfxcuSixalog, fourteenth. 
 
 Jsxatfsv?*, 
 
 fifteen. 
 
 rfsvlexatSsxaloSy 
 
 fifteenth. 
 
 fsxaig, 
 
 sixteen. 
 
 e^xoLidixalog, 
 
 sixteenth. 
 
 ifxac^a, 
 
 seventeen. 
 
 stflcwouSixofl og> 
 
 seventeenth; 
 
 isxaox76, 
 
 eighteen. 
 
 6x7wxaj$8xa7os, 
 
 eighteenth. 
 
 Isxasvve'a, 
 
 nineteen. 
 
 ivvsaxaiSsxcdog, 
 
 nineteenth. 
 
 rJXOtfl, 
 
 twenty. [&c. 
 
 slxotflog, 
 
 twentieth. 
 
 ^lxorfisfc, &c. 
 
 twenty-one, 
 
 slxoGlog.tfpZflQg,* 
 
 kc. twenty-first, 
 
 rp»axov7a, 
 
 thirty. 
 
 <rpiaxo(fl6g, 
 
 thirtieth. [&c 
 
 Tfltfapaxov?!*, 
 
 forty. 
 
 TStf(f«pocxo(r7o^ 
 
 fortieth. 
 
 7r£v7'/jxov7a, 
 
 fifty. 
 
 <5v77]xotf76^, 
 
 fiftieth. 
 
 *j#xov7a. 
 
 sixty. 
 
 s%rxo(fl6g, 
 
 sixtieth. 
 
 *§5ojx?jxov7a, 
 
 seventy. 
 
 l€^o^xotf76^ ? 
 
 seventieth* 
 
 fySoipcoVfa, 
 
 eighty. 
 
 O^OTJXOO^OS, 
 
 eightieth. 
 
 t'vvtv^x&vla, 
 
 ninety. 
 
 svvsvY)xa(f7ot, 
 
 ninetieth. 
 
 sxalav, 
 
 a hundred. 
 
 ixeflotfog, 
 
 a hundredth. 
 
 Siaxi(ft-oi y -ai,- 
 
 «,two hundred. 
 
 ^»axo(Tiorf7o^, 
 
 two hundredth 
 
 ^iXi-oj, -ai, -a, a thousand. 
 
 X»Xjo£7o£, 
 
 a thousandth. 
 
 ;Xjpi 01, -ai, a 
 
 , ten thousand. 
 
 jutupiotflofj 
 
 ten thousandth 
 
 hufafartrfim* I amillion. 
 
 sxa7ov7(5cxio'fjLupi- 
 otf7o^, 
 
 > a millionth. 
 
 ■a«i 
 
 a > ) 
 
 > 
 
 All the cardinal numbers, from rstftfapss, four, to !xa76v, a 
 hundred, are undeclined ; all above a hundred are declin- 
 ed ; as, foaxotfj-oij -ai, a, two hundred. 
 
 All ordinal numbers are adjectives of three endings, 
 and regularly declined, like wX-og, -t} y -6v, or a£i-o$ 3 -a, -*Y. 
 
Numerals. 
 
 41 
 
 Examples of the Declension of e7g, one; 8vo, tico ; rpefo 
 three ; <r£<s tfapss, four. 
 
 Sing. 
 F. N. 
 
 G. svos, fJiia^, §V0£ 
 D. £vi, fjua, §vi, 
 A. eva, fx»av, sv. 
 
 M. 
 
 N. sTg, 
 
 F. N. 
 WsfAj'a, oy&'v,* &c. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Plur. 
 M. & F. N. 
 
 N. 
 
 G. 5uwv, 
 D. 0W1, 
 A. 
 
 N. rpefc, rpia, 
 
 G. TplWV, 
 
 D. Tpitfi, 
 
 A. Tpsfc, rp/ff. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 6jo and o^u,t 
 <5voiv and <5usIV. 
 
 Plur. 
 M. F. and N. 
 
 N. TsVcfapss, TcWapa, 
 
 G. <re<fa'apojv, 
 
 D. rstftfaptft, 
 
 A. cstftTapas, rs'atfapa. 
 
 1. Ou^sfe and fxrj^e^ are sometimes resolved into their 
 component parts, for the sake of greater strength ; as, 44' 
 
 ivos, <rwv toHfors dySptHtw xpctrrficvTsg, having been over- 
 powered by not one of those who then lived. Xen. Hel. V. 
 
 n. 
 
 2. Instead of Sjo and iuoiv, Homer often usesdoioi, ogjo^, 
 5&<oiV, derived from <5oio£. 
 
 3. From twelve to twenty, the least of the two numbers 
 is commonly placed first with xai between them ; as, rplo. 
 xai Ssxol ; if the larger precede, the xai is omitted ; as, Jcxa- 
 tfc'vrs. When three numbers are united, the largest are 
 placed first, with xai between them ; as, v fc 'a$ ixar^v xa; d'xotfi 
 xui 'stta. 
 
 'Ox™ and iwia are rarely or never thus united with other 
 numbers : As in Latin duodeviginti is 18, so in Greek, (us- 
 
 * itSiveg. uSivag, priche;, nrfivag, ju^cVai, &c. sometimes occur. — From 
 £<?, ont. is formed 'irepog^thc other (of two and from «<5aV, ^rcig; M/« 
 repog, pjiSiTtpog, neit.ier (of two,) by rejecting g as well as i. 
 
 t <*to is sometimes an indeclinable ; Od. k, 515 ; lb. r, 407. 
 
42 
 
 Pronouns, 
 
 ing a participle of the verb &'w) efiatffksvtfs SvoTv 6eWa csaca 
 pcxxovra Ursa, he reigned 38 years, 
 
 4. In expressing a mixed number whose fractional part 
 was 1-2 (as 6 1-2) an ordinal, next greater than the whole 
 number, was prefixed in the singular to the coin, weight, 
 &c. with v\\)a between them ; as, sfidoixov TjfxiraXavTov, 6 1-2 
 talents ; <rp/<rov fyju£pt>:^ov, 2 1-2 drachma. When the car- 
 dinal number was prefixed in the plural, the sense was dif- 
 ferent ; as, rp/ot f^iTocXavTa, three half talents, or a talent 
 and a half. 
 
 Sing. 
 N. syw, I. 
 G. IfAou, or jxou, 
 D. sfAo/, or fjt-o/, 
 A. g|*5, or fjis. 
 
 Sing. 
 N. tfu, thou. 
 G. cfeu, 
 D. tfoi, 
 
 A.tfe. 
 
 Sing. 
 N. __, he. 
 G. ou, 
 D. of, 
 A.s. 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. vwi, vcj, 
 
 G. D. voiv, vojv. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. c<pw/, tf<pco, 
 
 G. D. tf<pwiv, c*<p£jv. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. ttywg, (ftps', 
 
 G. D. tf(pw';v, <f<p/v. 
 
 Plural. 
 N. fy*s&, 
 
 G. >JfJLWV, 
 
 D. >jfxrv, 
 A. ^o£. 
 
 PluraU 
 
 N. UfJLSrc, 
 G. UJXCJV, 
 
 D. ujxrv, 
 
 A. £jxa£. 
 
 Plural. 
 N. Apsis, X.t. 
 G. tfipav, 
 
 D. tf^rci, 
 
 A. Cpas, N. Cv 
 
 I. ri is often annexed to these pronouns for the sake 
 of emphasis ; as, sywra, ofy*. 
 
 II. The pronoun ou, is generally reflexive, in the At- 
 tic prose writers, and means, "himself," &cr 
 
Pronouns. 
 
 
 
 re formal Grom tin ed pronouw, and 
 
 are regularly <1 like xaXo£. 
 
 our. 
 
 • nir. 
 p&repK:. ir.* 
 
 • 
 
 The 
 
 
 t, Grom 
 
 
 •ig. 
 
 i 
 
 
 V A 
 
 
 ral. 
 
 ! ( 6i 
 
 1 1 i indefioit - n ofl 
 
 ise the • «•!$, o<rr p. 
 
 ad- 
 
 
 
 B , but 
 
 Tor i : in 
 
 In I 
 
 Um An, unoug the Poets. 
 
44 
 
 Pronouns. 
 
 In the oblique cases it also denotes, self, when placed 
 in apposition to a noun ; as, auVov rov /3acftXsa, the king him- 
 self. Otherwise it denotes simply the third person ; as, 
 s'irtsv avroTg, he said to them. In this sense it always follows 
 other words in the same clause. 
 
 O'SVos, ou)r7), to'Jto, is compounded of the article o and aO- 
 <n>£. It is declined, and prefixes <r like the article, thus : 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. 
 
 ou<ro£, 
 
 auTY), 
 
 ToCVo, 
 
 G. 
 
 TOVTOVj 
 
 TOUTlJff, 
 
 ToOYoU, 
 
 D. 
 
 Touru), 
 
 rauTrj, 
 
 roicw, 
 
 A. 
 
 rouYov, 
 Dual. 
 
 TOWTyjV, 
 
 r©CV§. 
 
 N. A. 
 
 ToOVw, 
 
 rauVa, 
 
 TOJTW, 
 
 G. D. 
 
 rouVeiv, 
 Plural. 
 
 raJVaiv, 
 
 T6UT0IV 
 
 N. 
 
 OUTOi, 
 
 aurai, 
 
 Taura, 
 
 G. 
 
 TOLTWVj 
 
 TOuVwV, 
 
 roJrwv, 
 
 D. 
 
 TOJTOig, 
 
 <ra>ai£, 
 
 •7o'«TOI£, 
 
 A. 
 
 rojrous, 
 
 tolCtol£ } 
 
 raOYa. 
 
 1. In the same manner are declinedr oioOos, rqXixoSrof, 
 
 aad toCoGtoj. 
 
 2. In the Attic writers, the demonstratives olrog and 
 sxs?vo£ often assume i, with the accent, to indicate more for- 
 cibly ; as, ourotfi, toutoim, rourwi : But a or o at the end of a 
 word is dropped, and i joined to the letter preceding : as, 
 <rau-Ti for rauVa, instead of murou : sxsivi for sxgivot : ^ also 
 follows the enclitic yi ; as, tovto ys. rovroyi. 
 
 3. Taura must be carefully distinguished from raure, the 
 £ame, which is formed by crasis, from rot and a. 
 
 RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 From the personal pronouns and auVo's, are com- 
 pounded, sfutyJov, <raw/7ou, sai»7ou } myself th\ seit himself 
 
Pronoun*. 
 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ploi 
 
 
 
 1 > 
 
 a plural. 
 
 ■ 
 
 D. i 
 
 
 
 
 PI 
 
 ny, tons our. is similar \u 
 
 D. 
 
 l'r 
 
 decl 
 
 Tl • 
 
 ■ 
 for It 
 
46 Verbs. 
 
 &5im< some one, is of ail genders, and is thus declined. 
 N. A. Selva, G. Osjvj, Plu. N. riSsTvsg. It is sometimes un- 
 deelined, Aris. Thes 622. 
 
 1. rfe, as an Interrogative, has the responsive otfl'ig ; as, 
 rig rS7o itoirfis ; Who did this ? oux oloct otf7ig ; I know not 
 who. 
 
 2. Anciently there was another Interrogative pronoun, 
 viz. irog^tfrjttfo, where ? or in what place ? and its respon- 
 sive, onog. oV>), oVo. there, or in that place. They are now 
 used as adverbs, in the genitive and dative singular only. 
 From them are formed in the comparative, fr«7gpb£-o 
 which one, (of two,) and its responsive, toolspog. From 
 them also are derived many adjectives and adverbs now in 
 use. 
 
 Among the pronouns are ranked the gentile adjectives 
 derived from SoLieSov, the soil, and a substantive pronoun : 
 viz. y-tAsdatog-Yj-ov, of our country or people ; fodatfog-rrov, 
 of what country or people ; i'fjLS&xtfo£-'/?-6v ? of your country 
 or people. 
 
 From the neuter of the Vriicle, Relative oV, Interrogat 
 tfoSj and its responsive oVos, are derived other Adjectives 
 much in use ; as, 
 
 Article. Relative. 
 
 *6; the. ©, which. 
 
 roTog, of the kind. oTos, of which kind. 
 
 Totfos, of the number. ©Vo?, of which riurnbi 
 
 TYiKixog, of the size. 7)\ixog, of which size. 
 
 Interrogative. Responsive. 
 
 tfo, what. Wo, that. 
 
 *mg, of what kind. hitoTog, of that kind. 
 
 tfoCo's, of what number. oV&Vos, of that number. 
 
 tf^XIxos, of what size. b*ri\Uog, of that size. 
 
 From these and ollog. are derived <roiou7o£. roia^, w' 
 of this kind ; rotfowlog, of this number ; tt)Xjxou?o£, of this 
 size. 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 Verbs are divided in Active or Transitive ; Neuter 
 or Intransitive ; and Deponent. 
 
bs. 
 
 Tin 
 
 tl. 
 
 or 
 fined 
 
 8 to 
 
 v be actor! upon 
 
 ami i ta rally ' 
 
 I. Tm i>on 
 
 dflur^ 01 baaa 
 
 ajiot 
 
 Aj 
 
 r Iji- 
 
 Z P r °- 
 
48 Verbs. 
 
 one's self ; from fftiteiv, to persuade, r&itarttaf, te persuade 
 one's self, to believe, to obey. In many cases of his kind, 
 where the original meaning of the Active is obsolete, the 
 peculiar sense of the Middle cannot be ascertained, and 
 the verb is classed among the Neuters. 
 
 In other cases, however, Middle verbs are transitive, and 
 take an accusative after them ; either because in the ac- 
 tive they govern two accusatives ; as, fspuizv <nva <rov rro7a- 
 |mov, to pass one over the river, rrspai^(f&ai tov cro7a ( a6v, to pass 
 (one's self) over a river ; XoJtfatfdai Try xt^aA>;v, to wash 
 one's head ; evSjtfatfAcu ^n7wva, to put on one's robe, &c, 
 or because the action, though properly intransitive, is con- 
 sidered in relation to some object ; as, ovXaTistidai <nva, to 
 guard (one's self) as to some one ; (pofisfadcu rous GeoJc. to 
 revere the Gods ; «n'XXscrt)ai <nva, (to pull out one's hair,, 
 to mourn, on account of some one. 
 
 II. By a natural transition, the Middle denotes what we 
 do for ourselves ; as, croXs/xov tfoirjVai, is to make war, « 
 Sj&ov iroiy)(fa(f8ai, to make war in our own defence ; aip??v, to 
 take, a;psr<70ai, to take for one's self, to choose ; anslv, to 
 ask, atls7(f &ai y to ask for one's self ; dipaipslv, to take away, 
 d<paupe7<f6ah to take away for one's benefit ; rifxwprjtfatfdai, to 
 avenge one's self ; xXateiv, to weep for another, xka'j<fat&cu. 
 to weep for one's self ; *jrois7<fQcu, to make for one's self; 
 xctl(i(flr i (fa<f&ai cpuXaxag, to place guards for one's own pre- 
 servation. 
 
 III. The Middle denotes what we do among ourselv< 
 as, Tror/jtfaa^ai, to make a league between themselves ; 
 /SouXs^iv, to counsel, |3ouXus<ft)ai, to take counsel between 
 themselves ; SioCkCsrv, to reconcile others, 8ia\ve<f$ai, to be 
 reconciled among themselves. Verbs of contending, dis- 
 puting, &c. have reference generally to both parties, and 
 are therefore in the Middle ; as, ^a^sa^ai, pugnarc inter se. 
 When the Active is used, the reference is to one of the par- 
 ties ; as, \ci8ops7v, to revile some one, Xoi^opsr^ai, to revile 
 each other. 
 
 IV. The Middle denotes that which we cause to be done 
 for ourselves ; as, dtfo/pa-^atftJai, to cause one's self to be 
 enrolled ; tfapaten/ai rpowrs^av, is to set a table for another ; 
 crapa^sVdai Tpa^s^av, to cause a table to be set for us 
 
 •v^ai vo.aov, is to propose a law ; ypa^oufM rivet, is to accuse 
 a person, i. e. to cause one's name to be written down as 
 the accuser ©f another ; is to teach, &<Jaga0tfcw, 
 
I ses. 4* 
 
 se one to be taught in our behalf ; *?: to go as 
 
 to *t ml an Ambassador. 
 The pi ration of the Middle is mo<! obvious 
 
 in tl ally in the first Aorist. The Future 
 
 l 1 1 i n lt ; W I shall 
 
 . 
 What are called the and Plop Middle, I 
 
 i erbi Moat common- 
 
 in. 
 
 Ti he Mid- 
 
 and Pei '.tfav, 
 
 I 
 
 Tin 
 
 l.u. Or. 
 
 . 
 
 Such 
 
 
 - are di\ ided in! 
 
 I i nd Futurr. culled the Lead- 
 
 II • the In ' and Pl« | r ;illed 
 
 the Histoi ical T tiiefly in narration. 
 
 I J M present 
 
 [joint, Ur tor- 
 
 tttendant ci! A U baa I 
 
 5 
 
j(j Verbs — Tenses . 
 
 (and remains,) written ; ysyafjirjxa, I have been, (and a; 
 married. 
 
 In the Historical Tenses, the speaker goes back in im- 
 agination, to the past scene, and gives a relation of the 
 events. In doing this, he may represent an action in 
 three different ways, 
 
 1 . Simply as done or accomplished ; as, lypa^a, I wrote: 
 this is the Aorist. 
 
 2. As protracted or continued, during a certain period 
 of past time ; as, eypaqjov, I was writing : this is the Imper- 
 fect. 
 
 3. As done previous to a certain time, but extending in- 
 to it, either in itself, or its consequences, or its attendant 
 circumstances ; as, slslei-xitflo, had been fortified, (and re- 
 mained so :) this is the Pluperfect. 
 
 We shall now consider more particularly, under each of 
 the Tenses, their several uses. 
 
 Present. — The Present, besides its appropriate use, is 
 employed to express general truths ; as, £wa rp^gft, ani- 
 mals run. In animated narration, it is used for the Aorist ; 
 the reader being transported back, in imagination, to the 
 scene ; as, ctva/3ou'vsi ouv KUpo£, Cyrus therefore goes up. In 
 a similar manner, it is sometimes put for the Future. 
 
 Imperfect. — The Imperfect represents an action as 
 continuing, during the whole of the main action related ; 
 or during some of its accompanying circumstances, or par- 
 ticular scenes, whether related or implied ; as, EiT iv oig 
 ?;fjt.ap7avov oi aXXoi xai xcoc&s iqjpovouv, ccjlog crap5<fxsua£e7o xai 
 xa<ra tfav7wv s<pL»s7o, iC Thus while others were committing 
 errors, and forming rash judgments, he was preparing him- 
 self, and growing strong against them all." Here the sev- 
 eral acts described, continued throughout the whole of the 
 period referred to. 'EtfSi 5' syyvg rjtfav oi wrXTJai, s7pacrov7o ■ 
 xai oi /xsv tfsX7aoVa* si6$s siVov7o, oi 6b mtXjVoi iv ragsi si'<rov7o. 
 Ci But when the heavy armed troops were near, they, (the 
 Barbarians,) turned their backs ; and the Peltasta? followed 
 on, (a protracted action,) and the heavy armed troops pur- 
 sued, (a protracted action,) in order." Here the action 
 was continued, during the time implied in a particular part 
 of the battle. The Imperfect is used, from its expressing 
 the continuance of an action, to denote that which is done 
 habitually, or even from time 9 to tune ; as, o ktcoxo/xos <rov 
 iWov klpifis xvj sxlsvi^s tfudag r^spag, " the groom kept rub- 
 bing the horse every day*" *'0<Jlig 5' d. 
 
Wrbs— Tenses. o\ 
 
 fioLti. 'fom time to 
 
 from tl 
 |>; | rlv ■ Ten86 of nar- 
 
 the mind i ned upon 
 
 done 
 
 hick meet commonly still 
 
 or attendant 
 
 , xcti ta-. 
 war li re- 
 
 and ha nii (*od we now 
 
 are,) very poor ; y m the Aorist,) 
 
 and 
 we still < - : and lias m ( 
 
 be differ- 
 
 Aa 
 • . the 
 
 Willi 
 
 IN ction as 
 
 ood- 
 
 *£ it 
 as a 
 
 lion : 
 
 ■ 
 
 Im- 
 | 
 
bZ Verbs — Tenses. 
 
 Aorist. — The Preterites hitherto considered, represent 
 an action as continued or protracted in various ways. In 
 distinction from these, the Aorist represents a past action 
 as simply done or accomplished ; without reference to dur- 
 ation of time in doing it, or to its subsequent existence , in 
 its effects. It does not exclude these, however, and repre- 
 sent an action as momentary and evanescent ; but merely 
 omits all reference to them, and fixes the mind on the sin- 
 gle idea of the accomplishment of the action. In narra- 
 tion, the Aorist is often intermingled with the Imperfect, 
 because the speaker wishes to fix the attention, at one 
 time on the continuance of an action ; at another, barely 
 on its accomplishment ; as, KXiap^os dc (fwyyaysv, (the 
 mere act,) sxxX^o'jav, cwv avlo\J <jVpa7ik/7ojv ■ xa/ crpw7ov julsv s5a- 
 xpve (continued) tfoXuv ^povov £tf7w£* ol os bpdvlsg i&avfia^oM (con- 
 tinued) xal stfiwtfwv (continued) e/Va fXegs (the mere act) toiolSs. 
 *" But Clearchus collected an assembly of his troops ; and 
 £rst he stood and continued for a long time, weeping. And 
 they looking on remained in amazement, and continued si- 
 lent. Then he spoke these things. " In many instances, 
 the Imperfect is used instead of the Aorist, to denote a 
 thing as permanent at a past time ; as, itsi & iddxst 
 ■rfa tfopevetfAai, " when it was now his opinion, that the time 
 had arrived for him to depart." In such cases, as w r ell as 
 in many others, the Imperfect and Aorist are rendered into 
 English by the same word. The Aorist is often rendered 
 into English, by the Perfect or Pluperfect have or had ; 
 because in our language, these Tenses are less limited than 
 in Greek, and often express merely the accomplishment 
 of a past action, under certain circumstances. Demos- 
 thenes says, for example, u if Eschines had accused me,(xa- 
 I'lyoprfisv) as to those things merely, in respect to which he 
 was conducting the accusation, (s&wxs, a continued action 
 in the Imperfect,) I should immediately have answered to 
 the indictment. But since he has been wasting [t 
 here the mind of the speaker remains in the present, and 
 therefore the Perfect is used) much of his speech upon 
 other topics ; and as to almost all of them has belied me; 
 (xals-^sjtfcrfo, here the speaker goes back to the action as 
 merely accomplished, and therefore the Aorist is u<t 
 think it right and necessary to say a few things on this sub- 
 ject." 
 
 The Aorist is sometimes used for the Greek Ye 
 Pluperfect ; viz. when the idea of continuance is suiucient- 
 
iear from the col r when the speaker wishes to 
 
 ie attention, i • the action and Dot utis ; 
 
 r the treasures of the ancient philoeopl 
 which they have r«v t ) in their writing 
 
 as an Arobi 
 
 dor/' Thu I m narration than 
 
 dally tft( 
 
 Tl that which lias gen- 
 
 J and in WOttl 
 
 to I ii|) with tpt to 
 
 a<jain (frii|) if one relixes the 
 In i Tra- 
 
 unot 
 
 tlv to denofc tion, 
 
 and anal 
 
 re confine i tain casts ; hut 
 
 the relations dm 
 
 A ui- 
 ii. V, 
 
 Stl ; and ind- both 
 
 in ii 
 1 i 
 
 a-. " If the compel 
 
 who 
 
 idition to 
 
 1' v the 
 
 tin- 1 <1 by shall hare, and 
 
 _ r in- 
 B, "what 
 
 ru- 
 
 11' Wrongly 
 
 aarked. in t od, and the Partici;*!- 
 
54 Verbs— Moochs. 
 
 In the other Moods, they have sometimes their appropri- 
 ate sense, as in the Indicative. 
 
 In the Perfect, for example, <ro dyxupiov avsaVdrfdw, " let 
 the anchor be weighed," (and remain so ;) rrjvdupav xsx\s7<f- 
 dai, " that the<door remain shut ;" sM' 6 uio£ vswxvjxoi, " Oh! 
 may my son have conquered." Thus too the Aorist retains 
 its appropriate sense. Sometimes the peculiar meaning of 
 the Tense is lost, and the time is decided by the Indicative, 
 on which it depends. In these cases, the Aorist denotes 
 an action as merely done or accomplished ; the Present, as 
 passing or continued ; as, Kaksffctg 8s 6 Kvpog 'Apaa^v M>j- 
 £ov, tolTIov sxsXsutfs <Sia(puXagai (the mere act) au7& r^v rs yuvodxa 
 xul ty\v tfx'/jwjv. " And Cyrus calling Araspes the Median, 
 commanded him to guard the woman, and the tent." But 
 in repeating the words immediately after, the author says, 
 <?ot;oly\v ouv exiXsvtfs 6 Kupos 5»a(puXd77siv rov Apatftf^v, 
 3ug <xv ai37o$ "Kafir}. " Her, therefore, Cyrus commanded 
 Araspes to guard, until he himself might receive her." Here 
 the action of guarding, was to be continued until, Lc. and 
 therefore the Present was used. In many instances, the 
 nature of the case makes this distinction scarcely percep- 
 tible, and then the Present and Aorist are equivalent ; es- 
 pecially jn the Imperative. The Perfect Imperative some- 
 times denotes the action more emphatically ; as, tfccsipatf- 
 fw, "let it have been attempted," i. e. only make the at- 
 tempt. 
 
 The Participle of the Aorist retains its appropriate 
 sense, and is rendered by, " after that," or " having ;" as, 
 xoCkstiag, "after that he had called." The Participle of 
 the Perfect usually does the same, and denotes the pre^ 
 Vent, as connected with the past. 
 
 MOODS, 
 
 The Indicative represents a thing, as actually existing, iu> 
 past, present, or future time. The Subjunctive and Opta- 
 tive united, represent a thing, either as contingent, or in 
 relation to the feelings and conceptions of the mind respect- 
 1 " g l1 V J he Indicative has > therefore, a greater extent, in 
 <jreek than in La«,in ; and corresponds more nearly to the 
 
I -bs — Moods. 
 
 English Indicative.* Thus, in negative propositions with 
 Relative ; 4i iNo one bean arms with me, Srig ^ bccf- 
 »t able, (in Latin, qui non possit.) to en- 
 dure equal labors with mya Here the Optative firjav, 
 would denote mere probability; '•who7/*i«7*/ notbe able,"&C. 
 
 hat we are actu- 
 - . what we are to do." 
 e shall now consider, the use of the Moods, under sev- 
 eral distinct . » 
 
 rration . 
 
 When a writer i in narration urn riei 
 
 but \s hat dor thought by another, If what the 
 
 iker said n worth, [Oratio din eta,) the 
 
 [ndi< < 
 
 that at 
 
 J 7) 
 
 i lip,) was 
 within the paai i 
 
 (in 
 
 xaTo> . ihall (should] 
 
 burn tin xpjjtfovlai, shall (should) 
 
 are 
 », 4 * the] 
 
 i\8u6 6 po Z (ft v, that 
 ould) fi 
 
 Ilmaih*. •- ! was a Mile- 
 
 birth, and that Pa 
 w the Oratio o b liq ua idicativc may be used in 
 
 t nr6-on of another ; as, hd\sui 
 
 pat wlicrc the Subjunctive would be used iq 
 
 the Indicative anri 
 are inter-: 
 
56 Verbs — Moods. 
 
 !au7ou x^P 7 ^ oixsTv, oxou /3ouXov7a*, " He commanded 
 them to inhabit any part of his country, they will*" 
 
 Dependent Clauses. 
 
 After certain particles ; (as, iva, that, &c.) a dependent 
 elause has the sense of the Subjunctive. But, the Sub- 
 junctive in Greek having no Imperfect and Pluperfect, 
 these Tenses are supplied by the Optative. The time of 
 the dependent clause is determined by that of the primary 
 one, and hence the 
 
 Rule. — A Perfect or Future, in the primary clause, is 
 followed, in the dependent one, by the Subjunctive. The 
 Historical Tenses are followed by the Optative.* 
 
 The following are the principal, cases which occur un- 
 der this rule. 
 
 1. After iva, o<ppa, oVws, ws, the rule particularly applies ; 
 as, Subjunctive, kiXsig op' au76s syjis yspag ; Do you wish, 
 that you yourself, may have a reward ? Optative, dtfisvai 
 sxsXsus,-iW tfoj£ oixade g'Xdoi ; " he commanded him to de- 
 part, that he might return home safe." When the Pre- 
 sent is used in narration for the Aorist, it is of course fol- 
 lowed, as the Aorist would be, by the Optative. On the 
 contrary, when the Aorist of the Imperative is used for the 
 Present, it is followed by the Subjunctive. II. A. 119. 
 
 Exception 1. The Optative is frequently put after the 
 Present, instead of the Subjunctive, in cases where there 
 is doubt or uncertainty as to the act ; as, &*}y*ifl'o|jLs£a, f, im- 
 ffcsXovrai, w£ av /3sX7kt7oi s/sv oi tfoXIrai ; " We will relate, by 
 what means they take care, that their citizens should be the 
 best possible." Here the Subjunctive would represent 
 the result with too much confidence. 
 
 2. When the Verb of the dependent clause really denotes 
 a past action, it is put in the Optative, even after the Pre- 
 sent ; as, " Take care, lest what has been spoken should 
 have been (si'rj) mere ostentation." 
 
 3. On the other hand, the Verb is frequently in the Sub- 
 junctive, after the Historical tenses, if the action which it 
 represents, continues to the present time ; as, " I removed 
 
 * Thus the Subjunctive corresponds to the Present, " may ; M the 
 Optative to the Imperfect, mighty could, should, &c. of the English 
 Verb. 
 
Verbs — Moods. 
 
 the darkness from your eyes, that you may (might) 
 knuv. I ! and man.*". 
 
 1. The Future of the Indicative, is regularly pot for the^-/.^. 
 Subjunctive aft* 
 
 with danger and disgrace, he deliberate 
 'ttilo. tt he shall fmay) be I ct to his 
 
 brother; hut if possible, (8 a (Si X i rule 
 
 in his Stead. 91 So likewise after f^, when it follows Verbs 
 
 are often found, with an Judicative of 
 the ;»< -truck with terror, lest thru. 
 
 night ha-. 
 Many other in- ich the general rule 
 
 ( )[>tative is put for 
 3ub)tmcli a. Tbu< uni- 
 
 form: 
 
 Still ( ral rule 
 
 som» from it. 
 
 II 
 
 i a past a< inch ITU 
 
 at d 
 
 junctiNe Willi : : t/., .- 
 
 ,, ScS, IWIf, folk 
 fiai) t with little, and i I x S- 
 
 xan For 
 
 [from tunc- l<> t 
 I and 
 
 .t ra- 
 mie 
 Main, [u !1 of 
 
 ■cd up tl 
 
 l ith the \ 
 io appliej. b of Uo 
 
£8 Verbs—Mood*. 
 
 Thus* in narration, " He commanded them to guard the 
 horses, until a signal should be given them, [?Mg av <n <r*j- 
 fjuav^si*).] Sometimes the Subjunctive is used for the 
 Optative ; as, * w Cyrus commanded Araspes to guard her, 
 sug «v ai)7o£ Xa,(J fl, until he himself may [might] take her.* 
 
 When the particles* ?*$, &c. refer to a past action, they 
 are followed by the Indicative ; as, " The Ambassadors 
 sat down three months, in Macedonia, until Philip return- 
 ed NJiXtej from Thrace." 
 
 111. After relatives and particles, used indefinitely : as, 
 o£, otitis, oTog, any person or thing ; 6Vou, any where ; 3far, 
 from any place, &c. , the same rule prevails. The Sub- 
 junctive, with av, is used for a present or future action ; 
 the Optative without av, for a past action ; as, Subjunctive. 
 "Eflrstf^s, 0V01 av Tig r\y Sj7ai, " follow, where any one may 
 lead." In general propositions, expressing what is common- 
 ly true, the Subjunctive is in like manner, much used. Op- 
 tative. " But whatsoever [ov] man, of the common people, 
 he saw, [)'£oi' or found, [s<p£upoi] crying out, he smote 
 [iXatfatf'xe] with the sceptre. t From this is to be distin- 
 guished the case of the Relative, in Independent propositions, 
 where the Optative has the sense of the English Potential ; 
 as, " what is that knowledge, r^ag $\j6ai^ovag xoir r 
 tie is, which ean make us happy." 
 
 The Relative S$, has sometimes, like the Latin, qui. the 
 sense of iva, that ; as, l< but come let us send chosen men, 
 ei sXdwcTi, that they may go." '^-*- /• z ' ' 
 
 Conditional Propositions. 
 
 One principle controls all examples of this kind. When 
 a case is taken, as actual, the Indicative is used ; (or in 
 commands, the Imperative:) when as doubtful but proba- 
 ble, the Subjunctive : when as merely hypothetical, the Op- 
 tative. The following may serve as examples. 
 
 1. When an actual case is supposed, and the result is 
 certain, both Verbs are put in the Indicative ; [ov in a 
 command, the second, in ihe Imperative :) as, bI slfft owjxoi, 
 
 * Such cases seem to arise from the tendency in Greek nana! • 
 to make every thing present to the mind. Thus relating ; 
 maud of Cyrus as though nearly in the exact words. 
 
 t In some cases, the Optative is used, when the Subjunctive should 
 fee. and vice versa.. 
 
Verbs — Moods* 59 
 
 p are Altars, there are Gods 
 
 • 
 minate ( J* (bot denied realh 
 
 is the Indicaliye 
 ill the condition ; the In«' 
 the I l, in 
 
 : if he /wJanv tli 
 
 Im- 
 
 t.* In past 
 
 any thing, lie 
 
 ally, 
 
 D the 
 
 mbtful ; 
 
 ; the Indicative 
 
 X u f* s v i 
 it. 
 
 flltll! 
 
 w ith 
 
 : as, 
 . xpivot' i ikall have 
 
 i 
 
 ■nit ; 
 
 the < )pta- 
 
 k it as 
 
 .. . 
 
 » X p a f 
 
 ftlie 
 ' y to 
 
G6 Verbs — Moods. 
 
 Other examples might be given, as an actual case sup- 
 posed, in the condition, and a merely hypothetical conclu- 
 sion ; here the first would have the Indicative with si ; and 
 the second, the Optative with ay. A merely hypothetical 
 supposition, bui a determinate result ; here the first would 
 have the Optative with sL and the second the Indicative ; 
 as, fc< If these things should seem [ioxoiij] to be very ag- 
 gravated crimes, none of them are chargeable upon me." 
 All such cases are controlled by the general principles 
 heretofore stated ; though individual instances of irregu- 
 larity may be found. 
 
 All conditional propositions may, in Greek, be turned 
 into the Infinitive or Participle, with av ; as, o'/ovlai ava/xa- 
 ^g'tfOai av, (fv^ui-xpvg *rpo<rXa€ov7s£ ; "they think, they 
 might retrieve their fortune in war, by obtaining allies." 
 
 The Optative and Subjunctive, in Abstract or Independ- 
 ent Propositions. 
 
 The Optative and Subjunctive seem to have been origin- 
 ally used, only in one clause of a sentence, as connected 
 with another. In the progress of language, the connected 
 clause has often been dropped, in which case it is implied 
 or understood. Thus in English, " 1 would ndvi e you, to 
 take these measures ;" Here, "if I might venture to give 
 my advice," is implied. In this hypothetical or softened 
 manner of expressing an opinion, desire, or determination, 
 use is chiefly made of the Optative. 
 
 Optative in Abstract Propositions. 
 
 1. The Optative is used, without ecu, to express a wish or 
 prayer ; as, " may the Greeks suffer punishment, [ri<f s ict v] 
 for my tears, from thine arrows." In this case, site, gj, ug r 
 <x&S av, are often used with the Optative.* 
 
 2. In connexion with av, it denotes doubt, conjecture, 
 bare possibility ; or in expressions of volition, not a fixed 
 resolution, but only an inclination to a thins ; as, nvg£ av 
 si sv vo^sls ; " they were perhaps, [probably.] some shep- 
 
 * If the wish relates to any thing" past, the Indicative Aorist is put 
 with tWe, without. a v ; the Imperfect is likewise used, when an action 
 is continued from the past to the present. 
 
Verbs — Moods. 
 
 Gl 
 
 On any other d; 'ualoAhey hardly 
 
 la Ifxr^v, - 1 should see them 
 wi t } . 
 
 i is often used to ev nite as.-, 
 
 tions, with pc 3 and modi oj-^ai- 
 
 ix i : k - I wil dfl no loi m you." 
 
 • ', and %^ ill 
 ■ k." 
 
 l. i 
 
 » in a DC 
 
 . •* do n 
 
 this 
 
 man to U 
 
 r of in- 
 nk." 'I Ji. 
 
 ions. 
 
 l . I h< 
 
Verbs — Moods. 
 
 " Let us go through the city, and let a shout be quickly 
 raised." 
 
 2.1n questions of indecision or doubt, without av; as, sitfwjuLSv, 
 yj a \y u a s v ; shall we speak, or be silent ? <n cp u : what am 
 1 to say ? <ri ir o i w ; what am I to do ? ^of t p -W gj jut, a i ; 
 whither shall (may) I turn myself ? In like manner, after 
 fiouXsi ;* as, /SojXsi X a /3 w jju a i ; do you wish I should take 
 it ? /3ojXsi <7r p o <f$ 73 £; for tpotf&sTvvA ; do vou wish to add ? 
 So in questions of indignation, when the command of an- 
 other is repeated ; as, Dion. "I command thee, iEschylus, 
 to be silent. " Ms. "I be silent, (tfiowrw) before this man?" 
 
 3. The Subjunctive with av or xs'v, is often used for the 
 Future Indicative ; as, " But I will lead away (Si x' a^w) 
 the fair cheeked Briseis." This is especially the case, af- 
 ter fA-/j or ou |xtj ; as, ou ^ap jjlt? Wis supyjg- ; " you will never 
 find." The av is sometimes omitted. 
 
 4. The Subjunctive is frequently used for the Impera- 
 tive. In prohibitions with y.r t or its compounds, the Sub- 
 junctive used for the Imperative is put in the Aorist, not 
 in the Present ; as, uwjSi <pwvr,v d v a C ^ >j C d s ; "do not suf- 
 fer me to speak ;" " Be silent, (d'ya, in the Tmper.) and 
 tell to no one (jx^Ssvi el trig, Subj.) this thing." Herod. 
 
 The Indicative, in all its Tenses, is often used with av, 
 where in Latin and English, the Subjunctive would be 
 used ; as, itsi fo ot ys upt*a£ au7oy£, tfcChou av aVoXwXa7t : "since 
 of Yourselves, vou would langsince have perislied."1 
 
 DERIVATION. 
 
 Certain terminations arc used in the formation of Verbs, 
 of which the following are worthy of notice. 
 
 1. i(j) and suw. These express chiefly the state or act of 
 the word, from which they are derived ; as, from 
 a partaker, xoivwvslv, to partake ; from /3atfiXsv£, a king, {3a(f- 
 iksCstv, to reign. These terminations aref likewise, used 
 to denote the exercise of the quality ; as, from iWos, a 
 horse, W*8usiv 9 to practice riding. 
 
 * Here for is understood. L *- c ^ ^l ^n* v f^ / / fy >**^*, ty. 
 
 t On the subject of Moods, see Matthias Larger Gi 
 Vol. II. 740 — 327 — where the exceptions to these gem 
 ciples are considered at large. 
 
Yerbs — Verb t1s. 
 2. aw. The >ie commonly, the possession of a 
 
 } ia i r »ng hair: Groin ti^, honor, *hkj»9 to 
 
 honor- 
 
 tug in any thi 
 • crown. 
 
 W'lllf! 
 
 | 
 
 ral. 
 
 Id. 
 
 Yer' 
 
 in Latin 
 
 written. 
 
 dus ; a- >\ amumlus. 01 
 
 Tlierc arc three < 
 
 . 
 
 to the rn. 
 I.m The priii b from wi 
 
 ' Future, and the 
 
 ftf«pt*c Wrof.] 
 
64 
 
 Verbs — Conjugation* 
 
 The characteristic is the letter, which immediately pre* 
 cedes co or ojuloci, in the Present-w in the Future, and a in 
 the Perfect. In tfr, xr, fxv, the former letter is the charac- 
 teristic. 
 
 1. The Pupil should be instructed to mention all these 
 Tenses, in conjugating the Verb, together with the First 
 Future Passive. 
 
 2. The Verb <nV7w is given as an example of the Tenses 
 belonging to Verbs in all the three Voices. It must not be 
 inferred, however, that <rutf7w, or any other single Verb has 
 all the Tenses in actual use. The Tenses, belonging to 
 each Verb, must be learnt from observation. The Se- 
 cond Future Active and Middle, particularly, belongs only 
 to a limited class of Verbs, which end in Xw, jjlw, vw, and po>. 
 
 Table illustrating the Conjugation of Verbs. 
 In the following table, verbs in w pure, having a short or 
 doubtful penult, are represented as forming the Perfect 
 Passive in o>ai : some however omit tf. Nor do all other 
 verbs in w pure reject the tf, as represented in the table. 
 For these exceptions see the formation of the Perfect Pas- 
 sive. 
 
 For the benefit of those, who wish to preserve the old 
 distinction of the Conjugations, by their Characteristics,- 
 the following is added. 
 
 First Conjugation. 
 
 Pres. 
 «r./3,<p,*7. 
 
 Xe!/3w 
 ypoupw 
 <rutf7w 
 
 Perf. 
 
 <p. 
 rileptpa,. 
 Xs'Xsipa. 
 ysypucpa. 
 
 TSTV(pU. 
 
 Second Conjugation. 
 
 Pres. Fut. 
 
 ttXsxw ^ tfXsgw 
 Xiyw 
 
 GputftfW 
 
 or 
 
 dpu<r7o) 
 
 Xigw 
 /3psgu 
 
 opugw 
 
 Third Conjugation. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 CtVUTW 
 
 adu 
 
 ttXtjSw 
 
 <ppa£w 
 
 Fut. 
 tf. 
 
 dvurfw 
 owfw 
 tfX^tfw 
 (ppatfw 
 
 pure, a) as | 
 
 Perf. 
 x. 
 
 *} Tjvuxa. 
 | ^xa. 
 ! tf&rXi]xa« 
 
 «jrs<ppaxa. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 X- 
 
 ^sVXs^a. 
 
 Xs'Xs^a. 
 0£Spexa. 
 
 wpu^a. 
 
 i 
 
 J rs'7ixa. 
 
 Fourth Conjugation. 
 Pres. Fut. Perf. 
 
 X,/A,V,£,|XV. X,fl,,V,J,flu^ x. 
 
 4^otXXw >^ 4/aXoj . f-^aXxa. 
 
 vs/xw J v5|jlw J vsvi/x^xa. 
 
 (paivw > qjavw > tfs'<payxa. 
 
 (f^e »pw V (f^tpoj \ iWapxa. 
 
} 'erbs — Conjugation . 
 
 65 
 
 TABLE ILLUSTRATING Till ATION OF THE FOLLOWING 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -'Fut. 
 
 [Prof. 
 
 l' 1 kj i « i Passive. 
 
 si Fut. 
 
 Act. A 
 
 'Act. 
 
 
 re|Passive. 
 
 
 -axa 
 
 atf/xai -atfai 
 
 aa7flu 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •r,<fai 
 
 r;7ai 
 
 '• - 
 
 T^r;tfoaai 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 -aaxai 
 
 •>},ai 
 
 *7ai 
 
 
 ' ;aui 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 (i.-fiai 
 
 | 
 
 ^r7ai 
 
 
 ' aai 
 
 
 
 X* 
 
 -y/jtai 
 
 -gai 
 
 
 
 ^(?r;(fo|xai 
 
 
 -xot 
 
 -tffAai 
 
 -tfai 
 
 
 
 JL«I 
 
 
 *e<fw 
 
 -sxa 1 
 
 
 -£<Xai 
 
 
 
 ftfdrjtfoaai 
 
 
 
 
 
 -r^ai 
 
 •itfai 
 
 
 jxai 
 
 -?« 
 
 -<fW 
 
 -xa 
 
 
 
 .(Tlai 
 
 
 aai 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fxai 
 
 
 
 
 
 -yitfai 
 
 
 
 fxai 
 
 - 
 
 
 -xa 
 
 
 
 
 
 .aai 
 
 
 
 -ixa 
 
 
 itfai 
 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 
 -x a 
 
 
 
 
 
 >oai 
 
 
 
 -XfMU 
 
 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' /J.0CI 
 
 
 
 
 -<Tai 
 
 
 
 aai 
 
 
 
 ©<T>*ai 
 
 
 
 
 -offd^o/xai 
 
 
 
 -wxa 
 
 -waai 
 
 -wtfai 
 
 
 
 Tcjxai 
 
 v 
 
 
 -«pa, im 
 
 j>-fJL0U > 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 'OjUWXI 
 
 
 -P w 
 
 rpxa 
 
 pfWtl 
 
 -prtu 
 
 -pTai 
 
 
 -p^Tjr 
 
 
 -xa 
 
 -tfuai -tfai 
 
 
 
 
 
 •xa 
 
 -(ffJLC/. 
 
 -<flou 
 
 
 'oaai 
 
 
 X a 
 
 -7fiai -£ai 
 
 
 
 
 
 -xa 
 
 -(ffxai -tfai 
 
 
 
 ' aai 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -aaai 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 p. -/j. 
 
 -r7ai 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •«^'>j like 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 ^aa* 
 
 -wrat 
 
 
 
 
66 
 
 Verbs. 
 
 [Active 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 S. rurfl — w — sis — si 
 D. (1) — s7ov — s7ov 
 P — ojxsv — sis — ovffi (2) 
 
 ru*rrl — s — s7w 
 - — $7ov — s'7wv 
 — sis — slwrfav 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 S. g'7uir7 — ov — ss — s 
 D. — s7ov — s7tjv 
 
 P. OjULSV Sis OV 
 
 
 1st Perf. 
 
 S. rslvcp — a — as — s 
 D . — a7ov — a7ov 
 P. — a/xsv — als — cctfi 
 
 Ts'7u(p — s — s7gj 
 — s7ov — s7wv 
 — sis — slutfav 
 
 2d Perf. 
 orPerf.M. 
 
 S.ts7u"7T — a — as -s, &c. 
 declined like the 1st Perf. 
 
 relvrf — s — ^7w,&c. 
 through all the moods. 
 
 1st Pluper. 
 
 S. irslucp — siv — sig — si (7) 
 D. • — si7ov — silr\v 
 P. — si/xsv — sils — siCav 
 
 (stfav) 
 
 2d Pluper. 
 orPlup. M. 
 
 S. srslutf-siv-sis-si, &ic. 
 declined *ike the 1st Plu 
 
 perf. 
 
 1st Aorist. 
 
 S. I'tu-v]^ — a — as — £ 
 D. — a7ov — afyv 
 P. — ajxsv-:— a7ff — av 
 
 erj^s — ov — a7w 
 — a7ov — a7wv 
 — a?£ — ciluxfav 
 
 2d Aorist. 
 
 S. s7utf — ov — ss — s 
 D. — s7ov — s'7^v 
 P. — ojxsv — sis — ov 
 
 — £7ov — s7gjv 
 — s7£ — slutfav 
 
 1st Fut. 
 
 S. <ru^ — w — sis — si 
 D. — s7ov — s7ov 
 P. — ofxsv — s7s — ouo"i 
 
 wanting. 
 
 2d Fut. 
 
 S. rvit — oj — sTs — s7 
 L). — sf7ov — s?7cv 
 
 P. otffASV — s71s — outfl 
 
 wanting. 
 
 Note. — The numbers refer to the subsequent observations, page 7t. 
 
VorcE.] 
 
 I 
 
 67 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Infinit. 
 
 Partic. 
 
 - CIULI 
 
 — 71 
 
 — & GJtfl 
 
 — Hi 
 
 (5) 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 J— Oi/JLI 
 
 o»> 
 
 /J 
 
 — r,7o\ — r;7ov 
 — i — wtfi 
 
 
 
 
 
 T67uT 
 
 &%«-£}£ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 — ai 
 
 rJ^z-as 
 
 
 
 — i 
 
 nnr — slv 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' ■ 
 
 — '■ j .: — )i S — 
 
 want 
 
 
 
68 
 
 Verbs 
 
 [Passive 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Opt— 
 
 Pres. 
 
 D. -6,aedov~S07)ov-s<rt)ov 
 P . { 9 )-6psda-e(fds-ov1ai 
 
 -stf^ov-so^wv 
 
 7U#7 -OlfX>iV 
 
 -oifjisdov 
 -oifAsda 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 S . HuttI—o^, ' ou — s7o 
 P. -ofJt^a ~so% -ov7o 
 
 
 
 Perf. 
 
 S.t^'u 'fkkhua -j>ai -xlou 
 D. — ixpsdov-cpdov -<p$ov 
 
 £iVi( 1CT 
 
 -<p0ov — (pdwv 
 
 <T£7t)fAf/^VW 
 TS7ujm|A£V0l,sfy|XSV 
 
 Pluperf. 
 
 S.s7s7;;-^|X7)v— s|^o — <7r7o 
 
 D. — fX,US#OV — (J)0OV-(p$7)V 
 
 P. -ftfAS^a -<p^ -/uu/xsvoi; 
 r/tfav 
 
 
 
 1st Ao- 
 
 rist. 
 
 SJ7u<pd -?]V -?]£ -rj 
 D. —Ypiov—rflriv 
 P. — >)fi»7]v-7)7s -^rfav 
 
 ->]7ov — >j7wv 
 
 -7)7s — 7)1 UtfOLV 
 
 
 2dAor- 
 
 SJlutf —r\v —^g -v\ 
 D. — rflov —yflrv 
 P. — r]iisv -rfls -tjtfav 
 
 TUrf-Y]Gl — >j7w 
 -7}7ov —rfluv 
 -rfls —rflutfuv 
 
 
 IstFut. 
 
 S.TU^Jjtf— OfAai— 7J — Si Oil 
 
 D. -o/xs#ov -so^ov— stf#ov 
 P. -6juust)« -soVte -ov7ai 
 
 wanting 
 
 -Oi'/J^OV 
 
 -0J|UL£t?a 
 
 2d Fut. 
 
 S.Tu^tf— o/xai— j] slat 
 D. -OfXS^OV -stfdov-saTJov 
 P. -6 t as#a -stf^s -ov7ai 
 
 wanting 
 
 -OJjUlc^OV 
 
 Paulo- 
 post 
 Fut. 
 
 S.Ts7u-vj>-onxai-7] —slai 
 
 D. — OfJLgdoV-Sfl'doV-efl'doV 
 
 P. -ofjusda -stfQs -ovlai 
 
 wanting 
 
 Ts7u-v]> -Ol'fJirjV 
 -0lfJL5t)a 
 
 Perf. of 
 pure 
 verbs 
 
 S.Ts7/^-or, -ds$?jXw 
 
 D. -fJUS$OV -<ft?OV -'(J'doV 
 
 P. -fxs^a -tf0a — v7ai 
 
 <r$7 ijtfc-/) -or , ^s<^X&j 
 -Co -tfdoj 
 -cdov-tfdwv 
 
 Tslt^Y)-Qr,oe6r l 'h'Jj 
 
 -fA^OV 
 
 -as#a 
 
 Pluperf. 
 ofditto. 
 
 S.57c7j t u//j-(or ISsSrihto) -/ 
 
 A'/JV -cfo -TO 
 
 D. -f*€ 
 
Voice.] 
 
 Verbs. 
 
 60 
 
 — ative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 OJtfde --©lv7o 
 
 - 
 
 idai 
 
 ruT7-o/Xtvo$ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -jj 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 010 
 
 iv7o 
 
 ting 
 
 
 
 OlT 
 
 
 «-j<r->;<7t<ft)ai 
 
 
 010 H 
 
 
 sffcJai 
 
 re7i>4<-6fji£vos 
 
 -v7o 
 
 -0; 
 
 -Jjv7cu( 1 1 ) 
 
 -<r<)ai 
 
 
 W -fltf™ 
 
 P. psda. -<rfs -v7o 
 
 
 
7U 
 
 
 o 
 
 Vft 
 
 o 
 
 
 UJ 
 
 o 
 
 <^> 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 © 
 
 :» 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 <S <D 
 
 
 *- 
 C0 
 
 u> 
 
 -8 
 
 to 
 
 -50 
 
 lb 
 
 
 UJ 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 4 
 i 
 
 b 
 
 1 
 
 b 
 
 
 b 
 
 4- 
 
 b 
 
 
 6 
 > 
 
 2 
 
 8 
 
 5 
 
 8 
 
 CD 
 >=> 
 
 -UJ 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 '5 
 
 s 
 
 "33 
 
 •to 
 55 
 
 <D 
 
 5 
 
 CD 
 Uj 
 
 
 «=D 
 UJ 
 
 t 2^ 
 
 
 4- 
 
 b 
 
 b 
 
 b 
 
 -rj 
 b 
 
 
 b 
 
 4- 
 b 
 
 • -o 
 
 T3 « 
 
 
 
 > ^ 
 
 
 
 
 — ■ 
 
 
 > 
 
 |€ 1 
 
 b §T :* 
 
 bD 
 
 6 
 <3 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 5 *- 
 
 
 o 
 
 ssx^L \3 
 
 .5 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 bl 
 
 £ ^5 
 
 
 c 
 
 » ^ 5=" 
 
 •4«J 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 .S 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 3 
 
 § «g <D 
 
 3 3- 3. 
 
 c3 
 
 8 
 f ^3 
 
 
 8 
 3 
 
 
 a - 
 
 
 w 
 
 t -3 -3 
 
 
 b 
 
 
 
 
 
 -*■ ' ' 
 
 
 t? 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 
 "O 
 
 
 v ^ 
 
 
 »jj 
 
 
 — -J Q 
 
 
 
 b 
 
 
 b 
 
 
 b 
 
 
 2 5 2 
 
 
 
 5» 
 
 5=" 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 •r . o 
 
 
 
 "5? 
 
 5=" o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 p4 
 
 6 
 
 -1 e 
 
 • lit 
 
 5 ? 5 
 
 o <f o 
 1 > ' 
 
 ^D <33 
 
 6 
 ^ 
 
 
 6 
 
 eg 
 
 O 
 eg 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 >2 >>2 & 
 
 O © © 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 > 
 
 Oh 
 
 o 
 
 > § 8 
 
 5 <E> CD 
 •I'll 
 
 1 8 
 
 -5- J- .J 
 
 © o © 
 
 u 
 
 b 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 •J 
 
 
 -> ' ' 
 
 fc 
 
 )? 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 b- 
 
 e 
 
 b 
 
 > 
 
 c 
 hi 
 
 
 
 o- 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 > 
 5. 
 
 b 
 
 3 
 b 
 
 -S — i 
 .S ' — >-i 
 
 » CO •— " 
 
 ^ 5 "2 
 
 b ri 
 
 JO .. **■ 
 
 -"> S o 
 
 -. :_ 
 
 b o- ^ 
 
 ® fc S 
 
 g — ^ 
 £ c e 
 
 © o © 
 
 r~ E "5 
 
 d 
 <d 
 
 Oh 
 
 S 
 
 J— I 
 
 -ill 
 
 b 
 
 be 
 
 .5 
 c 
 
 6 
 
 3' 
 
 CD 
 
 b 
 
 6 
 
 3 
 
 b 
 
 bD 
 
 c 
 
 C3 
 
 
 d 
 
 c 
 
 ^3 
 
 ST 
 
 e i ? 
 
 3 ^ ^ 
 
 > -^. ■ 
 
 §" o 8 
 ^>S^ us u» 
 V ? 3. 3- 
 
 T • ■ 
 
 m O. dl 
 
 K J^ -to 
 
 ^ >? 
 
 o o 
 
 •CD CD 
 
 1 3. 3. 
 
 3- -50 ->J 
 i50 » 1 
 
 • 
 
 b 
 
 odd e£ 
 
 8 C 
 3. £ 
 
 a 
 
 O 
 
 5<T 
 
 1 
 
 CO 7- 
 
 d 
 
 
 C3 
 
 1 © 
 
 fe a. 
 
 b 
 
 ^b 
 
 > 
 b 
 
 8 
 
 ^. 
 
 o 
 
 4 
 
 --^ 
 b 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 VI h. 
 
 -© 
 
 en 
 CD 
 hi 
 
 Oh 
 
 s 
 
 d 
 
 3 
 
 ^2 
 
 "© jC 
 
 
 
 r— 
 
 0^ 
 
 «— I 
 
 *— ! 
 
 c^ 
 
 r^ 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
Xotes on the Active and Passive Yo:< 
 
 to all the Vou 
 1. Ten an plural end have no 
 
 fir^t | all in the "i&ts 
 
 of tl 
 
 cond and third Dual 
 
 'i h< and the 
 
 third /v.) 
 
 I 
 
 t of the i 
 
 oft! 
 
 A by 
 tin- t 
 
 l which I 
 
 D. 
 
 1 on 
 
 l on ike I 
 
 unly 
 
 in t! 
 
 m. f l h< 
 
 ■ 
 tens 
 
32 
 
 Contract Verb — Active. 
 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 
 Imperative 
 
 
 
 FIRST 
 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 S. 
 
 tri\k -oiw — asig — asi* 
 — <-w — as — a 
 
 — as7ov — £.s7ov 
 
 s. «• 
 
 if* — as — as7w 
 — a — <x7w 
 
 
 D 
 
 
 — as7ov - — as'7wv 
 
 
 
 — a7ov — a7ov 
 
 
 — a7ov — a7wv 
 
 
 P 
 
 — aojxsv — dsls — otoutfj 
 
 
 — as7s — ai7w(fav 
 
 
 
 — w/xsv — a7s — wcfi- 
 
 
 — a7s — atatfav 
 
 Imp. 
 
 S. 
 
 £T'(X -aov — aS£ — as D. 
 
 — as7ov — as7?jv 
 
 
 
 -wv — a£ — a 
 
 — a7ov — tx7rjv 
 
 
 P. 
 
 aw t asv. wjusv. aETSi are, -aov, ■ 
 
 OJV 
 
 
 
 SECOND 
 
 CO 
 
 NJUGATION. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 s. 
 
 — cj — e?g — sT 
 
 S. <p 
 
 iX — ss — s=7w 
 — si — eflw 
 
 
 D 
 
 — ss7ov — s's7ov 
 
 D. 
 
 — ss7ov — s=7wv 
 
 
 
 — sT7ov — sf?ov 
 
 • 
 
 S iGV Si ?0)V 
 
 
 P. 
 
 — s'ojxsv — isle — bovd 
 — ov^sv — sTls — ov(ji 
 
 P. 
 
 — _s~= — se/wtfav 
 — sTls — efiuxfav 
 
 Imp. 
 
 S. 
 
 i(pi\-sov — ssg — ss D. — 
 
 -sslov — : 
 
 
 
 — ouv — sig — si — 
 
 -S?7ov — si,r,v 
 
 
 P. 
 
 so,asv, oG/jlsv -isle, sHs -sov, ouv. 
 
 
 
 
 THIRD 
 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 Pies. 
 
 s. 
 
 SrfK -ow — oSig — 6si 
 
 — w — 0% — or 
 
 3. 61 
 
 |X OS 0r'7to 
 
 OU 0U?Cd 
 
 
 D. 
 
 — : 's7ov Oc7oV 
 
 — oG7ov — ou7ov 
 
 D. 
 
 — oY/ov — 
 
 Dl7?OV - 
 
 
 P. 
 
 — ooM-Sv — Isls — oou(Ti 
 — ov^sv — ou7s — bZdi 
 
 P. 
 
 — os7s — oslwtfam 
 
 — oils — o^wtfav 
 
 Imp. 
 
 S, 
 
 s£v}X — oov — osg — os D. 
 
 — 6s7ov — os7*jv 
 
 
 
 — oov — o\js — 01) 
 
 — ofHov — • 0w'7rjv 
 
 
 P. 
 
 oofjusv, oujmsv -6s7s, ovls -oov, ouv 
 
 
 * £aw, ts;vocw ; Ji^au, ^pJ/.oaai, contract as and 
 
Contract Verb — Acthe . 
 
 -T3 
 
 Optath t 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Infinit. 
 
 Partic. 
 
 rifjL-aoifti -tfo»£ — aoi 
 
 — <pfU -0J£ — 
 
 i"ov-aoi7T;v 
 I — :J7*)V 
 —a 
 
 7l — <JgV 
 
 rift — -a/) \ 
 
 — ! 
 
 . aij7ov 
 — a7ov — 
 — -aajfJL r -awtfi 
 — uJfJifv -«7s -wtfi 
 
 rift — 
 — av 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 91X 
 
 — 
 
 OifJLfV ofli — oFrv 
 
 -jfc 
 
 rj7ov 
 
 
 £|X-£WV 
 
 
 
 
 
 6t)X *f — 001 
 
 oFfAl vT —01* 
 
 OljXfV — 00l7s 00*€V 
 
 -07) 
 
 — C) — olf - 
 — fa 
 
 I 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 VI 111 r ;•: 
 
 
74 
 
 Contract Verbs. 
 
 [Passive 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Imp. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Opt— 
 
 S.<n/x-ao|xai -aj\ -aslai 
 -5f/*ai -d -a?ai 
 
 ^wjasSov -d<7$ov -dtf^ov 
 P. -ao^a ~ae<t&s-auov1cu 
 
 " -w,us<?a -atfds -wv7cu 
 
 FIRST 
 
 <ri|X-dou -cts<rt)w 
 -w -dtfdw 
 -astfdov -asVdwv 
 'UG&ov • da'dbjv 
 -dstf0s 'OStiQuxfav 
 
 -aoi/xs0ov 
 -oi.asdov 
 -aoio.s^a 
 -ajAS0a 
 
 8. flip aofArjv -dou -ds7o 
 -w t ay;v -w -d7o 
 
 D. sYip -aojmsdov 
 
 -GJ|UIS0OV 
 
 -dstfdov 
 -da'dov 
 
 
 SECOND 
 
 CONJU- 
 
 Pres. 
 
 S. (piX-eofjww -ST] -sVfai 
 
 piX-sou -ss'tfsw 
 
 ^iX-soi'jxrjV 
 
 
 -Sfxai -yj -si fou 
 
 -a -siVSoj 
 
 -oifxrjv 
 
 
 D. s.^sJov -SStf^QV -: 
 
 -SStf$OV -SStfSwV 
 
 -SOi|ULS^OV 
 
 
 -^fjLS^ov -src'^ov -sitfSov 
 
 -sfaSov -£»'<?£ wv 
 
 -OK' 
 
 
 P. -soas^a -sW^s -sov7ai 
 
 -sstfSs -ss'c^^^av 
 
 -SOl'jJLS^CC 
 
 
 -kfishu rfififts -svTai 
 
 -s^s ■ st'a'Swfl'av 
 
 -o/fxs^a 
 
 Imp. 
 
 S . e<piX -Sofxrjv -sou -ss7o 
 
 D. S^lX-SOjULS^OV - 
 
 r'so^ov 
 
 
 -OUfUtyV OU -&r7o 
 
 -o^fxs^ov 
 
 src^ov 
 
 
 
 THIRD 
 
 COOfJU- 
 
 Pres. 
 
 S. ^X-ooaai -6?) -os*"ai 
 
 OvjX-c'ou -oltfSw 
 
 orjX-ooifXTjv 
 
 
 -oufxai -o? -oi 
 
 -ou -outf$ 
 
 -Gi'jXip/ 
 
 
 D. -oofwS'ov-osfl'Sov-oSd'Soi 
 
 -dsC^ov -oSuc;,.* 
 
 -oo . 
 
 
 -o'^scov-oDu &ov- oCc^cv 
 
 .outf^ov-ouo^uv 
 
 -oips^ov 
 
 
 P. oofAsSa -gso'Ss -oovToci 
 
 -oecfrs -os'tf&wd'kw 
 
 xs^a 
 
 
 -ojfj£&a -oEitfSs -oOV/ai 
 
 -oud^s -o^ffSwCav 
 
 -OfJJW 
 
 Imp. 
 
 *'. SdqX-ooffcqv -oou -6s7o 
 
 D. soTjX-oo'jas^ov 
 
 
 
 -o^fxrjv -ou -o0*7o 
 
 -oJfJLS^OV 
 
 
and Middle.] 
 
 Contract Verbs. 
 
 
 — ati 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 tive. 
 
 Particip. 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 . 
 
 V 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 o«7o 
 
 -wfiai 
 
 • - { r •',''' • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 OU 
 
 
 
 
 ■ N IN . 
 
 
 
 
 — 6uo -o'oi7o 
 
 
 
 aevob 
 
 -oio -oHo 
 
 -ojftai 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 v7ai 
 
 
 
 
 -t^fJL 
 
 
 
 -ofd^iTv IV 
 
76 Verbs — Contract. 
 
 Notes on the Contract Verbs. 
 
 1. Verbs declined after the early form are sometimes 
 contracted ; as, craratfai from irsraoixon . 
 
 2. Dissyllables in aw, from which the Attics have exclu- 
 ded i, are not contracted ; such as, xXaw for xXaiw ; xaw 
 for xa/w. 
 
 3. Dissyllables in sw are rarely contracted in the first 
 person singular, or in the first and third persons plural of 
 the Indicative ; or in the Optative and Subjunctive moods, 
 or the Participle ; as, tfXs'w, rfXs'ojxsv, <jr\£o\xfi, itXiots, tfXsyjs, 
 tfXs'oov. In the Imperative and Infinitive, they are generally 
 contracted, but not always. 
 
 4. In the Optative mood, Active Voice, the Attics use, 
 ei^v for oijAf, which becomes wrjv in verbs from aw ; as, opwrjv 
 for opAoifw ; tsXoItjv for tsXsojjuui. In some verbs in aw, they 
 change a into v\ ; as, %%g- for £<x£ ; Si^yv for Si^av. 
 
 5. Some Contracts are found in more conjugations than 
 one ; as, y*jpaw (or sw) o^Xs'w (or ow) xvu£aw (sw or ow). 
 
 6. Some are Baryton or Contract ; as, §'Xxw or £Xxs'w. 
 
 ON THE REDUPLICATION AND AUGMENT. 
 
 Verbs are increased in the beginning by reduplieet 
 tion and augment.* 
 
 REDUPLICATION. 
 
 Three tenses, the Perfect, Pluperfect, and Paulo- 
 post Future, have the reduplication, which is retained 
 
 *There is a marked distinction between the increase of the Perfect, 
 and that of the Imperfect and Aorists. The first is found in all the 
 moods, and even in the Participle ; the other, only in the Indicative. 
 The increase of the Perfect is generally formed by prefixing the first 
 letter of the verb with t : it has hence been called the reduplication. 
 The name is not entirely accurate ; for this increase is not always a re- 
 duplicanon. It is, however, used here for want of a better ; and by 
 the reduplication is meant the increase or prefix of the Perfect. It has 
 been thought advantageous to treat of this increase separately from 
 the augments^ syllabic and temporal, both because it is distinguished 
 fro in them by its fixed nature, continuing through all the moods, 
 (though it is sometimes the same with them inform ;) and likewise, 
 because the chief difficulty with the young student is to determine, 
 not the increase or prefix of the Imperfect and Aorists, but of the 
 Perfect, 
 
Verbs — Augments. 
 
 through all the moods ; as, rtf-fiif«, Hn y, rt n'^pi, <rs- 
 . . &c. 
 Rule I. If the v£rb begins with b consonant, prefix 
 
 it with e, for the reduplication ; as, <w7w, <ri-ru<pa ,- >aiw, 
 xa ; ypoupw, yi-y paya ; vs'.uuj, vs-vifjLijxa. 
 
 [Caption 1. When the fin a rouph mute, 
 
 k, for 
 
 <ct ; qx>€g'w, cf<poc^xa, for ce^oS^jxa Bat p ch t »iace 
 
 With m : a*. ;:-. 1 {££fuxa for Jijsuxa. 
 
 uh 1 double consonant, two 
 
 ond is oot a liquid, or yv, | 
 £r,xa ; ^aX>.. • xa ; grjpaivw, 
 
 payxa ; yvwp ,£u. Jyvwpoca ; d'/s'XXw, t<r7a\xa ; all ope'w, 
 
 ■xai mak< xai ; ^TTjtftfw, <Ar<rr;xa, 
 
 with liqu 
 
 id of the lledupl from 
 
 3imi for XiXityo. 
 
 Ri f] 'lilt! with ;i VOWel <>r diph- 
 
 thong, ■ :«d into 1 . and a into u tccoi 1 - 
 
 mporal augment . m 
 
 ATOM! 
 
 Th auLMn when the 
 
 rerb begins with a tanl ; d* when it 
 
 ina with the vowels «, t, t, orthediphth , <u, 
 
 01. 
 
 lly to have been I in all cases; 
 as, i&enre, in tin Afterwa an it 
 
 d with tl l into a 
 
 -r diphtti 
 2. In 1 1 • the 
 
 The aai is aometii 
 
 In Herodotna and otbei 
 
 1 it regularly, except 
 amon 
 
 reason of i^e, seoR> f o4. 
 
 1" T opped, in these instances, to avoid 
 
 und ; su< <,<*«. 
 
 is so called became it adds a syllable to ti 
 temporal, ! - mm the time or quantity ot the syllabi*. 
 
 7* 
 
78 Verbs — Augments. 
 
 Four tenses, the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and two Ao- 
 rists receive the augment which belongs only to the 
 Indicative mood.* 
 
 The syllabic augment is s prefixed to the augment- 
 ed tenses ; as, T^-nflw, s-«W7ov, s-ru^a, g-<rutfov, s-c-s<ru<p£iv. 
 
 p in the beginning of a word is doubled ; as, g»W7«, 
 ?|greArov, e$±a. 
 
 The Poets, however, do not always double p ; as, spa^sv. 
 The temporal augment lengthens a and s into % and 
 o into w ; as, 
 
 a, a<Jw, *}flov. au, augavw, tju|avov. 
 
 £, £Xsu$w, ^Xsudov. o, oputfo'w, wputftfov. 
 ai, ai'pw *?pov.t oi, o/xi£w, wxt^ov.J 
 
 The remaining vowels and diphthongs admit no augment ; 
 as, ixavw, i'xavov. 
 
 Exception 1. Compounds of ofvos, o/wvo's, oi'a|, omit the 
 augment ; as, oivi£w, oivj^ov ; oivo^w, oivo^sov ;§ oivotfoXs'w, 
 oivosroXsov ; o/axi£w, o/axi£ov ; also, oi'ojxai, o/xoupsw, o/fjiaw, oitf- 
 rpotw, o/f*w£w, oMavw.H 
 
 2. Four beginning with a ; aw, dtw, a^s'tftfw, a7]<Si£o|xai. 
 Also, avaXow, (commonly avaXlCxw,) in the older Attic wri- 
 ters ; as, avaXwxa. 
 
 The augment seems to be omitted in these instances, to 
 avoid an unpleasant succession of long vowels. 
 
 3. Many Verbs beginning with s are augmented by length- 
 ening s into 21 ; as, s#(£w, sMi£ov, saw, i'dw, iXitftfw, sXxuw, §X- 
 xw, fafofitai, s'-otfw,^ spya£o/jua/, IpTtfu^w, ^p^w, spuw, io"7iaw, 
 I'XW. 
 
 4. Verbs in so augment the second vowel, o, into w ; as, 
 lopla^w, swp7a£ov. Sometimes, however, i is inserted, s/6p7a- 
 
 RULE FOR THE PLUPERFECT. 
 
 When the Perfect begins with a vowel, the Pluper- 
 
 * A few instances may be found, in which the augment is continu- 
 ed through all the moods ; as, ave<ti%6rjvai, for avoi^Brjvai. 
 + Here a is lengthened into q, and i subscribed. 
 % Here o is lengthened into w, and i subscribed. 
 h 'uiv6%£ov is used. 
 
 | These six sometimes admit the augment, 
 tf h& retains the augment in all the moods. 
 
Verbs — Augments . 
 
 lI augment 
 But bj sto makes liiktfm ; zopja. 
 
 <>ns by the Attic DimL 
 I . Tho bj llabic - r is oft( 
 
 (ho 
 an inim 
 or (liplit! 
 Th 
 
 esent an 
 a. 
 
 oral 
 
 ; as, 
 
 the 
 
 ■ 
 
 i. Th( 
 
 I the 
 
 : 
 
 ttcd, aud ti 
 (fa. . 
 
 I the SCCo fy^o 
 
*G Verbs — Augments. 
 
 3. After the augment is removed from the Aorists, the 
 two first letters of the Present are sometimes prefixed ; as ? 
 cupa ; 2d Aor. ripov ; I. apov, ap-apov. 
 
 COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 I. Verbs compounded with a Preposition, take the 
 reduplication and augment between the Preposition 
 and the Verb ; as, ^po<f<H^KY t xa 9 tfpotfs'SaXXov, from tfpotf- 
 €dXXw. 
 
 1. ex in composition becomes sg before a vowel ; as, £x- 
 
 €dXXw, £p£aXXov. 
 
 2. ev and Cuv, which lose v before a consonant, resume it 
 before a vowel ; as, ^fiuivw, svs'julsvov. 
 
 Exception 1. Compound verbs of the same signification 
 with their simples, and those whose simples are not in use, 
 take the reduplication and augment in the beginning ; as, 
 ajxcpicwujxi, 7j(X(f)javvj;jX7jv ; xads^ojULai, ixa&s%6pr\v ; d^cpuS^rfls^, 
 ^fx(pitf§'//7sov, from ajxcpi and tf&yjlsw, obsolete. To these add 
 dprtexopou, and a^i^ofxai. To this remark there are 
 some exceptions. 
 
 2. Some verbs have the augment and reduplication in 
 the beginning or middle ; as, dv7i£oXsw, yjv7i§oXsov, or dv7s£o- 
 Xsov ; so Jyyuaw, d<piT)fi»i. 
 
 3. Some in the beginning and middle ; as, svo^Xiw, r,voj- 
 p^Xsov, Tjvw^X-yjxa ; dvoi'yw has it in the beginning, middle, or 
 both. 
 
 RULE. 
 
 Prepositions in composition lose their final vowel, 
 if the simple verb begins with a vowel ; as, s^x^ f° r 
 £&£xuj except tfepi and «#po,* and sometimes d/jupi. 
 
 1. If the simple begins with an aspirate, the preceding 
 smooth mute of the preposition is changed into its cognate 
 rough one ; as, dpctipsw, from doro and aipsw.j 
 
 2. g in the beginning of the simple is usually, but not al- 
 ways, doubled, after a vowel ; as, Sialic*), from Sia and £g'w. 
 
 * When irpo precedes the syllabic augment, the two vowels are of T 
 ten contracted into ov ; as, irpovrphero^ for KpoerptecT* 
 -f Vide rule iii. page 5. 
 
Verbs — Formation of the Tenses in the Active Voice. 81 
 
 II i with other parts of speech, 
 
 odredup n in the beginning; 
 
 as, ^iXotfo^ui, i^iXotfo^fov, cfqpXotfo^xa. 
 
 Whcno.; ii 6 a mutable vowel or diphthong, 
 
 augment and redapl i the pan 
 
 and verb ; as, 6Wapt<r7c';j, (Ju^pfrffov. When t: 
 
 an immutabh >!iant, the augment and n 
 
 Jhcation are in ; as, dWly^u, i£ud%)£iov ; 
 
 I or the i 
 
 Tl 1 from the Present, by 
 
 til; as, «vx7w, 
 
 FIRST FITTBE. 
 
 as, 
 
 fw) Xifoj 
 
 Wl les J, 0, c, f , r ra, and 
 
 y as, tfcs'viw, tfci <> 
 
 In >t tneerfe <l tin- penult of the 
 
 as, paivcj, Qavw. 
 
 The long penu mg 
 
 •nsonants ; as, 
 
 • 
 
 v't.. 
 
 . that lb nee 
 
 form 
 
 tf was ai 
 
 with t. \\ icters 
 
 * Ii P*S e 5. 
 
 ild recollect that <J and ( are merely fubititutod 
 for » t , &, a*, and « 
 
 i have tlie hquidi X, p, r, p, iu ti 
 
 - 
 
 g v. 
 dropping X. 
 
82 Verbs — Formation of theTenses in the Active Voice. 
 
 this more probable is, that the iEolics, who delighted in 
 harsh sounds, used the <f ; as, ts'XXw, tsXw, i£ol- rs'Xtfw. 
 
 1. Most verbs in <f<rw and many in £w, have gw in the fu- 
 ture, as if from yw. 
 
 tfpaotfw, tfpagw, as from tfpayw. 
 
 opjtfo'w, op^fw, opvyu. 
 
 crta£w, tflofw, (flayu. 
 
 tf7i£w, tfTigw, tflfyw. 
 
 The following in £w have either tfw or gw ; viz. aptfa^w, 
 
 (5i<r7<x£w, vutf7oc£w, jxspfjwjpi^w, /3a£w, JyyuaXi'^w, /3ouxoXia£w, 
 
 tfa'^w, /3atf7a£w. 
 
 KXa£w. and some others, have y%u ; as, xXa£w, xXa^gw, 
 as from xXo-yyw. 
 
 2. Polysyllables in i£w often drop <f of the first Future, 
 and circumflex the last syllable ; as, vojxI^w, voji/kTw vojjuSj. 
 
 This belongs properly to the Attics ; who likewise remove a t rom 
 Futures in a™, taw, caw, and ocu>, contracting the termination ; as, « a - 
 
 3. Four verbs, winch have lost the rough breathing in the 
 present,*" resume it in the Future ; as, sp(w, from s^w, has 
 
 l|w ; Tjcpu). from &6<pu), has do^w ; <rp£(pw, from dps'^w, has 
 0p£%j^w ; Tps^w, from dps'^w. has 0p/£w. 
 
 Verbs in aw, sw, and ow, lengthen the short vowel be- 
 fore <fw of the Future, a and s into ?j, tijjuxw, rifj^tfw ; 
 (piXs'w, (piX^tfw. o into w. oVvo'w, 5*j>w<fw. 
 
 Exception 1. ow retains o in primitives, which are few ; 
 
 as, otpow, ctpotfw. 
 
 2. aw retains a after s, i, and X or p pure ;| as, Jaw, satfw ; 
 ysXaw, ysXarfw ; xosrtaw, xo-zrtiatfw ; opaw, oparfw. But XP aw > 
 Xpocofjuai, <rsXaw, rXaw, are excepted ; as, ^prjtfw. 
 
 Also, aKpdoncu, dvopat ; and verbs from which other verbs in awvu 
 •r dew are formed ; as, nerda^ Kpepdw. 
 
 3. Verbs of two syllables in aw, which do not pass into 
 -^fxj, retain a ; as, xXaw, xXatfw, because it is never xXr/xi ; 
 tftfaw, (ftrtarfw, because it is never (farfyxi. Likewise, cp^jcvw, 
 (pSouTw, though (p^jULi is used. 
 
 4. The following have either v\ or a, apaojxai, etXootw, aviaw, 
 depaw, iXaw. xvaw, xpsfjwxw. fAyjxa-w. juboipaojubai, tfsXaw, <tsjvl/.w, 
 tfsipaw, tfspocw. A few in sw have srfw ; as, rsXs'w, <r£Xs<rw ; 
 and ^omeTjtfw or £,J,W > an/s'w. ouV/j<rw or aivstfw. 
 
 * Because two syllables do not begin successively witji an aspirate. 
 See rule ii. page 4. 
 
 t By the same rale as in Nouns, see page 13. 
 J The same with «rrff». 
 
rbs — Formation of the Tenses in the Actir- 83 
 
 ret Fut ti ^ by 
 
 Attic and Ionic di as, ve^ 
 
 in the first Future, by 
 
 The j » e i n 1 1 » II liquid 
 
 weth 
 
 »Xa, 
 
 ■ 
 
 i ; and 
 <*. 
 
 i 
 
 xa. 
 
 I a. 
 
 4© 1 .u aild raVvyw. 
 
84 Yerbs — Formation of the Tenses in the Active Voice. 
 
 TplSw, <rs'7pi€-xa, <rg7pi<pa ; Xstew, >sXsrzrt-xa, XsXsicpa. yx, xx, 
 and %x, into x J as > *-syw, Xs'Xey-xa, ySKsy^a ; tfXsxw, tfS'tfXsx- 
 xa, crs^Xs^a. v before x becomes y in Verbs in aivw ; as, 
 fouvw, tfs'vpctyxa. 
 
 4. The Perfect in fxrjxa is derived from a verb in sw, 
 formed from the Future in pZ ; as, tsjaw, t^sw, <rs\iwm. 
 
 FIKST PLUPERFECT. 
 
 The Pluperfect is formed from the Perfect by chang- 
 ing a into siv, and prefixing the augment, if the Perfect 
 begins with a consonant ; as, <rs'7u<pa, ils%(psiv. 
 
 When the Perfect begins with a vowel, no augment 
 is prefixed ; as, g-^aXxa, sVj^aXxsiv. 
 
 SECOND AORIST. 
 
 The Second Aorist is formed from the Present by 
 changing u into ov and prefixing the augment ; as, Xs'/w, 
 skeyw. 
 
 The penult of this tense is in many cases shortened. 
 
 1. In consonants, by dropping <r, and the latter of two 
 liquids ; as, rutfru, sVutfov ; tfWXXw, gtfraXov. 
 
 2. Tn rowels by changing tj, w, ai. and ecu into a ; as, XV 
 /3w, gXa/3ov ;* and dropping the first vowel of si, and su ; as, 
 XsiVw, gXitfov ; os^yw, s<puyov. But before a liquid, si is chang- 
 ed into a, in dissyllables ; as. <r<rs»'pw, sdvapov ; into s in 
 polysyllables ; as, aysi'ptt, fyspov. 
 
 In dissyllables, s before or after a liquid, is changed into 
 # ; as, tfXs'xw, gVXaxov, ctXtjo'g'w bae sVXayov. and ItXy^ov. 
 Verbs in aw and sco, change these terminations intoov ; as, 
 
 (JLUXXW, gfJWXOV. 
 
 Verbs in (f<fw and £w, whose Future is in gto, have their 
 Second Aorist in yov ; as, gVpayov from Ttfpatfd'w ; also grfjjiu- 
 yov and styuyov f om (f/xu^w, and 4^X W * Verbs in £to, whose 
 Future is in tfw, have their Second Aorist in <5ov ; as, g<j pa- 
 £ov. Of the latter, very few have this tense. 
 
 1. The penult of this tense is necessarily long in dissyl- 
 lables, which take the temporal augment ; as, etyto. *j vov So 
 also where the penult is long by position ; as, SaX-arw, JSaX- 
 ^ov. But in many of these, a transposition takes piace. to 
 preserve the analogy : thus, tfspSw makes, in poetry, tVpa- 
 
 * Except \iyw,(]\iit(0, <j>\iy<a. 
 
l in the Actic, 
 
 •lication | 
 
 -' 
 changed int< 
 
 i 
 
 u aud <r<' 
 
 Tii- s 
 
 I.E. 
 
 Tl 
 
 rirvra. 
 
 ' if . 
 
 1 
 
 Si 
 
86 Verbs — Formation of the Tenses in the Passive Voice. 
 
 Perfect by changing a into ew, and prefixing the aug- 
 ment ; as, rccvtfa, ersriJrav. 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
 PRESENT. 
 
 The Present is formed from the Present Active by 
 changing w into o^ui ; as, nJtflw, rMo^at. 
 
 s and o are sometimes omitted ; as, o/fxai for oTofiou ; X*7a» 
 for X*s7ai. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 The Imperfect is formed from the Present, by chang- 
 ing (agu into /jwjv, and prefixing the augment ; as, T^ofxai, 
 !7mr7&jA?iv. 
 
 s and o are sometimes omitted ; as, £X*7o for iXkslo ; wjxijv 
 for wo/jt^v. 
 
 PERFECT. 
 
 The Perfect is formed from the Perfect Active, by 
 ©hanging the last syllable into fxai ; as, rsVspcpa, {top-pas. 
 
 The following slight changes are made for the sake of 
 harmony. 
 
 1. When cpa is preceded by a vowel, fx is doubled ; as, 
 <riru-(pa, «rsVuji/.-(xai. 
 
 2. When xa is preceded by y, that letter is changed into 
 {X ; as, tfsqpay-xoc, tfs'<pa^-|xai. 
 
 3. )/a of the Active is changed into y\i>a\ ; as, Xc'Xs-^a, 
 Xs'Xsy-fjuai ; unless it is preceded by y. 
 
 4. Verbs which have <r in the First Future Active, retain 
 the tf before fxai ; as, tfX^Sw, tfX'/jtfw, tfsVXfj-xa, ffsVXYj-tfixai ; 
 but in verbs in w ^)wr6, if the penult of the Future be long, 
 4 is omitted ; as, «Wu, tfoiyjtfw, tfStfoiV/xai.* 
 
 The following, however, with a Zon^ penult retain the C. 
 axouw, yvow, Spoww, xsXsuw, tfsjjw, tfaiw, tfraiw, |afw, tfsiw, 
 
 5. From verbs in vw, the Attics frequently form the Per- 
 fect in tffjuai ; as, jxiaivw, (xs^iW^ai. 
 
 6. Dissyllables that have <rps in the penult of the Perfect 
 
 * Also, ap«Jw, and a number of others whose penult is short or 
 doubtful. 
 
Yerbs — Formation of the Tenses in (he Passi 
 Active, change £ into a in the 
 
 to o t 
 
 ■ 
 
 8. Some verbs \k\w< 
 xau. 
 
 m& third Partem 
 
 Pis^ 
 
 as, 
 
 whi 
 
 \ 
 
 Vi : as, 
 
 the 
 B second ai. '«ial are f om tho 
 
 ; X/Xjx-rai, XfXfy * . . Krm 
 
 > 6b ; as, rfL^ov, rflwfls ; Xi- 
 
 rule i. page 4. 
 t In the < was changed into y ; it i? . 
 
S5 Verbs — Formation of the Tenses in the Passive Voice 
 
 The Perfect of the Imperative is formed from that of the 
 Indicative, by changing ai into o ; as, rsVu^ai, tsVu-^o ; and 
 ran into 0w, with the preceding smooth mute into its cog- 
 nate rough one ;* as, rsTwd-rai $ Ts7u<p-#w. But if a vowel 
 precedes <rai, d is inserted ; as, <r#n/x^<rt)w. 
 
 When fAoci of the Perfect Indicative is preceded by a vow- 
 el, it is changed into f/.rjv, to form the Perfect Optative ; 
 and if the preceding vowel be 73 or w, 1 is subscribed ; if 
 not, it is annexed ; as, tfStpi'Xrijxai, tfS(piX>jfj(/y]v ; ^yjXw/xai, oe- 
 f}VXw t uvjv ; SzSo&oii, 5c(5o(fjL7jv. But when /ulcci is preceded by 
 a consonant, or a diphthong which has u in it, the Perfect 
 Participle is used with sty* ; as, XsXs^ai, XsXsyfjus'vos s/'/jv. 
 
 The Perfect of the Subjunctive is formed from that of 
 the Indicative, when fJtai is preceded by a vowel, by chang- 
 ing that vowel into c*» ; as, sVIa/xai, k<fiupai. When /xai is 
 preceded by a consonant, or a diphthong containing u, the 
 Perfect Participle with the verb w is used ; as, \zksyp.(\o$ 
 
 The Perfect of the Infinitive is formed from the second 
 person plural of the Indicative Perfect, by changing s into 
 cti ; as, rfky&s, rs7u<p#-oi. These changes will be more fully 
 illustrated by the following table. 
 
 SYNOPSIS OF VERBS IN THE PERFECT PASSIVE. 
 
 Indie. 
 
 Tsru-jXfAiai ( 
 TsVsp-,waj i 
 
 tfsVsi-G',aai 
 flfgflroi-yjjjuai 
 is5^)X-w,aai 
 ^WaX-jxai 1 
 
 Imp. 
 
 -Co 
 -7)CTo 
 -wtfo 
 -(To 
 
 -V(f0 
 
 Optat. 
 
 
 Subj. 
 
 -JJt>gV0£, <S 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Part. 
 
 -<pdai 
 
 -jULjULSVOj 
 
 
 •<ulsvcv£ 
 
 - X 0a» 
 -tft?ai 
 
 -yfxsvos 
 
 -tffXSVOg 
 -YJfXSVO^ 
 
 -dai 
 
 -Wfi-SV0£ 
 -[JL8V0J 
 
 -vital 
 
 -fJUfXtVO^ 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 The Pluperfect is formed from the Perfect by chang- 
 ing pen into f/rfjv, and prefixing the augment, when the 
 Perfect begins with a consonant ; as, dlufAfwu, irelCfk- 
 
 The second and third persons of the Pluperfect are 
 
 fAIJV 
 
 J The smooth mute is roughened before 0, by rule i. page 4. 
 
bs — Formation of the Tenses in the Passirc V 
 formed from those of the I by changing on into o, and 
 
 to r t <Tav. 
 
 Plur. 
 Perf. 'on. 
 
 Phi I ritfo, 
 
 rf wwi, W. 
 
 PJ Xs/ 'av. 
 
 PAULO-TC1T ft i I 
 
 The Paul l from thr second 
 
 ilar <»t' the P< rl by changii 
 
 into c.ucu ; 10, jwx*. 
 
 Tl. from tl^ third 
 
 thf preceding smooth rout High 
 
 tin firsl k Iter ii it i> a consonant 
 
 the 
 as, erfpafj.jjLai, 
 
 I ■ 
 
 > ;**r^, fro- a, 
 
 : 
 
 'Tcu, 
 
 KE. 
 
 singular of the I uu x and 
 
 oflf tl 
 
 m rule i. pag* 4. 
 
90 Verbs — Formation of the Tenses in the Middle Voice* 
 
 SECOND AOKIST. 
 
 The Second Aorist is formed from the Second Ao- 
 rist Active, by changing ov into *jv ; as, s7utfov, slu^v. 
 
 SECOND FUTURE. 
 
 The Second Future is formed from the Second Ao- 
 rist, by changing v\v into /jcfo^ai, and rejecting the aug- 
 ment ; as, §TV*-riv, <rvrf~r)(fQpou. 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE MIDDLE VOICE. 
 PRESENT AND IMPERFECT. 
 
 The Present and Imperfect are the same as in the 
 Passive. 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 The First Future is formed from the First Future 
 Active, by changing w into ojxa/ ; as, t^w, rv^opai ; but 
 in liqiiqLverbs, into £jjuxi ;* as, tfrsXS, tfTsXSfxai. 
 
 ifccri 
 
 SECOND FUTURE, 
 
 The Second Future is formed from the Second Fu- 
 ture Active, by changing w into S/xai ; as, *ww, <jwS|uwxi. 
 
 IIivw, (pa^w, and sSu, have the Second Future in opaiA 
 But these are thought to be the Present used for the Fu- 
 ture. To these add the poetic Futures /3s'ojx°" an( ^ vso/xou 
 hy crasis vsufjiai. 
 
 FIRST AORIST. 
 
 The First Aorist is formed from the First Aorist Ac- 
 tive, by adding ^v ; as, eW^a, hv^a^v. 
 
 Verbs in w pure have this tense often syncopated ; as. 
 e5p«jjwjv for s£ pigef afjwjv, GjvajXTjv for wvvjcfafjt^v. 
 
 * Also those verbs from which c has been dropped by the Attics : 
 
 S, Aco/aw, KOfiivpai. 
 f Declined thus ; drfy-o/iat, -feat, -trat. 
 
Verbs in y.t. 91 
 
 OND AORI-r. 
 
 The Second Aorist is farmed from the Second Ao- 
 Icthre, by changing w into r*, fortfup. 
 
 VERBS IV fXi. 
 
 Verbs in n* are formed from Verba in m, iw, mi, and 
 
 Tl ami tli. 
 
 in m 
 
 i I Doric dia- 
 
 I. Change m into pi ; and lengthen the penult in the 
 
 jular.* 
 
 II n. 
 
 IV use 
 
 If tl mint 
 
 In:; which hep- 
 
 u, is 
 
 w, is 
 
 DB, the Prc- 
 
 oihei 
 
 from wL 
 
 which • 
 
 tat. 
 
 1. 
 into but with >jxu y 
 
 itial lett( 
 u. In ' 
 (hi. *i< 
 
 led; 
 the dual and plur 
 
92 Verbs in (m. 
 
 as, tfXaw, tfijuwrXTijuii. A syncope sometimes takes place ; 
 as, <rer\r)iii from <raXaw. The Reduplication is sometimes 
 in the Middle ; as, oviw, ovivyj/xi. 
 
 3. Barytons sometimes become Verbs in /uli ; as, /3p(0y)|mi 
 from /3pidw. But in such instances, the Verb in pi seems 
 to be formed from a Contract Verb derived from the Bary- 
 ton : thus, /3p^7)jxi is from jSpids'u, derived from /3pi0w. 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE ACTIVE VOICE. 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 The Imperfect is formed from the Present, by chang- 
 ing fw into v, and prefixing the augment except when 
 the Verb begins with i ; as, <n'^fxi, sVMijv ; iflfyfw, i'tfV. 
 
 SECOND AORI8T. 
 
 The Second Aorist is formed from the Imperfect, by 
 casting off the Reduplication, and taking the augment ; 
 
 as. s<ndy]v, suyjv ; i'tf^Tjv, sO^yjv. 
 
 When the Verb has no Reduplication, the Second Ao- 
 rist is the same with the Imperfect in the singular number, 
 and in some Verbs in the other numbers. 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 The First Future has sometimes a Reduplication ; as, 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
 PRESENT. 
 
 The Present is formed from the Present Active, by 
 changing ^ into jxai, and shortening the penult ; as, 
 
 i'tf7r]/xi, i'tf7ajxai ; tWtjjxi, tMsjuwi. 
 
 The following do not shorten the penult, fyxai, avjjxaj, 
 dxa^fjuai, aXaX7]jAai, aXaXux77jfxai, Si^^ai, ov^fjiai. The last, 
 however, sometimes shortens the penult. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 The Imperfect is formed from the Present, by chang- 
 ing fxa» into pw, and prefixing the augment, except when 
 
?(otet on Verbs in fxi 03 
 
 the verb begins with i : '.tf7a- 
 
 The long ; 1 in 
 
 the -j-** ; *V 
 
 ICE. 
 
 Tl wall th 
 
 from the Imperfect 1»\ 
 
 as, fcu?. 
 
 i. I and Doric 
 
 ipli- 
 
 tird person plural of 1 iti, 
 
 •OUfl, 
 
 I »nd 
 
 ural ei^v, nrf, 
 
 1. i rid wiik 
 
 - 
 
 ri<t. 'ul :" in 
 
 I," and the Mid- 
 
 and Imperil 
 
 cliucd like < iruin which I 
 
94 
 
 a. 
 
 n 
 
 oO 
 
 is 
 
 o <5 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 US 1 
 o 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 7 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 P, 
 
 i 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 
 b- 
 
 ^j 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 a 
 
 'S 
 
 ?» 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 \D 
 
 
 
 *^> 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 | 
 
 
 
 \3 
 
 -a 
 
 C 
 
 i 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 b- 
 
 \3 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 > — 
 
 
 > •* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ -S « 
 
 
 
 o « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r^.^ c^ 
 
 
 
 - <c» c^ 
 
 
 
 
 > — 
 
 <5 pip«3 
 
 
 i?T \D *■> 
 
 
 
 ^>*3 
 
 
 ° "C 
 
 ^^F'3 
 
 i I 1 
 
 TTT 
 
 i 4" 
 
 
 
 1 **f*3 
 
 > 1 
 o w 
 
 
 
 O 
 DO 
 
 
 ,*x> c- ,c- 
 
 
 1 ^ l f 
 3 o 5S 
 3. U> to 
 
 «3 i- a. 
 i -3 -3 
 | ' 1 
 
 
 
 a © a 
 
 .;*■ ui to 
 
 l- ^3 ^3 
 
 
 5» 
 
 
 •^ 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 l2 
 
 
 ,i 
 
 
 sf-I 
 
 
 w 
 
 3» 
 
 
 
 
 
 Prl 
 
 1-1 T 
 
 
 <».- 
 
 © \3 ,^ 
 
 1 § I 
 iS ,12 ^ 
 
 T f f 
 
 6 
 > 
 
 3 3^ 
 I I a 
 
 & i 
 
 
 1 i a 
 
 3 
 
 o u> 
 
 *° ,>3 ,>3 
 1 1 1 
 
 > - a 
 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 
 f * 
 
 ^ 1 
 
 > 
 
 — < 
 
 < 
 
 PL, 
 
 ^ to UJ 
 ^- ± ^ 
 
 a 3 a 
 
 
 
 > © a 
 
 
 
 
 
 -^ & 
 
 
 
 
 3 3 3 
 
 i i i 
 
 
 ,1 
 
 
 3 a 
 
 .s 3 3 
 
 "9 -T3D "3D 
 
 
 > 
 
 'CD 
 
 X 
 
 \D 3 >=> 
 
 IS 
 
 CD 
 
 s 
 
 .5 
 
 3 3 3 
 c^r r- c— 
 
 f i i 
 
 © to 
 
 ^ c~ f~~ 
 
 7 T l f 
 
 
 
 
 -a ^ 3 
 
 3 i -a 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 ,JL . 1 1 
 
 
 l a a 
 
 
 
 i -a \5 
 b. i -a 
 © 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 - § a 
 
 ^ s* © 
 
 <=> 5^ © 
 
 
 btSb 
 
 > 5 
 
 
 
 a a ? 
 i i i 
 
 ^ ^ ^ 
 
 — 
 
 S5 ^ ^ 
 
 a \a s 
 1 ~? f 
 
 
 | | | 
 
 5="-a ^ 
 
 ?f t 
 
 
 i i • 
 
 > ,i 
 
 PL 
 
 © > ' 
 
 > 
 
 O r — 
 \Ji C — v 
 
 r f ! 
 
 1 1 1 
 
 1 I f 
 
 F 5T JT 
 
 1 1 1 
 
 
 Hi 
 f ? f 
 
 © ° js 
 
 f a a 
 
 B 
 
 b o w 
 
 i 1 a 
 
 .2 
 
 g 
 
 — tO 
 
 1 1 ' 
 
 > 
 
 4 f 
 
 
 ~a ^ ^ 
 b v ? -a 
 
 0) 
 
 f © a 
 i ^a -a 
 
 
 > 
 
 > ' 
 
 _\a 
 
 
 c^ ' ' 
 
 Jte 1 I 
 
 BO 
 
 £ i i 
 
 
 *■■* B 
 
 *•"• 
 
 ~tO 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 >*B 
 
 
 MQfc 
 
 r A d oi 
 
 tidal 
 
 
 :nd (X 
 
 A c5 ol 
 
 
 tiocC 
 
 
 
 t* 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 6 
 
 
 02 
 
 a, 
 
 < 
 
 
 w 
 O 
 
 
 
 < * 
 
 
 a. 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 0* 
 

 \M 
 
 
 _ 
 
 
 
 09 
 
 1 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 
 ■~ 
 
 > 
 
 
 z 
 
 *■<*» 
 
 
 — 
 
 «5D 
 
 
 
 > 
 > 
 
 
 
 o u» 
 
 
 u. 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 y E .- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 «2 
 
 
 
 2 5* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 ~~ * 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 W> 
 
 
 
 > «. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 \M t - »- 
 
 
 
 
 r: 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 X - - 
 
 v Q 1. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 I ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 i. 
 
 
 
 k. 
 
 
 
 
 OOQ 
 
 - 
 
 — 
 
 £- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — < 
 
 
 
 
 
 
96 
 
 —J 
 
 
 u* 
 
 v/> 
 
 cd 
 
 *-3> 
 
 Ph 
 
 o© 
 
 
 
 
 <^5 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 S 
 
 3 
 
 > 
 
 y= 
 
 | 
 
 3 
 
 <-0 
 
 ^« 
 
 
 a: 
 
 *3 
 
 3. 
 
 M 
 CO 
 
 PP 
 
 g&q 
 
 §>o 
 
 £9 
 
 ft 
 
 « 
 
 M 
 
 a 
 
 ?3^3 J 3 
 
 I I I 
 
 f 
 
 J=". 
 
 ! T 
 
 .?-£" p 
 
 ! I 
 
 55 3 
 
 It2 
 
 !^3 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 to 
 
 o 
 
 i 
 
 
 to 
 
 3 
 
 i 
 
 o 
 
 i 
 
 
 1 
 
 > 
 
 i 
 
 
 3 
 
 i 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 t — 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 | 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 | 
 
 •-2 
 
 
 to 
 
 rl 
 
 cr 
 
 ! 
 
 
 X 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 OQ 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fcD 
 3 
 *■*-» 
 3 
 
 
 72«Ph 
 
 r^ to 
 
 13 l3 
 
 ^S J3 
 
 =1 
 
 ?3 
 
 5. 
 
 o 
 to 
 
 to> 
 
 o 
 
 "© 
 
 *3 ^3 13 
 
 5 © s 
 
 ^o v 3 v 3 
 
 o 
 JO 
 
 F*£" §=" 
 
 <o *-o ^ 
 
 5f 
 
 o 
 
 3 - 
 
 
 O o 
 
 T- -~ ZL. 
 
 lit 
 
 a. a 
 
 2S o 
 
 U 
 
 I ! 
 
 -6 
 
 
 ^ <n ^ 
 
 I-i T 
 
 ill 
 
 
 i 
 
 73 ~ 6L| 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 d? 
 
 
 ■to 
 
 
 ^o 
 
 ^^ © 5 
 
 
 r© r— 
 
 
 "^ ^ 
 
 
 5 J 3 i 3 
 
 
 c— ^c *- 
 
 
 13 > « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 j u> u> 
 I 3 ^3 ^3 
 
 
 
 ^ 'O ^^> 
 
 
 » 
 
 si 
 
 3 
 
 5^ 
 
 > 
 
 > ^ 
 
 
 O u> 
 
 a 
 
 ^dj en 
 
 i2 ^ =>= 
 
 M-4 
 
 Is = © 
 
 Q 
 
 ^ ^O to 
 
 r-N 
 
 
 5 
 
 §* « £" 
 
 i. d. i 
 
 
 
 
 o o o 
 
 
 ^ *o *o 
 
 QJ 
 
 
 > 
 
 ^ =» 25 
 
 X 
 
 3 3 >= 
 
 (Q 
 
 <^7 <^? o 
 
 rt 
 
 >= to <n 
 
 — • 
 
 "j£ "o to 
 
 ^c k^ ^5 
 
 & 
 
 l^ m/P 
 
 _T3 
 
 © ^ ' 
 
 
 "^? o to 
 
 « 
 
 ^o'^J ^2 
 
 J*j 
 
 to to >= 
 
 
 -o -cr v o 
 
 — 
 
 M3 «0 ^O 
 
 W 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 5" ° 
 
 
 od?r- 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 > 1 
 
 
 o io 
 
 
 
 
 >d to> to 
 
 T3 
 
 o o o 
 
 
 1 1 ! 
 
 cd 
 
 1 
 
 
 =* > ^> 
 
 
 5T o ^ 
 
 — 
 
 
 y 
 
 v ^r u> m 
 
 B v ? '? 
 
 H h 1 I 
 
 ^-Moai 
 
 h 3 
 
FOOtTH CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN fJU. 97 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 Pr. 
 
 Indie. 
 
 1). -urov-u7ov 
 
 P. ufti 
 
 Imprr. 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Part. 
 
 -u7ov - 
 
 >jtfav 
 
 
 
 Im. S utfav 
 
 passive VOICE. 
 
 If 
 
 0-VTO 
 
 -WfO-'tfddJ 
 
 HP0 
 
 
 IRREGULAR TSBM IN |U, FROM 'El IB. 
 
 lin, 
 
 1st] . ?xa, 
 
 Imjx 
 
 Ojifatirc. 
 
 i 
 Pres. igj, \r&. 
 
 Dual, 
 i'crf 
 
 Ad 
 
 al. 
 
 av. 
 
 
 -i)7ov - 
 
 -T)7oV 
 
 7ov, 
 
 h -ijtfav . 
 
 7W/. I 
 
98 
 
 Irregular Verbs in ju,j. 
 
 PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Pres. S's-fjitti -doa -<ra/ 
 Perf d-jxai -tfai -<ra* 
 
 1 Ao.(M.)?xa-/X7jv ? 7JXW, 
 
 [^xa7o. 
 lAo.P.^v or sS'Stjv. 
 
 -fJisSrov -tf&ov -tfSov 
 -fJ^SoV -tfSov -tfSov 
 
 2dAo.(M.) gfx>]v 
 [or si'jXTjv. 
 
 Part. s'fjL£vo£. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 2Aoitfo or so, (?) stfSw^ | gtf&ov, Sftwv, | iVSe, stf&wefav. 
 Swfr/. 2d Ao. Sjuww, ? ^rai, &c. Jn^n. 2d Ao. scrSai. 
 
 r Hf*ai, I sit 9 (I place myself,) from t'w. 
 
 The radical word "Ew, in the sense of, J* to place," oc- 
 curs in only a few Tenses ; as, 1st Aor. sTcfa ; Part, sitfag ; 
 in the Fut. Middle, siVofjuai ; 1st Aor. sicTafx/jv. 
 
 r H|xai» which was originally the Perfect Passive from sw, 
 has gained the force of the Present, rjpoj, I sit. 
 
 Pres. ' Tj-^ai -dm -<rui 
 Imp. ty-wv -<fo -to 
 Imper. Pres. ?tfo, fyrSw, 
 Ira/En. Pres. ^VSai. 
 
 -jifcS^ov -tfSov -<T$0V 
 
 -/xsSa -tfSs -v7ai. 
 
 -juus^a -C^s -vto. 
 
 -'^tfSs, '/itfSwtfav. 
 
 ParJ.Pres.fyxsvos. 
 
 Compounds ; as, xo&ijjuiai, xa&Tjtf&ai, &c. There is a dif- 
 ference between this Verb and Tco&ifypai ; xaSitfov from the 
 latter, denotes, seat thyself ; xa^tfo, from xa^ixai, denotes, 
 remain seated. Matthias. 1.328. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 E//xi, Jam, from 'EH 
 
 P. glfjbi, £% or sf, soVi, 
 I. ^v, 3j£, (^tfSa)^" or ?p, 
 F. stf-oftai ->i or -si -srai 
 
 IflVoV, IflVoV, 
 
 ^7ov, ^7tjv, 
 -6fxs0ov -sa'^ov-sa'dov 
 
 i<ffI»&,£<frg',$i0'tV, S/Vl. 
 
 -ojas^a -stfSs -ovra*. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Pres.jfl^iorl'tfOjgWw, | stfkv, sVJwv, | g<r7s, g tf7wtfav or . : : 
 
Irregular Verbs in pi. 
 
 
 Optatire. 
 
 Tut. ?<foi-f*ip -> 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Jfi r 
 
 
 
 Irifin. Vi 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Porf.fte8.oiv.Ful 
 
 »e Grammarians add Tjxtjv, [mperf. Middle. 
 
 Fndiniti 
 
 v, Hov, If 1<ft 
 
 T J < 
 
 I 
 
 1 V V 
 
 Opttf 
 
 
 
 
 ov, 
 
 7oifl: 
 
 / 
 
 11IDIM 
 
 / win 
 
 go. 
 
 I say, fro- 
 
 
 Imp. 
 
 / 
 
 Suhj. 
 
 
 (pare-. . 
 
 .-. M .J 
 
 ajLyjv. 
 
 <parw(fav. 
 
10Q Anomalous Verbs. 
 
 tfs'<pct0Vcci ; tfs<pa<rSw, occur in the Perfect Passive. 
 KsTpou, Hie down, from xiw. 
 
 Pres. xzi~\kcu -<Soi\ -ra\ 
 Imp. sxs\'^r\v -<fo -<ro 
 Imper. Pres. xsf-tfo-a'So 
 Op^.Pres.xsoi-^v-o-To. 
 Jn/£tt. xsi&ou. 
 
 Pi. xs/v7ai. j IstFut. xsiV-ojuiai -yj -srotr. 
 -juls^ov -tf^ov -oTtyv -fxsSa -tfSs -vro. 
 tfSov -tfSwv -#$& -ffSwtfav. 
 
 £&&;. Pres. xs-w|xai -*j -yjrcu. 
 Par£. Pres. xeipsvo$. 
 Compounds ; xaraxsiixai ; xa,raxs7<f%ai, &c. 
 
 e/ Ewu/x», J dr^5 myself, from "Ew. 
 
 This Verb is a derivative from s«, I put on. and in its 
 simple form is used in poetry only, and in the following 
 tenses. Fut. stfw, eWw ; 1st Aor. sVtfa ; Mid. itftfafj^v ; In- 
 fin. etiou ; Perf. Pas. eT^ot* and stf^ui. The compound 
 d^iswufw, occurs in prose writers ; Fut. dpyisrfopai ; Attic, 
 dfjupiw. (from afJKpistfw ;) 1st Aor. fy/4)<scra$ Perf. Pass. fyjt-<pi'si- 
 jtxai, or ytfx(pis0>aj. 
 
 Of(Ja, J Anow?, from sWw, J Ar/iow. 
 
 Perf } r r r 
 
 p * > S. o/<5a, o/tfSa, o/<5s. D. forov, VoVov. P. iVjutsv. [Ion. M* 
 
 .lies. \ t j/ , ?/ . . 
 
 t ? S. $<fov, fj<5ej£, yifetfSa, fj&i. P. fiSs^svy or ^tf/xsv, >i(W5, 
 
 . " ' [or ^Crs, rjcWav, or ;£tfav. 
 
 Imper. Perf. & Pres. S. i'tfS*, Ttf«rw. D. /tfrov, farwv. P. tors, 
 
 [i'tfTwtfav. 
 Fut. sVcTofjiai or slSrjtfu. Opt Perf. & Pres. si&njv. 
 Sm&/. Pres. & P. sidw. 7/j/??i. Pres. & P. eJSsvai. Part. elSfe. 
 
 DEFECTIVE OR ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 A great number of verbs in Greek are used only in a part 
 of the Tenses. The Tenses which are wanting are sup- 
 
Anomalous Verbs. 101 
 
 i either from similar verbs derived from the same root ; 
 or from others of the game signification, though entirely dif- 
 ferent in form.* The cause of these different forms, is to 
 be found chiefly in the strict regard to Euphony, which so 
 much controlled the Greek language. The following are 
 among the changes adopted to secure this object. 
 
 I. The radical syllable was lengthened by insert. ng a 
 consonant, or len j the vo vw for <rt'/xcj ; 
 Ig*'. vC. 
 
 II. The termination 
 1. Into aw, 
 
 from 
 
 Intoffxcj, av:,. 
 
 \ Jiuxa- 
 Sw fro 
 
 III. A redu 
 
 l\ . S. derived 
 
 Iron. 
 
 t in the 
 md lmp< the* Ti i 
 
 Thoff inch borrow 
 
 no T< .u other 
 
 To ti kjjloj, ayaw^i ayouTofiou ">#*; 
 
 mir<\ 
 brt ( 
 
 To lead. i 
 
 \ iyaju, > xrjv. 
 
 S 
 
 j jid k'aSoy 3 
 
 * T. se with Bonic Latin Verbs, as fero y which 
 
 borrowed it* Perfect and Supine from obsolete verbs. • 
 
 9* 
 
102 Anomalous Verbs. 
 
 Used in Obsolete 
 
 Pres.& Im. Roots. Tenses from Obs. Roots. 
 
 * 'rf ' \ ^ w > sTkov, eiXo/jirjv, sXgj, IXoSfia/. 
 V^ W> i gj'Xdu/yjv. 
 
 perceive, AiV0avo|*ai,ai<rt)s'w, aiVd^tfofxai, vj^n/jLai, ^ofxiiv. 
 increase,' AXSafaw, ) ,-*. ». V */ J *%* 
 
 ward off,' AXefr, \**g> £*£"■■ 
 
 *Atm, 'AXeo/xaj, dXs^w, ^Xsutfa, r^Xsuafxyjv and ^Xgafj.ijv, 
 
 by Syncope. 
 roZZ, 'AXivdVw, dXlw dXitfw, JjXixa. 
 
 * z. u%'v ? otXow, aXw-tfw, tfofjuai, JiXwCa, ijXwxa & 
 
 ^ saAwxa, >]Xwj*ai, >jXwv & gaXojv. 
 
 ^ncZ ow£, 'AX(pa!vGJ, dX<psa>, dXpVw. 
 
 $£#, 'A/xaprdvw, d/xaprsw, afAapryj-rfw, tfo/xai, fyAapryj-tfa, 
 
 xa ? juuai, ^/xaprov, Poet. >Jfx6porov. 
 excite, 'Avwyw, \ 
 
 dvwgw, f dvwy^cd, Imp. yjvwyouv, dvwyrjffw. 
 rjvuya & £ dvwy>jfju ; Imper. dvwy^di, avw^fli. 
 dvwya, } 
 fce Aated, 'Aflre^davojjiiaijdflrs^dgw, dflr^d^tfo/xai, dtfj^d^jxai, dtf?]- 
 
 please, 'ApsVxw, } dps'w dps-a'w, tfofxai, fjpstfa, rjpstfd/XTTv, 
 
 "Apw, 3 ^pstfjxai, Tjps'tf^v. 
 
 increase, A-j^avw, ) ,,,, ,-, . . „. - 
 
 bedis- ' A^ofjuai, dp^w, d^sVojxai, rfxpitibrp, d^s^rjtfo- 
 f leased • jxai. 
 
 B. * 
 
 Bdw, (3r)<fopui, i'Srjfl'a, s/3>jO - a|J.rjv, /3s- 
 
 /3r]-xa, fjuai, /3s§aa, 2d Fut. /3g'- 
 ofjiai. 
 
 /3i§aw, Part. Pres. /3i§wv. 
 
 /3i/3^i, 2d A. !6f|v, Subj. (Situ, Part. 
 Pr. j8«eaj. 
 
 Apw, 3 
 
 5, A-j&xvw, ) ,» , 
 
 ' .,v ' f auggw, 
 
 Augw, \ b 
 
 'Aegw, ) 
 
 ^•o, Ba/vw, < 
 
 * The Passive and the Future Middle, have the sense of" incre&e* 
 as a neuter verb. 
 
Anomalous Verbs. 
 
 103 
 
 >\ in 
 ft I in. 
 To cast, BaXXw, 
 
 lice, 
 bud* 
 
 witt. 
 
 
 
 
 ,.<fXU) 
 
 Obsolete 
 
 ■ >tB. Tenses from Obs. Roots. 
 
 *, . vxa, pat. 
 
 jSXr^/jtfo/jLai. 
 
 Id A. Opt. M. 2d Pen. 
 /iiwfxi, witkan active meaning/] 
 
 €ic*>-xa, fxai. 
 
 BXatfravy, (3) 'ov. 
 
 \ " -.^xa. 
 
 / <a. 
 
 o/xai, /3ouXecj, /3ojX>j(rofJLai, 
 
 /Spdrfcj, 
 
 
 marry 
 
 old, 
 
 > paw, 
 
 i -fxw, 
 
 fee for*, 
 
 falOt 
 
 .Cxw, 
 
 To learn, Aaiw,| 
 
 ; 
 
 >va. 
 a. 
 
 A. 
 
 &<$«' (JdAo. 
 
 M. >ul»j. to burn.) 
 
 Od. M6. 
 + 1 ' form was y/yio/iat and ytyt&cKm ; which was softcn- 
 
 u and > iiutoKu 
 
 t Tl * which had a twofold signification, to /cant 
 
 ♦r fear/?, and to frimt. 
 
104 
 
 Anomalous Verbs. 
 
 Pres.& Im. Roots. Tenses from Obs. Roots. 
 
 divide, Aaiw, 5a£w, 6a-(f«, tfojuuai, loatfa, iSatfapriv, 
 
 SsScc xa, tffxaf. 
 Aaxvw, <5?ixw, <%-£«, fofxai, so^a, Sidy -^a, 
 
 7fAai, eSrj-xPyv, soaxov. 
 Aap^avw, oapds'co, haptor\4o\ka\. SsSap&nxa, iSapfyv, 
 g<5ap$ov and &5pa0ov. 
 
 r ; . ' f 5sio!|*i, Imper. 6V5i0i and 5gi5i^/. 
 
 osooixa, J ' 
 
 Aeo/jux/, fe'w, 5s^tfofi.ai, &<Ss'ij|xai, s<5e?jd'/3v, 5s rj- 
 
 AiSafl'xw. ) 
 
 &5a|w. \ fiiSutfxioiy (SioWx^rfw. 
 SsSiSoL-xOi, j 
 
 Aiopatfxco, ) 5paw, (Jpa-tfw, tfofxai , sSpcufa, SeSpaxa. 
 <5i($paJ;w, $ <5p>jjxj, g^pTjv and s^pav. 
 
 56xw, 5o'|w, s<5oga, <5s'5o-xa, y/xaj and 
 xy]fjLai. 
 
 5oaw, ©"oatfofxaij ISoatfajtiyjv, Syn. ^5oa- 
 
 5uvaw, 5uv7j(fo/xai, £6uvy]tfajuurjv, (SeJuv^jxtu, 
 
 sleep, 
 Fear, 
 
 ask, 
 teach, 
 
 fiy, 
 
 think, Aoxs'w, 
 Poet, doxritfu, 
 
 5s(56x7]xa, 
 
 be able, Auva/xai, 
 enter,* Auvw, 
 
 £ 5uvaw, 5uv7j(fo/xai, 
 { ouva^w, s'tJuvaa'^v. 
 
 £ <5ujju, sS\)v, to put on. 
 
 E. 
 
 excite, 'E/sj'pw, 
 
 6«*, "e4», 
 
 qxa, 
 seat 
 
 one's ?£ofA(ii, 
 self, 
 
 see, E'/£w, 
 
 or s'/(Tw, 
 
 ^ypofjwjv, iypyyopa. 
 
 £<5y]xa, IfoVdrjv. I'5»]5a. 
 i'(5oxa &. £<5^<5oxa, ed^So^ou . 
 
 ?5w, l&fxai, so xade5i|xa*. 
 
 sMsw, sJ5/;(fw, sWyj-tfa, xa, Plup. fjfotv. 
 
 know, cMov, i'5ov, £ Si5yj|ULi, Pr. Opt. sMsn^v, Inf. sj<5svoj. 
 oi3a,| 
 
 * In the Middle, " to enter one's self,- ' and hence u to sink" when 
 entering water ; " to dress" in reference to clothes, 
 t 02fa has the force of the Present, as in Latin nori. 
 
Anomalous Verbs. 105- 
 
 
 Used in 
 
 Obsolete 
 
 
 Pres.& Im. 
 
 Roots. Tenses from Obs. Roots. 
 
 ask, 
 
 Eipto, 
 
 jpu, 
 
 gpofxai, 
 
 1 -'V- 
 
 f/pyjtfo/xai. 
 
 
 (h- 
 
 fp^tfofxai, elprj-xa, fjuxi, s/pi'drjv. • 
 
 drive, 
 
 'EXa 
 
 iXaw, 
 
 fXatfw,t ^Xatfa, r,Xatf afAvjv . 
 xa & ^XrjXaxa, £Xr;Xaxa, rXa- 
 fxai, r;X>;XafjLai &. rXatf fiai, /jXa- 
 Xdtfdrjv. 
 
 perish 
 
 ► *E««. 
 
 
 7a. 
 
 makr 
 red, 
 
 Wjvw, 
 
 
 £puc> 
 
 come, 
 
 "EpxofMii, 
 
 «X: 
 
 x^ov, Svn. 
 .! Pert M. >A^a ft 
 
 cat, 
 
 *E(f^6J, 
 
 \ ^1 
 
 Fut. tJo/xai, i<5rj(5oxa, e<5rj<5a, !<$*)- 
 
 
 Ss<fy ^ajov, 
 
 
 
 
 from p£r 
 
 
 
 
 ' tfCd. 
 
 Jim!. 
 
 Txy, 
 
 
 f.'pjtfw, £wpr,<rdfAT]V, £uptj-xa, fxai, 
 aai, fjpov. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 f*X 
 
 <fj(r)-<fu % tfo/xai, fctf^tj-xa, fitai, g<r- 
 
 have, 
 
 X* 
 
 ) 
 
 /.<foj*ai, iV^ov.l eV- 
 
 
 
 ) 
 
 j.r,v. 
 
 
 
 [ 
 
 \. Imper. <x> 
 
 cook, 
 
 
 
 .aai. 
 Z. 
 
 ££r;v or '< & pj. 
 
 
 Z«6J, 
 
 if** 
 
 |W. 
 
 
 IK** 
 
 £w<r*w, t^wtfa, i^wtfafxrjv, 5^u-x«, 
 
 
 
 0. 
 
 7a, s&eXijtfa, *-3$=Xr;xa. 
 
 be tril1ing,Qi'ku, 
 
 &fXiw, 
 
 * Tho origin of this Verb is, Aw. Hence three forms are derived : 
 the B ; and the Doric, Aatvw. 
 
 tin this d, and the Contract form is 
 
 adopted: thus Aw, Aaj, Au. "EA<t<;. \Aw. 
 
 t y Wist (T\c?y a new Present IV^u*, ls formed demoting to 
 
 -. to hold, cV 
 
106 
 
 Anomalous Verbs. 
 
 Used in 
 Pres.& Im. 
 sharpen, ©rjyavw, 
 
 touch, ®iyyavw, 
 
 die, 
 
 Uap, 
 
 ©vtJo'xw, 
 
 Qopvuu, 
 
 06pVUfXI, 
 
 ©pwtfxw, 
 
 Obsolete 
 Roots. Tenses from Ohg. Roots. 
 
 Svaw, Tg'Svigxa, rs'Svaa, riSvnxa &; - 
 vsia, rsSvsws, (wtfa, gen. wro£.) 
 
 S*jvw, ISavov, 2 F. M. Savou/xaj. 
 
 rs^v^xw, TsSv/j-gw, ojxai. 
 
 W^vyjfJLi, Pr. Imper. rs'SvaSi, Opt. <rs$- 
 vgcItjv, Inf. rsSvavcu, Part, <rs$va£, 
 2 A. f&wp. 
 
 Sops'w, Sopvjtfw, g'SopOV, &OpOUfAOI. 
 
 I. 
 
 place, *l5pivw, !5pjw, 
 
 appease i .'IXatfxofxai, 
 iXagojxai, 
 
 ifw, 
 
 i'xgj, 
 C iXaw, 
 ( J'X^fxi, 
 
 Wp'tfcj, i'5putfa, ioputfafj^v, iop'j- 
 xa, jxai, iop^ijv 6c i<$pjv$r,v. 
 
 i'crw, iVa. 
 
 i'SjCw, i'Sutfa. 
 
 j|o,aai, lgafM)v, iy|xai, ixo/x-^v. 
 
 jgov. 
 
 iXatfojULai, iXatfa/xrjv, i>»r ( xa, iXatf- 
 
 Sijv, iXafl'S/jtf'of/.ai. 
 
 i'XaSi, Pr. M. iXajmai. 
 
 cr«raw, tfr^Cw, cfrnpca, criaraijuxi. 
 
 far*, Kaiw, 
 xayrfw, 
 xs'xauxa, 
 
 wiur, 
 
 KspavvJw, 
 Kepavvujw, 
 Ki'pvijjxi, 
 
 gain, KspSalvco, 
 xspdavu, 
 xsxspdaxa, 
 
 K. 
 
 f X^W, I'xrja & ?XSIft, sxyjafxrjv ( 
 
 i jxrjv, sxaov, fxarjv. 
 
 fxspaw, xspoufa), ixspatia, sxepatfajuu 
 xs'paa'fMxi, Jxfpatf^tjv, xspad - 
 
 \ fMU. 
 
 j xpaw, xpatfw, xixpa-xa, /xai, sxp 
 
 (^ xpa^^ojULai. 
 
 f xspfc'w, x?pj*j-<rw, tfofjioti, sxe'p5r l a'a, xsx- 
 
 l spS^xa. 
 
Anomalous Verbs. 
 
 10; 
 
 .1 in Obsolete 
 
 hn. Roots. os from Obs. Roots. 
 
 find, K»x« v ^, ) *'X- W > x 'X > : (rG . aa '> i\ix r ^ a y hQCl**W> 
 
 S 
 shout, KXa^w, 
 
 xXa } xXt^w, Pcrf. M. 
 
 /a, 
 weep, K>." 
 
 /f/rtr, I ijfM lin 
 
 I >j, xopstfw, fxopttfa, sxopfCafjiv 
 
 f 
 
 KpF/j." 
 
 u 
 
 //, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 fan 
 
 £xpfjxa(fafL i 
 
 \ M. i ? xrafjiy ( v, I 
 
 f x.Xi> *w. 
 
 /#m 
 
 . orX&oy- 
 
 X a 7f"»» 
 
 
 
 
 . 5 
 
 
 li.ip. 
 
 ■ 
 
108 
 
 Anomalous Verbs. 
 Obsolete 
 
 Used in 
 
 Pres. & Im. Roots. Tenses from Obs. Roots. 
 
 fight, Mdxpiutiy f*ax s ' w ' fAa^CofAai & jxa^stfof^ai, Jfjwt- 
 
 XW*h 2 F. fAcr^a*. 
 about to 6e,MiXXw, iisWiu, fj,sXX/j<rw, sfxs'XXyjtfa. 
 care, Ms'Xw,* pshsu, jjlsX^o'oj, ^/xsXrjtfafXYjv, jULS/xsXy r 
 
 xa, fxai & fXSfjL^Xrjfxai, ^XtjSijv, 
 
 I'fjusXov, jws'fjt/yjXa. 
 
 (fxiyw, fw'-gw, gojxai, ffuga, f^i-xa, 
 
 ► yixai. fjusfjL^o^ai, sfjuix^v, 2 A. 
 
 } P. ffJLtyrjv, jLfci^^CofA*ai. 
 
 remem- Mijuwtjo'xWj fjwaw, julv^-cTw, tfojiiai, s^yr^a, IfAv^tfa- 
 
 fcer. f^Tjv, fjLSjUivr^ai, fxSjuiv^ofxai, £|A- 
 
 To remain, Mi'/xvw, /x£»sw, fxtfjisvrjxa. 
 wipe MopyvJw, ^ 
 pjF", MopyvufM, V fiopyw, jutopgw, lfXop|a|m,»iv. 
 
 'OjXopJvufM, } 
 bellow, M^xcj, a 
 
 (fXUXOCCJ, fAUX^tfW. 
 
 mingle, Miyvtfw, 
 Miyvujun, 
 
 piffcuxa, 
 
 gj&UXOV, 
 
 inhabit, Naiw, 
 
 N. 
 Srjv. 
 
 O. 
 
 be pained. 'OoV'gw, Mags'w, o^ag^tfw. 
 smell, ''O^w, } 
 
 otfw, 
 Perf. M. £<Sa,t 
 swell, OiSaivu, 
 
 0/(5avw, 
 
 Oi<S/tfxw, 
 think, Oi'ojxai, 
 
 OfjUUU, 
 
 go, Oi'xoj*ai, 
 
 2 A. w'xofJtfjv, 
 
 J. oiilot, olSytfu), w5r)-tfa, xa. 
 
 > OfSfr), Ol^rfOjUWW, irjjULaL WjUWJV, (/ 
 
 * This Verb is chiefly used as an Impersonal, 
 f *0<5w<5a, has the sense of the Present. 
 
lomalous Verbs. 
 
 i in Obsolete 
 
 Pres.&IiiL Ro Tenses from Obs. Roots. 
 
 slide, 'OXkT&oivw, ) oXitf^'w, wXi<xcr)-<ra, xa, wXiffSov, wXjtf- 
 
 "OXjtfSavw, $ 
 
 tferfroy, OXW, > 
 
 { wX 
 
 aW, "0»*m, S 
 
 
 Ao. 
 
 'OpV i pCJ, OprfOJ, UifKfOLy GJpjULa/, Op^jp 
 
 * r,xa. 
 II. 
 
 ^pa<vofJLai. 
 ./Mtfxavw, S 
 
 rojxai, 
 
 :a. 
 
 l'« rt*. M - 
 I 
 
 pass, ITfpvaai, 
 
 n 
 
 TSpaw, # Syn. tfpa -r'pa xa, 
 
 Jjy s ..' p 
 
 II j 
 
 hi v o/>r/i .1 J ^» 
 
 ri ) ■ ' ' ■ 
 
 * ITrprftf. to pass into another con pur- 
 
 LFbon or thing, 
 brougi 
 
 10 
 
n 
 
 no 
 
 Anomalous Verbs. 
 
 Used in 
 Pres. & Im. 
 
 Obsolete 
 Roots. 
 
 drink, Iliyw, 
 
 Tenses from Obs. Roots. 
 tfwtfw, tfsVw-xa, fxai & tfsVo- 
 
 tf/'w, Pres. M. flrlojxai, flritfofjwxf, 
 
 IVlOV, 2 F. M. tflOUfJLClJ, 
 
 ^<7rrfjLi, Imper. 9r75i. 
 
 give to drink, Ilitf/o'xw, tfi'w, tfj'tfw, eWa. 
 
 j£77, ILVX^fJn, £ tfXaw, tfX>j(fw, gVX9]<fa, eVX^tfafjLyjv, 
 
 IIjfJL«7rX7]fjLi, < ^£crXr](5'|xai,S'r'X')7(r^v,flrgVXTi^a. 
 
 nijXT'Xavw, {flrX^fw, Imp. Pas. sVX*jfi/>)v. 
 
 S^tow, tfsVrwxa. 
 
 tfga's'w, IVstfov, 2 F. M.tfgtfouj&af. 
 
 sneeze, nrapvujjuai, tfraipw, IV<rapov. 
 
 inquire, IluvSavefjuai, tfSuSw, irsdtiopou, ^i'jfv^cu, sVu&o'/jhtv, 
 
 do, 
 flow, 
 
 
 break, 
 
 e P*)yvuGj, 
 
 strengt) 
 en, 
 
 'P'/jyvufJLi, 
 
 t-'Pwvvuw, 
 
 'Pgjvvujxj, 
 
 Jusw, 
 
 P. 
 
 Att. gp5w, £p|w, i'pj'jxai, s/py- 
 fxai & sgpyjxai, Perf. Mid. s'op- 
 ya. 
 
 Wijv. 
 
 & g||wya, s|£<*yijv, jayyja'ojj.ai. 
 |wtfw, sgjw-tfa, xa, juuxi & (f/xai, 
 g^w(T^v,Im.£^cj(J'o, fa reicell. 
 
 2. 
 
 gow 
 
 quench, 2§evvuw, 
 2§svvu(xi, 
 
 ' tf§sw, tfSstfcj, s<fSi(fa 9 sVfexa k eVfrj- 
 xa. gVbStfjxai, EtfKtf^ijv, crSecT- 
 
 scatter, 2xs5avvyw, ( tfxsSaw, tfxsSdtfu, sVxs&x-tfa, €p.ai, idxs- 
 
 2xs<$avvufM, f <5atfSr)v. 
 
 r tfxXaoj, tfxXrjtfofxai, 1 A. ftfxijXa, tVx- 
 
 rfry «p, 2xs'XXw, 5 Xipca. 
 
 ( tfxXTjfju, Pr. Inf. tfxXijvai. 
 
 oj^er Zi- 2^v5w, tftfeiw, (frrei-rfw, (fojuuai, ltf«rei<fa, i<S*s\- 
 
 bation, <f a f^rjv , $4*si<t\Mii . fa« I J 
 
Anomalous Verbs. 1W 
 
 Used in Obsolete 
 
 Prt Roots. Tenses from Obs. Roots. 
 
 spread, 1 J, }tfrop:'u, CropfCuj, 0Yop£ Nfo, i<fro- 
 
 - pFwufJLi, , pitfafj^v, itfropiC- 
 
 ^ropvopi, 3 
 
 2rp^. u, / - dVpclxfw, sa'rpwo'a, stfrpwtfajjLTjv, 
 
 Irpj... M, S -pwa^xj. 
 
 Aare, S^w, *x 
 
 J 
 
 nd, Ta. riraya. 
 
 ru,a- 
 
 £w, Jofjiai, hi/ r;xov, 
 
 r cpaw, rp>, ',-xa, ftaj, 
 
 ? sVp>. 
 
 fi^tj. xai. 
 
 r ipa/j. 
 
 ? (5pg'fMj, I . M. i|i 
 
 J 
 
 r. .m. paf) 
 
 i .a. 
 
 cut, 
 
 tut* 
 
 
 C*Wfi.rxa, 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 wound, 
 
 
 run, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 bc t 
 
 
 promise , aai, itfotf^u, ue<xr^»j(rofjtai, Itttiyr^ 
 
 >./;v. 
 
 *. 
 
 jay, ♦atfx^, 
 
 i 
 
 - 
 
 /.LUJV. 
 
 * Thorn and ro'pm arc both found ; the former derived from r//*w, the 
 
 'Cfiov or trapov. 
 
 t Thia must be distinguished from the regular m-vw, to prcparo 
 
112 
 
 Anomalous Verbs. 
 
 Used io 
 Pres.& Im. 
 
 bear, #s'pw, 
 
 anticipate ,3>Savw, 
 corrupt, 4>S/vw, 
 
 produce, <J"Jw,* 
 
 cr£(puxa, 
 
 Obsolete 
 Roots. 
 
 svsyxw, 
 ivsxu, 
 
 <pops'w, 
 
 qju/x*, 
 
 Tenses from Obs. Roots. 
 o'/tfw, o/Vo/xcu, oi'tfSTjv, ojtf^'/jtfo/xa/. 
 1 A. 'fayxa, fycyxaixriv, r ; v^- 
 
 S^V, 'JjvS^'XOV, yjvs^xo'jLfcyjv . 
 
 1 A. -^vsixa, 7jv£ixa|X7jv, hrpzy- 
 
 Per. M. svxyvo^a. 
 
 (pep^itfw, ^(pop^tfa, flTfOop^fiow, 
 
 Syn. (ppsw, 9p>?(J'w, &:c. 
 
 Imper. A. 2. <ppsV. 
 
 {pSatfaj, (pS'/?a'o|xai, sqj5a-(fa, xa. 
 
 (pSi-tfcd, tfo/xai, f(p^i(fa, sq&i-xaj 
 
 fJUXJ. 
 
 gq)uv. 
 
 rejoice, >Xa/'pw, 
 
 X a P"> 
 xs^apxa, 
 
 obtain, Xav&xvw, 
 
 gape, Xatfxw, 
 
 Xatfxa^GJ, 
 
 colour, Xpwwjw, 
 Xpwvvunjui, 
 
 bury, XwwJw, 
 
 XdlWUfJLI, 
 
 
 ) X a P f ' w > X a P^' xap^tfo^ai, *X*P 
 
 } youoioi, ^aip^dojj s^a/pTjtfa, x£^aptj-x«, 
 
 J /xai, xc^ap^Cofxai. 
 
 $ X"? w > eX a * 0V » **X av5a - 
 
 C X 6| ' W > XS'Vofww. 
 
 { & Xf^rjva. 
 
 J Xp°' w > XP^^j xf'xpw-fwti & (f|xaj. 
 
 5 ^rjv, xwtfSfyrofiiai. 
 
 ft. 
 
 u$w, wtfw, w<fa, uxfjaai, u* 
 
 * *vw signifies to produce ; «l>fy»,In the Middle sense, /o ruffe r one's 
 self to be produced, or /o 6c 6or/t. The Perf. i^wi, as well as 2 Aor 
 e<pvv,fvvai t and ^uj, have a passive signification 
 
Adverbs. 
 
 ADVHi; 
 
 I. Of Quality. These I 
 
 1. In -~;. formed from Adjectirea and Participles by 
 changing *s of the no: 
 
 sweeth/. 
 
 I du- 
 plication ; as xp-'ooz-.v, secretly, from xixpuTrai ; [3aSr l v y by 
 Sttpx. ^c. 
 
 .^tjv, from Nouns ; as, XoyouJijv, ?r//A eh 
 -*S ; cXi- to wealth, from tXout-o£. 
 
 i In . '. T 
 
 M with pieces of i rrpaxov.) 
 
 5. -^<5c !v -aOov, | ng to ti.< 
 
 -at in i 
 
 \ 
 Ay name, to. fA <////<- 
 
 I 
 8. I 
 
 S 
 
 /i//y, 
 
 hardly 
 
 from 
 epe/ //. 
 
 I I 
 
 is« will ! 
 
 II These have a three-fold r< 
 
 i. These i 
 
 as, cavray 
 \rhtr< nnintry 
 
 <>rs. 
 • Win I md are 
 
 of th- entire ; as, ovpavoSev,^/ 
 
 /?( i ' </. 
 
 H nd are added to 
 
 If, for \\ 
 
114 
 
 Agreement. 
 
 'OupavoSi, 'OupavoSsv, 'Oupav6v<5e (or Cs,) 
 
 in heaven. from heaven. to heaven. 
 
 ejfiritft, GyjSrfczv, <H#a£s, 
 
 at Thebes. from Thebes. to Thebes. 
 Some adverbs have such an affinity, that, beginning with 
 
 a vowel, they are Indefinites ; with z$ } Interrogatives ; 
 with <r, Redditives. 
 
 Indefinite. Interrogative. Redditive. 
 
 C which way, 
 7), 0V09, / by what 
 ( means. 
 
 Show far, 
 for what rea- 
 son. 
 
 oVs, oVgts, ) 1 
 
 > when. 
 
 o'Ssv, oito^svy whence. 
 o&i, where. 
 oVov, Ao?*? much. 
 ofov, q/ter z^/ta^ man- 
 ner. 
 Stfaxis, /tow often. 
 
 v> 
 
 tOTS. 
 
 which way ? 
 ( by what 
 ( means ? 
 L how far ? 
 I for what rea- 
 { son ? 
 
 I when? 
 
 tfyVlXU, ) 
 
 tffoev, whence ? 
 toSi, where ? 
 tfotfov, how much ? 
 ttoiov, after what 
 
 manner ? 
 |iro<faxi£, how often ? 
 
 or 
 
 TOUJTJ) 
 
 
 this way. 
 by that 
 means. 
 i so far, 
 
 -co, Iforthatrea- 
 {son. 
 
 ■ 
 rrjvixa, 
 r&'^fcv, thence. 
 <ro$i, there. 
 rotfov. so much. 
 olbv, 0/ter /A«/ 
 
 manner. 
 r&tfaxi£, *o q/V??* 
 
 *A*7* . 
 
 comparison. 
 
 Adverbs derived from Adjectives in use, from the neuter 
 singular of the comparative, and the neuter plural of the 
 superlative of the Adjective, are commonly used in com- 
 parison ; as, tfw<poJS, tfw(pw<rspwv, (fiAXpurara. Adverbs in a* 
 from prepositions, form their comparison in w; as. 
 avwre'pw, avwcotroj. The same is the case with some others ; 
 as, iyyjg, eyyvrspu), iyyvrdrw ; but sometimes sy-prsoov. 
 yiov, Syx.Hfra. are found. 
 
 5@9- 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 AGREEMENT. 
 
 I. Apposition. Two Substantives, signifying the 
 game thing agree in case ; as, IlauXos obrtortfus, Paul 
 an Apostle. ®ew xpir/j, to God, the Judge. 
 
Agreetiu US 
 
 I. One oft >od J as 
 
 I, the son o£ 
 
 ich fol- 
 it, in tl Subetant 
 
 us a 
 frien 
 
 supply the 
 
 - 
 
 1. ;>ut in ti 
 
 ty of A.U) 
 
 as, 6 ' 
 law ; 
 
 ! 
 II 
 
 1 are oft. \a$ 
 
 -, /Spfi^os 9c ! povra c 
 
 : as, 
 I noun with a pi 
 
 * T 
 
 y a. byph< 
 
116 Agreement. 
 
 Gender 1. The 'Adjective, as a predicate, (not as an 
 epithet,) is often put in the neuter singular, (xp^M^ being 
 understood,) while the Substantive is masculine or feminine, 
 or in the plural ; as, oux dyaSov tfoXuxoipavnj, a plurality of 
 rulers is not good ; perafio'kai Xutfyjpov, changes are painful. 
 
 2. When the Adjective thus used is made the Nomina- 
 tive to an auxiliary verb, it is often put in the plural; as, 
 a S v v a t a stfn (for cWuvarov,) it is impossible. 
 
 3. The Demonstrative and Relative Pronouns also, are 
 often put in the neuter, when they refer to their Substan- 
 tives generally as a thing ; and are sometimes put even in 
 the plural, when the noun is singular. 
 
 4. npwrog and tfag, in the neuter plural are frequently ap- 
 plied to persons ; as, Aaprtw 'AiyivijTgwv <ra tf p u <r a, Lara- 
 pon, Prince of the iEginetans. 
 
 5. oTos and otfos, in the neuter plural, are often put with 
 Substantives in the singular ; as, ypays x £ *^°S 0,a nsiSous, 
 paint her lip like Persuasion. 
 
 6. In the Dual, a feminine Substantive has often a mas- 
 culine Adjective, especially among the Attics ; as, <xfm<pw tgj 
 iroXss, both those cities : sometimes also in the singular and 
 plural, when the attention is not directed to a distinction 
 of sex, but generally to the person ; as, Qairrsiv <nv' sv <nj 
 Tj/uuspa /xe'XXwv vsxp&v, (of a woman,) being about to bury a 
 dead person that day. 
 
 7. When a woman speaks of herself in the plural, (4f£&?0 
 the masculine Adjective is used ; as, hixsTs arsxvoi, I (we 
 are) am childless. 
 
 8. Sometimes the Adjective agrees in case with one 
 noun, and in gender with another intimately connected with 
 it ; as, waV' opviSwv rfsrsyvCjv ^vsatfo^Xd tvSa xa< svSa crorojv- 
 <rai, ayaXXojxsvai nrepvysdtftv^thus many tribes of winged birds 
 fly hither and thither exulting on the wing. 
 
 9. An Infinitive, or part of a sentence often supplies the 
 place of the substantive, and then the Adjective is put in 
 the neuter gender ; as, ^aXscrov to fxvj <piXry<rai, it is hard not 
 to love. Anacr. 
 
 Case 1. An Adjective has often its proper Substantive 
 put in the genitive ; as, o» pauXoi tjjv avSpwcridv, wicked men ; 
 -^To^tfoXXov tou p^povou, much time. 
 
 2. Such instances as, <p/Xo£ w Msvs'Xots, Iliad A. 189, and 
 v£psX7)7spsVa Zsj£, Iliad, A. 560, are not exceptions to this 
 rule ; (pi'Xos, is the Attic vocative, and v^sXt^ sptVct, tbe«£o- 
 lie nominative. 
 *M^i /. 3. (9 
 
Agreenu 117 
 
 III. A verb agrees with its nominative in number 
 and person 
 
 1. The nominatives of the 1 are 
 
 rare! except f 
 
 2. The Infinitive, or part of a <» np- 
 
 . iiiative ; 18, ri ptXarftyaiv ;j £1 " 
 
 ; to 
 rcufiv dp£<r 
 
 I, it 
 
 Horn. Od. 
 
 ; it. 
 I . 
 
 I. X tij 
 
 i I • , : tcivt i^opog *cu *avr Itox 
 
 tbout a \t : 
 
 *0 yap Mujfrg *7og — 
 
 But t. wiiat ba a of him. 
 
 I\ plural ol r have 
 
 tmonl) a as, £5f i mi. 
 
 » l ii- 
 
 \ A i dual w ther in 
 
 the | 
 
 i «orafUi - 
 ite their liad, 
 
 Ji I 
 
 VI Noam of multitude in the ring*] 
 
 in tlic plural 
 
 «<rav to «v d him.* 
 
 Tins rule applies w: QOUO of mult. 
 
 one 
 
 * T and haws, <$>Ao* *f>4* *XA»v Aiy . 
 
 speaking 
 
118 Relative. 
 
 whole, the singular Verb and Adjective are used ; as, 6*&6fi 
 egsro Xao's, with haste the people sat down. Iliad, B. 99. 
 
 VII. Two or more Substantives singular, coupled 
 by the Conjunctions xai, &c. have a Verb, Adjective, 
 Participle, or Relative plural ; as, faspu** xcu xapirog Sia- 
 qispoutfi, the fruit and seed differ. 
 
 1. If the Substantives are of different persons, the Verb 
 agrees with the first person in preference to the second, and 
 with the second in preference to the third ; as, £yu xcu <tu ra 
 S'lxaiu iroi7)(fo^sv, I and thou will do right. 
 
 2. If the Substantives denote inanimate objects, the Ad- 
 jective is commonly in the neuter plural ; as,<rov au^s'vaxai 
 njv xspaX'^v cpaivsi xe^pu^w/jugva, shows the neck and head 
 gilt. 
 
 3. If animated beings are spoken of, the Adjective is put 
 in the masculine, if one of the Substantives is of that gen- 
 der ; as, Trarpos xai jwrjTpog *xsVi fxS ^aiovrwvj my father and 
 mother being no longer alive. $&/ <* /*aJ~c~^' 
 
 4. Sometimes the Adjective^ agrees with only one of the 
 Substantives; as, tfuSoji/isvos, 2rpofAj3i^idif]v xa; ras vavg 
 drfs'kri'kuSWa, having learned that Strombichides and the 
 ships was lost./- / 10 fy » »'- **** *-*/•'*' &. 
 
 RELATIVE. 
 
 Rule VIII. The Relative k agrees with its antece- 
 dent in gender and number. 
 
 1. Sometimes the antecedent in the singular, is followed 
 by the Relative in the plural, when it refers not to a definite 
 individual, but to the class which it represents ; as, Srjtfau- 
 potfowg ctvrjp, oilg Sr] iiraiveT <ro tfX^Sos, a money getting man, 
 which class offnen, the people praise. 
 
 2. When the antecedent, on the contrary, is a word of 
 general import in the plural, (as iras,) the Relative is in the 
 singular ; as, ci<f<ira%srcu <k a v r a g, S av flrspiTvy^av7j, he salutes 
 all, whomsoever, he meets. 
 
 3. The Relative sometimes agrees in gender and number 
 with the noun following ; as, slg \spxg cupixvSvrai <roVou£, at xaX- 
 Svrai tfuvayw^ai, they arrive at the holy places, which are 
 called synagogues. Philo. 
 
 IX. When no nominative comes between the Relative 
 
*W * Relative 119 
 
 and the Verb, the Relative is the nominative to the 
 Verb ; as, 'AvSpag U rfcrovrai, the men who shall know. 
 
 But when a nominative comes between the Relative 
 and the Verb, tli governed by some word 
 
 in the sentence ?**, the word which he 
 
 spol 
 
 l. When the R of different 
 
 persons, tther than the second, and 
 
 with the second rather than the third. 
 
 emphasis, the Relative 
 often . and the 
 
 tOOd in : Inch folk 
 
 what inted lor • 
 
 When any arobi onstruction, 
 
 tlie i ative in the i 
 
 clause ; as, n rj «roXi> vofjti^ei Seo 
 
 vojju^ as Gods, 
 
 wcov, this 
 
 I in a Poei Tro- 
 
 noui 
 
 1. 1 Demonstrative 
 
 Pronoun, tlial l'ronoun is cornmn- and the K< 
 
 e put in ' xjjojva 
 
 •7g to «p£>rw tkiyec (fo 
 
 no means accordant with what X?'**' 
 
 p*j, I use what I ha 
 
 X I 
 
 words r fer to the same tfa 
 
 <nox4xu\oc y I am 
 
 1. The which ha imonly th 
 
 tfore them, are su ; and w 
 
 Verbs, with Verbs passive of naming, gesture, Src. 
 
 The nominative after a »me- 
 
 timei ed into the genitive plural ; aSjKpoSfcg 
 
 ^Xafijjv, for fXi ' 
 
 ARTIC] 
 
 be Article is prefixed to nouns which 
 
120 
 
 Article. 
 
 not generally any one of a class, bnt definitely some one 
 which is known. A noun may be rendered thus defi- 
 nite in various ways. 
 
 1 . Ka<r' tZoxty) by distinction, or general notoriety ; as, 
 o -nror/jT^, the Poet ; i. e. Homer ; r t v6(fog £zssxei<ro a/xa xai 6 
 #6\£fjios, at the same time were impending the well known 
 plague, and the Peloponnesian war. Theoc. II 59. 
 
 The Article is thus used xar' efo^v, before the names 
 of the Deity, and of the great objects of nature, the sun, 
 moon, stars, seas, earth, heaven ; and generally before any 
 object which is greatly distinguished or well known. 
 
 2. By a previous mention, either of the same or a synon- 
 ymous word ; as. stfaids&Y] ys fjt^v sv nsptfwv vopoig k<rot $s <5oxa- 
 C*v, oi vo/xoi ap^stfSai, he was educated according to the Per-? 
 sian laws — and those laws seem to begin, &c. Xen. Cyrop. 
 xo\atfav<ro£ ds rwog Id'/yfog dxoXsSov, fjpsro <n "XOLksrtaivoi toj Ss- 
 pdrafovn, and some one beating his attendant severely, he 
 enquired the reason of abusing the servant. 
 
 3. By implication in the context ; as, olrog rtpddzg roTg Wo- 
 Xsfjw'ois Nujxqjaiov cpvyag iysvero, <ngv xpitfiv k-% Itfoixeivag, he hav- 
 ing treacherously surrendered Nympha3um to the enemy, 
 became a fugitive, not waiting the trial ; i. e. the trial im- 
 plied as the natural consequence of his treachery. 
 
 4. By a description in the context which limits the noun 
 to a single object ; as, r\ oiaS'/jxTj 'P/jtfi XpitfrS, the covenant 
 of Jesus Christ. 
 
 5. By being monadic in its nature ; i. e. representing 
 persons or things which exist singly ; or of which only one 
 can possibly be the subject of discourse ; as. ixxo^ag rag 
 Sjpag eltfrfhSsv slg rr\\) yuvaixwvr7*v, having knocked at the gate, 
 he entered the women's apartment. 
 
 II. The Article is prefixed to nouns, when they de* 
 note a class of objects taken as a whole ; as, h avSpwros 
 s<frri Sv7jto£, man is mortal : Xsvofxsvov roO^ &€sg <ppxps<v, woVep 
 oi xuvsg, rse dvzpurf&g, saying that the Gods guard men as 
 dogs do. 
 
 III. The Article is frequently prefixed to abstract 
 Nouns. 
 
 1. When used in their most abstract sense ; as, % a£iW 
 kcu Y) axoXatfia {kiyidrov rwv 6'vrwv xaxov stfn, injustice, and in- 
 tern] are the greatest of evils. 
 
 2. When the attribute is personified ; as, vj Kccxict, utfoX- 
 a/3s<fa, siVcv, and Malice, interrupting, said. 
 
Article. 121 
 
 The Article prefixed to a neuter Adjective, is used 
 For an abstract noun ; as, to xaXov, beauty ; to otfiov, justice. 
 In these cases the abstract noun represents a class of 
 objects. 
 
 IV. The Article is frequently used as a Possessive Pro- %~*~- 
 noun^ as, fyi ru) tfctTpj, xa< <nn ^r\rpi /ulovov y£ysvr t <f§at 9 clXXa^ ' ll ^ 
 xolI tt, vrarpidt, that he was born not for his father or his mo- 
 ther only, but for his country. Demos, de cor. § 59. 
 
 V. The Article is sometimes used as a Relative Pro- 
 noun j as, ti Sc cpeCys^, ts'xvov ; I<pi. tov 'A^iXXsa, tov idew aitf- 
 ^vo^ai ; what do you ftYe from, my child ? Iph. Achilles, 
 whom 1 am ashamed to see. Eurip. Iph. A. 1351. 
 
 When the Article is thus used as a Relative, the Verb to 
 which it belongs is frequently changed into a Participle ; as, 
 itih oi \sy6vrsg, foi oi Xs'^outfi, there are those who say. The 
 Participle is often understood and sometimes the Article ; 
 as, 6 Zv to?£ ojpavo/s ; <r'ig £*tiv s/xs nrcL*ra%ag, (supp. 6) who struck 
 me ? 
 
 VI. The Article is sometimes used as a Demonstra- 
 tive Pronoun, especially by the early Poets ; as, <rr t v <5' 
 Zyu &x X^tfw, but 1 will not release her ; II. A. 23 ; Ids sT<rsv, 
 he said. 
 
 To this head may be referred the use of the Article with 
 fx£v and 5s, to express contra-distinction ; as o/xev, the one ; 6 
 Ss\ the other. In like manner the Pronoun §g is frequently 
 used with /uisv and 8s. 
 
 VII. Infinitives, Adjectives, Participles, and Ad- 
 verbs, and members of sentences are frequently-used as 
 nouns, and in such cases the Article is generally pre* 
 fixed to them, as, tou q>iXo<ftxp6i* to £tjrsiv, inquiry is the 
 business of philosophy ; oi Sv/jtoi, mortals ; rttigu, external 
 things ; ogu$ slg to tfdvS' opgv, quick at discovering all things ; 
 oi aptpi nX^Tojva, the followers of Plato ; and sometimes 
 Plato himself. 
 
 1. In such instances the noun to which the Article be- 
 longs expresses a class of objects. 
 
 2. Adjectives in ixo£, are used with the Article in 
 two different senses. In the singular they denote 
 generally a whole ; as, to ^oXitixov, the citizens taken col- 
 lectively. In the plural they signify some circumstance de- 
 terminable by the context, or by general knowledge ; as, 
 ra TpwVxa, the Trojan war ; ra 'EXXTjvixa, Grecian affairs, or 
 history. 
 
 11 
 
122 General Principles of Government. 
 
 VIII. A word or phrase added to a Substantive for 
 the purpose of description or definition, has commonly 
 the Article ; as, (fuvsi^ AvSp^oig r o Tg dyo&oTg, I am with 
 good men. 
 
 This is likewise the case after verbs of calling ; as, to'v 
 fAo'vov AS^poSoxrflov ovofAa£ov7g£, calling him the only incorrupti- 
 ble man. 
 
 1. The Participle must take the Article in th.s case to 
 distinguish its use, from what is called the participial con- 
 struction. 
 
 2. When the second word is merely in apposition without 
 defining the former, the Article is often omitted. 
 
 3. An Adjective before a Noun has one meaning when it 
 precedes, and another when it follows the Article ; as, M 
 tfXxaioig rofc tfoXiVais, with the citizens being rich, or because 
 they were rich ; i*i roTg <ir'k&<fi(ng tfoXiVais, with the rich citi- 
 zens ; sff' axpoig roTg opstfiv, on the mountains where they are 
 highest, i. e. on the summit of the mountains. 
 
 IX. The noun to which the Article belongs is fre- 
 quently understood ; as, vol ^rpog (sc. ^/xaraj the 
 things of his mother ; to avSpwrfos, (sc. |fyxa,) this word, av- 
 Sputog. 
 
 X. In a proposition, the subject has generally the 
 Article, and the predicate has not ; as, ^vs^aa, 6 QsCg, 
 God is a Spirit. 
 
 XL Proper names are not always subject to these 
 rules. 
 
 GOVERNMENT. 
 
 GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF GOVERNMENT. 
 
 The action of a verb may be considered in reference 
 either, 
 
 1 . To its immediate object ; as, <5i<56vai £ fx a u r 6 v, to give 
 myself; or 
 
 2. To a remote object ; as, <Ji5ovai !|xau<rov ry tfoXsi, to 
 give myself to the State; (3or$s7v rvj irarpiSi, to aid my 
 country ; dtfaXXowrsiv <rivot v o <$ o u, to deliver some one from 
 disease ; (psiSstf^ai twv I p i<p w v, to spare the kids. 
 
 The immediate object of an active verb, is that on which 
 the action is exerted ; it is properly in the accusative. The 
 
General Principles of Government. 
 
 remote object is not acted upon by the verb ; but is merely 
 an object to which the action tends or is acquired ; or from 
 respect to which the action is exerted, or of which it takes 
 part. 
 
 It is sometimes joined to the immediate object after an 
 active verb ; and still more frequently follows the Neuter 
 
 viiich gav 
 the action of that verb. In either case it may take 1 pre- 
 sence on the \ 
 This distinct! te object, 
 
 js hut lin sh ; almost every with 
 
 taken place, pat in the 
 
 accusative or objects Hence a very large class of 
 
 words are considered, in Greek, as Intran 
 a genitive or dative of the remote object ; which in En; 
 
 uiked among r bs. To 
 
 utrary ; and wc 
 shall see that the Greeks themsehe.- in words 
 
 ea as tra with tbe o the ae< 
 
 and sometimes ai th the object in I 
 
 The narks ar« 
 
 vounger student in tracing irl\ , 
 
 <>f the m a 11 immediate ol 
 
 on the one hand, and theg< aid dative ol* a remote ono 
 
 •n th'j other. 
 
 • } mtive. 
 
 1. The genitive of the remot. put after all 
 word the idea ot D, for the purpose of 
 making that n b nr and 
 
 Kobe v\«-ll offii* fo liquor, to 
 >le as to 
 ;>ect to tl. 
 • iild rim ; II- 
 
 >) in life ; krtiyt 
 apw, to be m haste with reaped to the battle ; upifvxi \f 
 to cease (in respect to) from i 
 (I was broken as to my head.) 1 had my head brok 
 
 '• Som i whole clause ; as, 
 
 I ! <. the chief of all sciences with res- 
 pect to the improvement of the learner, is that of the 1 v 
 
 2. Adjectives, which have an active signification, and 
 
124 Government of Cases . 
 
 are mostly derived from active verbs or correspond to them, 
 in meaning, have that object in the genitive, which after 
 the verb would be in the accusative ; as, oX&pioi <p(Xwv, de- 
 structive to friends y dpli^ahris xaxwv, lately instructed in 
 misfortune. 
 
 3. Hence words denoting a state or act of the mind " with 
 respect to" any object, and directed towards it, but not act- 
 ing on it, are followed by the genitive. This includes all 
 adjectives and verbs, denoting affections or desires of the 
 mind ; viz. knowledge, ignorance, experience, forgetful- 
 ness, concern, custom, recollection, carelessness, desire, 
 aversion, &c. &c. In all these cases, the emotion or act is 
 put forth " with respect" to some object ; but without so 
 acting upon it, as to affect its state, which would require an 
 accusative. 
 
 4. Words denoting abundance or fulness, and want or 
 emptiness, govern a genitive of the object, "in respect" to 
 which the abundance or want exists. Adjectives and verbs 
 of plenty and want, separation, filling or depriving ; verbs 
 of bereaving, delivering, hindering, rejecting, making way 
 for, repelling, ceasing and causing to cease, &c. &c. have 
 all the idea of want, or plenty, as the ground of their gov- 
 erning the genitive. Substantives likewise, which are de- 
 rived from these words, are often followed by a genitive of 
 the object "in respect" to which the plenty or want exists. 
 
 5. The same original sense of the genitive seems to give 
 rise to the construction of the comparative with the geni- 
 tive ; as, fjus(£wv *a1pog, greater with respect to ; or in com- 
 parison with his father. Hence all words denoting a com- 
 parison, may be followed by a genitive of the object " in re- 
 spect" to which the comparison is made. To this class be- 
 long verbs derived from the comparative, as, TjTJatfSai, &c. 
 and those which signify to surpass, to rule, to take the lead, 
 to govern, to obey, &c. and adjectives denoting power, 
 ability or control ; as, Jyxpa7fo, &,c. Substantives likewise ; 
 as, rjlla t2 tfojxalos, defeat by means of drinking, i. e. intem- 
 perance in drinking. 
 
 So likewise words which denote comparison in respect 
 to value ; as, agios, literally, " equal in value." Hence all 
 words in which there is a determination of value ; as, " to 
 buy, sell, exchange, estimate, &c. govern the genitive : 
 and hence, the general rule, " the price of a thing is put 
 in the genitive." 
 
 A comparison is likewise implied in words whiGh ex- 
 
Government of Cases . 125 
 
 press a difference ; as, Stuyopog, elspog, aXXo$, aXXoTbs, aX- 
 \61piog. 
 
 That " with respect" to which any thing is done is fre- 
 quently the reason of an action ; hence those words which 
 denote the reason or origin of a thing, or that u on account" 
 of which any act is performed, are put in the genitive ; as, 
 Aawuv xc^oXw/jLSvoi, angry (on account of) with the Greeks. 
 Accordingly verbs of accusing, slandering, condemn- 
 ing, acquitting, and generally those that pertain to judi- 
 cial proe< in govern the genitive. Likewise, 
 verbs of i take a genitive after 
 them. Verbs of praying have frequently a genitive of the 
 person or thing •■ in n to which the request is made. 
 So likewise have adjectives. After exclamations, the noun 
 which occasions the exclamation is frequently put in the 
 genit: .ct7o1>)7o£ twv <ppevwv, O Ju- 
 piter ! the acuteness of In 
 
 II. The second principal relation expressed by the geni- 
 tive is that of ih( tion of a whole to its parts ; 
 
 Ql partitm ly. 'i COmiDOQ to most 
 
 languages. — Tin genitive tl,. of all 
 
 kinds, even those which go\ • i-ative, when the 
 
 action refers, nut tu the whole object, but only \o n part ;* 
 as, rife y"r,c HlfMV, they laid waste a part of the country ; iyu 
 olSa rQv j/jlojv rjXixiu>7wv, I know some of the same age with 
 
 elf; &V7>j<rai xpfwv, to roast some of the flesh. Thi 
 expressed in French by the article part at if, and in English 
 by the omission of the article, or by the word "some." 
 After adverbs of time and of place, the same cunstruction 
 often occurs ; as, aXXoSi yaiyg, in another part of the coun- 
 try ; tys *~r t c it a late part of the day. 
 
 Hence many words are foil* litive, which 
 
 signify participation, or at least imply that idea. Among 
 these are verb- which denote to partake, to impart, to enjoy, 
 to 'obtain, to receive, to take, and the contrary idea, to let 
 go. In these cases there is a reference, more or less dis- 
 tinct to that part of which the action takes place ; as, clpicWi 
 ca <5opa7o$, means to let go of the spear ; cupis'vai to 6opu, in 
 the accusative is to hurl the spear. In the former instance 
 the action is exerted only "in respect" to the object ; in 
 the latter, it acts upon the object and changes its state. 
 
 From this idea of part implied in the genitive, the super- 
 
 * This construction is not uncommon in English. e. g. "I give 
 liberally of my property for his relief." 
 
 11* 
 
126 Government of Cases. 
 
 lative is followed in the genitive by the noun representing 
 the class of which the Superlative is the chief or best 
 part. Hence too the genitive is put after Verbs, Adjectives, 
 and Adverbs, derived from the Superlative, and those which 
 express a high degree of preferableness. 
 
 III. The genitive is used to denote the person or thing 
 to which any object belongs, whether it be a quality, proper- 
 ty, habit, duty, &c. and those likewise from which any thing 
 arises or proceeds. Hence verbs, denoting possession, pro- 
 perty, duty, custom, power, govern the genitive. Hence, 
 verbs of hearing, smelling, tasting, feeling, are followed by 
 a genitive of the object from which the sensation proceeds ; 
 likewise verbs signifying to learn or experience. 
 
 For the same reason the genitive expresses the material 
 of which any thing is made, with substantives, verbs ,and 
 adjectives. The dative is also used for the genitive, when 
 the material of which any thing is made may be considered, 
 as the means by which it was made. A genitive is used 
 likewise with substantives of all kinds, to denote the author 
 of the thing implied in the substantive ; as, "Hpas dXa7s*ai, 
 wanderings, arising from Juno. 
 
 IV. The genitive follows verbs compounded with prepo- 
 sitions which govern that case ; when the prepositions can 
 be separated from the verbs without altering their signifi- 
 cation. 
 
 V. The genitive is used in determining time or place, 
 when they are parts of a larger duration or extension — 
 - — where, when, how long, since, within the space of. 
 
 In many of the cases stated above, particular verbs gov- 
 ern a dative or accusative. Many of these will be specified 
 tinder the rules to be given hereafter. 
 
 DATIVE. 
 
 The Dative in Greek has two senses ; the one, that of 
 the dative in other languages answering to the question, 
 :t to, or for whom or what ?" the other, that of the Latin 
 ablative. 
 
 1. The dative represents the distant object to which an 
 action tends, (whether transitive or intransitive.) or from a 
 regard to which it was commenced ; as, nrsfoe&ai rw, to 
 obey any one ; 5i5ovai rl nvi, to give to any one. It has, 
 therefore, generally the same construction as in Latin, ex- 
 cept that more verbs are followed by the dative in Greek. 
 Some classes of verbs vary in their construction, being foi- 
 
Government of Cases. 12f 
 
 lowed at times by an accusative, and at times by a dative : 
 this is sometimes the case, lik* . ith the genitive and 
 
 dath» able variety of construc- 
 
 tion in particular words under the several class 
 
 II. The dative in Gn - in a great measure, 
 the place of the ablat In tins exprcs- 
 
 be idea of companiom ; the 
 
 question u with whom of an instrument or means, 
 
 anaw< F an imp ment, or 
 
 external i ■ on what ac- 
 
 count .'"' •• for u liat .'" an ' ion. 
 
 ure, degr< 
 with the compar Ifptf, older by a 
 
 year. It is put al>o in d< ind placOj in an- 
 
 and " when 
 
 III. Th( led for the dative, or the da- 
 
 to fix the at- 
 tion of I M upon the instru- 
 
 nu lit or end of \ on. 
 
 Tin >uld 
 
 burn the l th tlannn .»Tprj<f£i n , he 
 
 t nt by wnich this is 
 .. be writes, 
 
 alrajg t' fjurp' SVf '•;. that lie would hum them 
 
 attention backward to lire, as that 
 
 . winch their being i>urnt proceeded. The same obeer- 
 
 to the following examples ; ib7/tf {X&' 'A^iX^v, 
 
 II. w. 422; avlia n*)X«iwvo$ iwv, 
 
 going against the son U. xx. 113; ofv^ /3£/3aprjo- 
 
 '.ifAoFb ftapeitxg X 6 'P a £' W* hands hravy 
 from , tn dxapHfrias, 
 
 they gave judgment, as to ingratitude ; <5ixa^ov7^ fluftoif, giv- 
 
 i them. 
 
 ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 The accusative expresses, as in other languages, the per- 
 son or tiling which is affected bj the action of the accom- 
 pany in u verb. Some verbs which are not strictly transitive, 
 however, are followed by the accusative ; particularly b] 
 nouns which denote not the passive recipient, but the ob- 
 ject of immediate reference ; as, eV&fiv, fi/3pi£siv. dAxfft, 
 rptffxwfiV, (pSavsiv, Jrtrpotf&feiv, airwJiipatfxi-iv. In 
 • and similar i Lhe object of the action would be 
 
 more naturally put in the dative 
 
128 Government. 
 
 Many verbs, which signify an emotion or feeling with re- 
 gard to an object, as, to be ashamed, afraid, to compassion- 
 ate, are followed by an accusative which expresses the ob- 
 ject, and at the same time the effective cause of the emo- 
 tion ; as, aitf^uvofjiiai <rov Osov, I reverence the Deity. This 
 takes place with some neuter verbs ; as, akysTv <n, to suffer 
 in respect to something. 
 
 Many verbs have an accusative not only of the immediate 
 object of action, but likewise of the more remote ; 1. e. the 
 person or thing which the action respects, and which is more 
 regularly in the dative. 
 
 The accusative may follow all kinds of words by synec- 
 doche, xa7<x, Siu, &c. being understood.* 
 
 GOVERNMENT. 
 
 Government of Substantives. 
 
 I. One substantive governs another, signifying a dif- 
 ferent thing, in the genitive ; as, tS <3>sS fjuaxpoSufjua, the 
 long suffering of God ; /Sfyxa XlSs, a seat of stone. 
 
 1. The latter substantive generally expresses the class or 
 kind to which the former belongs ; or some relation of ori- 
 gin, cause, possession, or property. 
 
 2. This rule extends to pronouns, and to the article used 
 as a pronoun ; as, xpi^v vr\v «rS iWa, the barley of his horse. 
 
 3. The genitive often denotes the noun, in respect to 
 which the preceding neun has its meaning ; as, dyyeXiiot, 
 *% Xi'ou, a message in respect to Chios. 
 
 4. The governing noun is often understood ; as, 'OXu/x- 
 flfiag v) 'AXs|av5ps (supp. fJ^fyp,) Olympia the mother of Al- 
 exander. Efe a<5s, (supp. 56/xov,) to Hades ; h aix, (supp. 
 56/xw,) in Hades. 
 
 5. A substantive in the genitive is often put for an adjec- 
 tive, to express quality more strongly ; as, fia^og 7^, depth 
 of earth, for fiaSsTa, yv) ; rj irspuftfeia, *% X^P^°^> abundant 
 grace ; ^ a<r7a7ja<r2 tfXsfc, inconstant riches. 
 
 6. The Attics use a noun in the genitive, preceded by a 
 neuter article, for the noun itself; as, to *% r^s, for 77 r^x 1 )) 
 
 * Foi a full exhibition of this subject, see Matthiae's Greek Gram- 
 mar, II. 450— 615, from which most of the foregoing observations 
 have been taken. 
 
Adjectives. 129 
 
 fortune ; to <ruv ypo^f^a7cjv, for <ra ypajuifiaTa, letters ; ca cojv 
 /Sapoapwv atfKrta £<r7i, for oi /3ap§apoi, barbarians are faithless ; 
 Demosth. 
 
 7. Instead of the genitive, a noun with a preposition is 
 often found ; as, alvx}* h *spi «rS /Six, the evils of life, for 
 
 tf. The dative is often used for the genitive ; as, oux 
 ^ArpsiSji 'AyafAi^vovi »jv5av: t did not please the mind 
 
 \ j;amemnon, the son of Atreus ; Horn, talfi rifju^pov <pova # 
 the avenger of your father's murder. 
 
 The noun that should be in the genitive is often, es- 
 pecially by the Poets, put in the accusative, governed by a 
 preposition implit ■ tg f«7o irsvSos, for<r3<pp£- 
 
 va$, what - invaded your mind ? 
 
 10. The genitive is sometimes put elliptically, svsxa be- 
 inderstood ; A xaxo's, Oh wretched I ! 
 
 >rtunes. 
 
 11. An or article in the neuter gender, 
 without b the geniti i, ^x?^" 
 
 7ov tI 0soj, the kindnc >d ; ret c7;s ru)pic the gifts of 
 
 fort ii. 
 
 1. In ti es a noun is understood, which is really 
 
 the governing word. 
 
 ;i preposition precedes the noun ; as, rot 
 crctpcx of tortu 
 
 3. The adj< I in the abstract, is often with- 
 
 out a genitive, and then it has an adverbial < is, to 
 
 Xoiiro'v, finally. 
 
 III. If the latter of two itibetantn sses 
 
 some quality or a it is often put in the 
 
 genitive ; as, avr,p p.tyoCkr& dpsr',;, i man of greal fiii 
 
 >>Y\g 9pevwv, daring of soul ; cpu/iJeiv* rr t s dprj77 ( $, t0 be 
 ! in virtu- 
 
 The latter substantive is more commonly put in the ac- 
 cusative, by B] xa7ct, 5ia. ma understood ; 
 as, <r«roj<>c/ - P 6srov, (supp. xot7d,) of ingenuous disn 
 tiou. 
 
 government of adjectives. 
 
 I. All Adjectives may govern a genitive which more 
 exactly defines the idea contained in the Adjective ; as, 
 
 • IlpuTtoctv is the same with irp&rof thai. 
 
130 
 
 Government. 
 
 tfuyyvwjtxwv dvSpwtflvwv dfxap7*j{jLa7wv, forgiving in respect to hu- 
 man errors. 
 
 Iri this rule is embraced every case, in the subsequent 
 ones, (see Gen. Prin. of Gov. page 122.) 
 
 II. Adjectives signifying any affection of the mind f 
 (as knowledge, ignorance, &c.) plenty, want, power, 
 participation, diversity, and separation, govern a geni- 
 tive. 
 
 The genitive generally denotes the origin or source, or 
 that in respect to which the qualities expressed by the ad- 
 jective exist ; as, e'ju/za'Sipos <rs Sudlv/sTv, experienced (as to) ia 
 misfortunes ; iitfnroi itfuflaixsvoi zisSioio, horses acquainted (as 
 to) with the plain ; d&x^ovss pctx^** ignorant as to war ; 
 yS'idlov Qsol^olIos d0£a7o£,not perceiving (as to)the most pleasant 
 sight ; ruv ^aXsitfwv azisipog, unexperienced (as to) in hard- 
 ships ; dcpv^os /3i67oio, affluent (as to) wealth ; spring dvfywv, 
 deprived of men ; alog tfoXe'fxoio, hungry (as to) for war ; *?& 
 w&alrig xo7s'wv, angry on account of the deception ; iyxpalrig 
 o/vs, not partaking of wine, i. e. temperate; dXXo'7piov <nj£ 
 eau72 dgias, far from his dignity ; utf7spo£ ovSevbg apelfi, removed 
 from none in virtue, i. e. inferior to none in virtue. 
 
 It is desirable that the student should make himself fa- 
 miliar with this mode of solution, and apply it in his read- 
 ing. 
 
 III. Adjectives denoting dignity and worth, and those 
 which refer to crime, innocence, or price, govern the 
 genitive ; as, agios fwtfSS, worthy of a reward. 
 
 IIav7a wvia tfXsfe, all things may be bought for money ; 
 syio-xps SxXs'ias, in danger of slavery. 
 
 IV. Compounds of a privative, and verbals which de- 
 note action or capacity, especially those in <ros, ixog and 
 qpios. govern the genitive ; as, 
 
 'A0s'a7os xoc; dv?jxoo£ a^av7wv without sight or hearing from 
 any,i. e. without seeing or hearing any ; <puXa7ixo£rS tfwjuwx- 
 7o£, guarding the body ; ziapsxlixbg <rwv dyaSwv, imparting 
 from good things, bestowing benefits ; Xu7>?p»os (fojxatav, free- 
 ing from terrors. 
 
 Verbals govern the genitive, from the signification of 
 their verbs ; and compounds of a privative, by the force of 
 avsu, from which the a is derived. 
 
 V. Partitives and words placed partitively, compar- 
 atives, superlatives, interrogatives» indefinites, and 
 
Adjectives. 131 
 
 6ome numerals, govern the genitive plural ; as, «rpw7o$ 
 'Adrjvou'ajv, the first of the Athenians; h t£jv *>oiwv, one of 
 the ships .*, the ancient Poets; oi tfpos- 
 
 "X?v1ss twv *roir,7wv, the must illustrious Poets. 
 
 I. The genitive in this case, the class to 
 
 which the preceding word belongs. EEpwJo* 'A&ipojb* de- 
 $t from among the Ati . oi irpos^ov?^ cuv 
 
 llent from an 
 
 • ntly followed by a genitive, 
 not of a (: bul of rocal Pronouns, 
 
 then denotes the ///£■' . /vr, 
 
 to which the ; an attain : as, Wi&x ii pitrla 
 
 . and wh the best 
 
 • le.it bears three bundr< - a j 1 o \j ruy^avji 
 
 ■7i<r 7 og wv, that lie may h< ■ t!,. :»le. 
 
 instead i < aitive, some other case 
 
 with a preposition is used ; a ^..Juv ?; xaXXiV?*), most 
 
 ,, the most powerful 
 in (ir; rsl amonj 
 
 4. InsU id of i thi partitive is 
 
 of fail friends he killed, some 
 
 ed. 
 
 partitives cfc and f!( are sometimes omitted ; as, 
 toi <r7oXr 4 v c£v xaXX v,) I bring you a very i 
 
 Xen. : »V,) 
 
 d to be one of those who d ; Thucyd. ; e7 
 
 B of my I 
 
 . ith the substantives 
 in the genitive. When the substantives are 
 of different genbV partitivi _ r ree 
 
 with the former, sometimes with tl 
 
 ouns in the geniti ilar are govern- 
 
 ed by part it i \ • 
 
 8. A ben they express, in 
 
 c superlat se, the quality of the subject, govern the 
 
 genitive plural ; as, ffoxog - the mosl excellent of all ; 
 
 Ala i divine of the ( es. 
 
 0. The Article is sometime- s partitive, and the 
 
 Relative with Sv, as an Indefinite : >wv ; 
 
 is whichsoever of the trih 
 
 10. ' 'Exarfeg each, when used as a partitive is sometimes 
 put in the plural : pie- 
 
 men! 
 
132 Government. 
 
 DATIVE. 
 
 VI. Adjectives may govern the dative, which have 
 the sign to or for after them in English. 
 
 This rule includes Adjectives of profit or disprofit, 
 likeness or unlikeness, trust, advantage, obedience, 
 clearness, propriety, facility, attachment, nearness, 
 equality, and their opposites ; (see Gen. Prin. page 122.) 
 as, i'xsXos Ait, like to Jove, i. e. Jove being the object to 
 which he is like ; oyeXipog *ry tfoXsi, profitable to the State, 
 i. e. the State bejng the object to which he is profitable ; 
 tgic: jevvcuoig to ai^og exfy^ v > t0 tne generous, baseness is 
 odious ; ^o^og rrj xp»cta, obnoxious to the judgment ; ffW 
 tfixpos reSv/jxsv, £xeiv(ng yXvxO$, avrCj 6s repirvog, he died, bitter 
 to me, sweet to them, welcome to himself. 
 
 Some adjectives of likeness govern the Genitive. 
 
 'O ax>16g, the same, governs the dative as adjectives of 
 likeness ; as, <rwv au7d>v spdi tfoi, 1 love the same things with 
 you. Luc. ; vojim^s rvjg OL\jlr,g sfaai ^/xia^ :'£ious rxg fvyxpizslov- 
 lag <rwg sgafjiaplavouo'*, consider those who conceal, equally 
 worthy of punishment with those who sin. Isoc. 
 
 VII. Compounds of tf&s wk. o^ ' ^ and verbals in cos 
 used passively, govern the dative ; as, ffvyyevr.g <r£ «jra7pi, 
 related to my father ; ofiooutfios <r^ 0sc5, of the same nature 
 with God ; iravla Svvalti ©Scj, all things are possible to God $ 
 ayvwtf7ov Toig ntoXKoTg, unknown to the vulgar 
 
 VIII. Verbals in tsov govern the case of the verb they 
 are derived from, with a dative of the doer ; as, Hs'ov £jm I 
 must go, i.e. there must be goir.g, as to oae : vs«% %rkulso\> 
 rxyepovlag, the young should imitate the old, i. e. there 
 should bean imitation of the old to the young. Simon.; ToTgfjJv 
 C'Trap^ouO'i vo|UU)i£ ^p^tflsov, xaiVi'g 6s shr. y/? t of'^'ov, we should use 
 the present laws, and not rashly enact new ones. Demosth. 
 
 1. Verbals in tsov express necessity, and answer to ge- 
 runds in the nominative case. The Verb Wli is generally 
 understood after them, but is sometimes introduced ; as, 
 7pa^sov fa7i. The Attics use them in the plural : as, j pazs- 
 Isa s t uo* izSialoXyv. I must write a letter. 
 
 2. The verbal is sometimes joined with a substant've, 
 like other adjectives ; as, ypazfisa. s^ol s-^^loXr^ 1 must write 
 a letter. 
 
 3. The verbal sometimes governs an accusative of the 
 doer, especially when its verb governs the dative : as 
 
Verb—Genit! 133 
 
 Ixksx/leov tovs vwv ^ovlas ro~$ xaxug qjpovou(fi, the prudent ought 
 not to obey the unwise. Isoc. ; faiKtottfltw rd pJv au7ov, <ra 
 tka, for aJly, ^jvouxi, some things are to be looked 
 to by him, some by his wife. 
 
 \. Substantives and verbals often govern the dative by 
 the force of the words from which they are derived j as, 
 roTg -ztxActftv 'axoXo. vre, youth follows pleasure. 
 
 5. Subs iHded with tfw and ojulo's govern the 
 
 dativ« lier. 
 
 C. I nany adjectives which govern either the 
 
 genit; a oj, of the 
 
 same na- her; ofxo/xTj7pio£, of the 
 
 same ripoffi educated together ; tf\ivr\bv\s familiar ; 
 
 • roc, ot'tl mon ; c) 
 
 -opo$, abundant ; : : 
 6\jvt%. \ious; 01V -- t i be sold ; 
 
 or Tu 
 ztaip. ; ri sra/p valpi, of the 
 
 < with Ins fath- 
 
 GO' 
 
 OEM IM 
 
 I. Tja» and j i, property 
 
 or dutj govern the genitw 
 
 To." i ap^ov7wv 
 
 a\ of rulers 
 tppy. 
 
 1 (j noun understood ; 
 
 as, p(p>},aa, sfpa^fjwx. (u 
 
 :ice or c« 
 tion fp ; u it. 'i 
 
 not belong to a skilful physician ; ix i<fllc t 
 
 of quality, often 
 
 XP^M Herodet. ; crjig 
 
 of learning. In 
 
 i, he has the colour of deal , < ^n. 
 
 
134 Government. 
 
 II. Verbs often govern the genitive by the force of 
 some noun implied in them ; 
 
 BatfiXsJgjv gdvwv, i e. (3atfi/Ju sivon sdvwv, to be king of the 
 Gentiles ; giriAvpsTv tivos, i. e. sVidujxtav <rm$ l^iv, to have a 
 desire for something ; gXarlw tie <rS sraipa, i. e. vo/jlj^w tfg gXa<r- 
 7w <rs sVafps, 1 think you inferior to your companion. 
 
 III. When the action of ^ y verb refers not to the 
 whole of a thing, but to a part, that part is often put in 
 the genitive ; 
 
 Kparefv Xuxov rwv wrwv, to take a wolf by the ears ; ixpa- 
 lr\tfs TT t g p(£ipo£ aJ7S ; he took his hand- 
 
 IV. A noun denoting the matter of which any thing 
 is made, is commonly put in the genitive ; 
 
 'Av5pjav7a sVo<Vav fxapjmapa. they made a statue of marble; 
 fi(5^ps tfStfoiTjfjLs'vov, made of iron. 
 
 The noun is sometimes put in the dative. 
 
 A large class of verbs take after them a genitive express 
 sing the origin or cause of the action denoted by the verb. 
 These will now be enumerated. 
 
 V. Verbs of sense govern the genitive, except those 
 ©f sight, which govern the accusative. 
 
 AiVdavojxou, to perceive ; dxsw, ctxpoaofxaj, a7w, xX-jw. to hear; 
 oatypalvo^ai. to smell ; ya-o/xai, to taste ; craflo/xai, sVj-^oi-jw, 
 di'yw, s^iy^avw, to touch ; s^»Xa|UL§dvo|txai, to take hold of, Lc. 
 
 A«V0dvs7ai <z% y%, he perceives the ground — the ground be- 
 ing the cause of his perception ; yxxtfa rk dvdp&tfa, I heard 
 the man — the man being the cause of hearing ; xkv&i fjisu 
 hear (from) me ; o£ei fxups, he smells of myrrh ; fiw? fxa &sfl* 4 
 touch me not — derive not from me the feeling of touch. 
 
 1. These verbs govern the accusative, among the Attics. 
 YTjXoupdw, to handle, has always an accusative. Verbs of 
 hearing sometimes govern the accusative of the thing heard, 
 and the genitive of the person or thing from which it is heard ; 
 as, yv *ixoj(faTS jllou. 
 
 2. Mavdivw, to learn ; tfuvfijfM, to perceive ; tfuvdavo,uai, to 
 inquire; /3<W7w, to tinge, s^w, to hold; and some others, often 
 govern the genitive, from a similarity in signification to the 
 verbs of sense. 
 
 VI. Verbs govern the genitive, which signify any 
 affection of the mind; as, desire, disgust, regard, neg- 
 lect, admiration, contempt, memory, forgetfulness, vfcc. 
 
 'ErfiAujxsw, opsyojxai, yXi^ojLLai, l<pisfi.ai, to desire ; spouj to 
 love, (if^eipw X»Xaiofxa» to desire, Poet.) ; f/iXsi, it is the carf 
 
Verb— Genitive. 135 
 
 •f; 9f>ov7I£w, ^ifA^Xojuwxi, xr;5ofAai, iv7pgVofi.ai to take care of; 
 •Xi/upsw, to undervalue ; aXsyw, to neglect ; xa<ra<ppovs'a>, 
 - paw, £ir£p<pfWw, to despise ; fAvr^ovsJu, fj^'fjLvt)fjLa», lo re- 
 Dif mber ; Xavdavofxai, otfjLvr;/j.ov?Jw, to forget, kc. 
 
 Kr/jslo Aavawv, she felt concern for the Greeks — the 
 Greeks being the source of her concern ; f,pa<70?) rr t g §au7S 
 yuvaixoc, he loved his wife ; ofauuv <ppov7j^fiv, to take care of 
 strangers ; (t^xe\s7g <rwv ^iXwv. you feel no concern for your 
 friends ; daujAa^w <rs, I admire you — you being the cause of 
 my admiration ; julti oXtyupel raifciag, despise not chasten- 
 ing ; i^ovrjtTf lie envied him on account of 
 the neighbourhood; <rov &s gXsi-rs au7s yuoy^vov eJgwvoio yuvai- 
 xog, she left him there, grieved on account of the well 
 girt woman. Mom. 
 
 1. ITode'cj and staisrodsw govern the accusative ; and some- 
 times ^GJidufis'w, yXi^offcai, fjLvrj^oveJw, ^niXavdavofAai • 
 
 to love, (except ipaw) admire, regard, 
 neglect, often govern an accu 
 
 VII. Verbs of taking, or giving part in a thing, gov- 
 ern the genim 
 
 This inclun if) ing to partake, to obtain, 
 
 to enjoy, to aim at, to communicate, to aid, to try or 
 attempt. 
 
 Tuy^avw, itfflvyxavu , f4£ipofMti, Xay^avw, XafJi?avw, ecrtXa/x- 
 Cavw, xup&j, to obtain ; xX>;povofx^w, to obtain an inheritance ; 
 xoivojvsoj, /jLf7aXa|m.€avw, fxe7^w, to partake ; fAe7ou5i<5wfAi, to 
 communicate ; 'ctsroXr/ mei, to enjoy, ice. 
 
 TifxTjg xa< xaxog £v =Xa^c, though wicked, he gained hon- 
 or — honor being that from which he partook ; eav Xa?wfxsv 
 tfX°^S' if we ma y ta ke of leisure — if we may get leisure ; 
 xaxlag gaov /xs7aXa€«rv, i t 'ape7r,£ jAe7a<$i6ouvaj, it is easier to par- 
 take from (of) pleasure, than to impart (from) virtue. 
 
 1. AafjL^avof/uxi, fAe7s^w, xXtjpovofxiw, Xay^avw, cuy^avw, some- 
 times govern the accusative ; xap-ffoofjLai always. 
 
 2. Verbs of communicating, aiding, partakings often gov- 
 ern the dati ve of the person. Koivwv& <r£ 'afcXqxL T/jg iraideiag, 
 I have a share in common with my brother, (of) the in- 
 struction. 
 
 VIII. Verbs of plenty or want, filling or depriving, 
 govern the genitive. 
 
 IlXrjdw, srXrjpow, yzp'^U) psdlou, sri'jAtfXrjfAi, y^w, -to fill j 
 
43$ Government. 
 
 akfop&j, v&pi<f<fsvu % to abound ; zsXxlsu, to be rich ; xV*? 6 ^ 
 to satiate ; utflspsc*;, u<f7£pi£w, to be inferior, to want ; 'eXar- 
 76ojxai, to be inferior ; (rteps'w, yvjuwow, 'a(paipso 4 aa», to de- 
 prive, &c. 
 
 Msveog (pplves -zafi^XavIo, his soul was full (as to) rage; 
 yilisi xaxuv, is full of evil ; rju<pop£v7o q% fySovSjs, they satiated 
 themselves (in respect to) with pleasure ; XP u(r * vrjTjtfatfSw 
 vSja, let him fill his ship (from) with gold ; 'e-asafi^avlo tsoIqio, 
 they crowned (from) with wine ; ev-aopiT or tfspifftfs'si xp^M*- 
 etfwv, he abounds as to riches ; '^jwtXsuv rj^potfiivrjs <ras 
 xapdiag t^awv, filling our hearts with gladness ; 's4rX£pe£v7o 
 Xap«x^, they were full of joy ; o-^ou <5iY7ai he wants (in respect 
 to) meat ; WotfpaXe/g qxpa<L/v, deprived (as to) mind ; 6 *roXsfjw>£ 
 aie&vluv a^aS'Jjv ck( tfoXHas 'air£<r7sp?j<J's, the war deprived the 
 citizens (as to) of all their goods ; 'aipaipcrcfSai nva *% 'apx^, 
 to cut any one off from his government. 
 
 Ae^fjbou, to entreaty which properly denotes, to want, gov- 
 erns the genitive ; as, bsopoLi <te, I entreat (from) you. 
 
 IIvsw, to breathe, as it denotes fulness, governs the gen- 
 itive ; as, tfvsT xaxiocs, to breathe hatred. 'Aipaipso/jiai some- 
 times governs the accusative for the genitive ; as, dtyoupsiaQcu 
 civa <r% 'apx>is, to deprive any one of his government : here 
 xa7a is understood. Sometimes the noun denoting the per- 
 son % is put in the dative ; as, d<pa.ips7<f§a.i <nvi <n$v apx^jv. 
 
 IX. Verbs which signify to rule, to excel, to be infe- 
 rior, to begin, and end, govern the genitive. 
 
 ' v Apx^ (SsoVo^w. Swotfreju^ fgoutfid^w, auSsvTt'cd, xa7axupi£JGj, 
 to rule ; npawsjw, /3acnXsjw. 'avatftfw, to reign ; r^t'ofjw**> 
 ^yyjjxovsjw, to lead ; 'sitiitfloLlsu, to preside ; tfgpiyivofjww, 
 to be over ; apxo^ai, to begin ; tfat'ofxaj, X>^w ? to cease, 
 &c. 
 
 KXsapx^v fxsv tS <Js|;is xs'pws ^ysr<T&ai, Ms'vwva &' <rot> 0£r7aXov 
 <ra 'suwvu,aou, Clearchus should lead (be the leader of) the 
 right wing, and Menon the Thessaiian, the left ; atoXXljv 
 ? s$vwv j*»a #oXi£ xpalsr, one city rules many nations ; xa7apxstf- 
 Sai tS Xtya, to begin (from • the discourse ; Xtys *ruv *6vwv, 
 cease from labor ; cwrs<7ra'<fav7G rS ,Sis, they departed from life ; 
 <7r*jrau,asvoi t^s op^%, who have ceased from anger. 
 
 1. Kpot7e'w. Tjpavvsjw, and Jwj7p(wrsJw, sometimes govern 
 the accusative ; apx w > /3a<ftXiw and avatftfu, the dative, 
 Tla^w, sometimes governs an accusative. 
 
 2. The genitive, after most verbs of ruling, is governed 
 by a noun implied in the verb ; /3atfiXs^w, i. e. ^atfiXs^ slm ; 
 avatfCw, i. e. avags/fxi ; ^gstfia^w, i. e. &$*<tlay ?x w ? ^ c 
 
Verb— Genitire. 137 
 
 X. Verbs of accusing, speaking falsely of, acquitting, 
 and generally those which pertain to judicial proceed- 
 ings, govern the genitive of th< i or thing, and 
 both of the person and thing. 
 
 Ka7^G| aai, ijxa ^o/xai,*po<fxaXiffxar 
 
 to a< .to acquit ; (Tuy- 
 
 to pardon ; xouayivuxrx&j, xa7aoixa^uj, xa7axpi'vw, xa7a- 
 
 ou, to condemn ; xaio Y . : Oofxai, of. 
 
 m $ ypjt^fux/ tfe^ov*, I accu- of murder j — 
 
 ^i or 
 curoX '<os,*I free you 
 
 fyxaXu tfx 4rpo<Wi m fO«. 
 
 I with xar <. take tin jxr.son in I 
 
 . and tin 
 xalriyopZai a* <f7aj, lition ; xa 
 
 tf* davala, or 6& 6 < ■ " . . I ' h. 
 
 V < rbs of accusing ar Native. 
 
 XI Verba govern the genitive, vrhich denote difl 
 
 Among the last m i prohibiting, 
 
 ng, spar Alc. 
 
 £cj. y hibit ; cur^ofxai, to 
 
 ; <pei6op.o. ofxai, a<roTuy- 
 
 xai, c7ai'u, tfi^aXXofMci; to de- 
 
 ca7po£, a good ruler 
 
 <p"i'a Oi <r7T7(T*v r,/AO£ 
 
 g xai 
 
 nterdicl 
 
 - pwtf£ 
 
 ctjv toXiv ^ofou, he delivered the i 
 
 I *a7- 
 vtfMfj if law of the countr\ I children, 
 
 govern the dai i, 6»a^spw <rw, 
 
 I differ from j 
 
 XII. Verbs of buying, 1 , <fca gov- 
 
 ern the genitive of the /m 
 
 o.aai, ayopa^w, *p:afuu. to bo] i#XW, *gjX/w, to 
 
 sell j 
 
 -v covwviru. ofyadct 6 (^coc. the Deity sells 
 
 in* 
 
138 Government. 
 
 us all things for toils ; wvvjCajuuyjv <rou?o *Vv7e (Jpa^wv, I bought 
 this for five drachmae ; 'agioiHcu, tJwrXSfc t^s. is esteemed 
 worth double ; (M>s tqiJ7o <$paxf*%, give this for a drachmas. 
 
 The price is put sometimes in the dative, with the pre- 
 position sVi expressed or understood ; i*i jakTScj jxsyaXw 
 'atfaXXct77w tfs <rwv foivwv, for a great reward I release you 
 from evil. Sometimes in the accusative, after tfpog ; as, 
 tfjtfparfxsi 6 xaxog tfav7a tfpo£ 'apyupiov, the wicked sells all 
 things for silver. 
 
 XIII. Incentives* govern genitives, when the includ- 
 ed verb governs the genitive. 
 
 Tsju, to cause to taste ; tfXa^w, to make to wander ; 
 fw/xv^tfxw, dva/xijAv^Cxw, uflro/wfAvrjcrxw, to cause one to remem- 
 ber. &c. 
 
 "Eysvcfas j/,5 evSaipoviag, you have made me taste happi- 
 ness. 
 
 XIV. Most of the active verbs govern an accusa- 
 tive of the immediate object, and the genitive of the 
 remote object ; 
 
 This rule includes especially those of accusing.condem- 
 ning, acquitting, warning, filling, emptying, delivering, 
 separating, disappointing, repelling, forbidding, restrain- 
 ing, changing, valuing, buying, selling, esteeming. 
 
 DATIVE. 
 
 XV. Ei>i, /ivojxai and Crfapxw taken for J^w, *° have, 
 govern the dative ; 
 
 'E(f7i /xoi xp^f* ^ I have possessions. 
 
 XVI. Verbs compounded with sv, W, *apa, flrpos, c^v, 
 utfo, dvli, ofxou, govern the dative ; 
 
 'Ef*fjLs'v&iv rofg xadstrtwtfi, to adhere to institutions ; s/mSdX- 
 Xeiv or ^rtflsrvai «v§ rag x s 'P a S> to ^ hands on any one ; 
 tfpotfcplpsiv sau7w Tag X s *P a £' to lay hands on himself ; tfapct- 
 ysvetfAcu r»j SxxX^tfia, to be present at the meeting. 
 
 XVII. Any verb may govern the dative, that has the 
 sign Jo or for after it in English ; 
 
 Ejxsiv xaxoi£, to yield to misfortune ; tfas o\\r\p a£7£> *ovs?, 
 every man labors for himself. 
 
 XVIII. Any verb may govern the dative of the re- 
 Verbs signifying to cause one to do any thing, are called h*m 
 
Verb — Dative. 139 
 
 mote object to which the action is directed or acquired, 
 th which it is d<> 
 This rule embraces rbs which govern the dative 
 
 in Latin, and many other- 
 
 1. To ordt 'it. admnmsh, reprove, reproach, 
 threaten, and opj> i contend and he angry with. 
 
 2. To trust, assent, yield to, help, or give, 
 injure, and tl 
 
 have int ith, approach, meet, follow, 
 
 pray to, adore, fawn nmodate 
 
 1 . II po r - B do 
 Xitftfof^cu, Xj7o. . iXicTdcTo, or 
 
 ©gov r Ood. 
 
 2. Man which have been enumera- 
 ted, under tin n the accusat, 
 
 Two dati?< - i o the rerb rifti ex- 
 
 «<1 or understood, h <\ community ; 
 
 ■ Tu, what have 1 to do with thee ! John ii. 4. ci 
 do with battles ! Anac. 
 
 illy fxo: and <fo», 
 mihi in 1 e than ( ■'. iple- 
 
 olu <Toi — 
 pt« ; do \ou think your brother will fight ! 
 ■ 
 
 \ I \ 'I'm d r -me nouns, 
 
 (leu joined to the third person offJj*i or yfwpgi, lor 
 the verb itself: 
 
 These are the participle '^vos, 'a^o/xevos, 
 
 U Col $£' 
 j8oJ>. will ; .1 . 
 
 i would it 
 
 [twilling; I<! - 7 ivg7ai av<5pa£ 'a^adou£ 
 
 iiatfutfai. good men ; Idem ; rxluv fxiv 
 
 xou ■ this you ma\ ace. 
 
 \\ Any active verb maj utheaccn and 
 
 dative, win i >n. it 
 
 »u or thing in relation to winch it is 
 
 ted ; 
 
 'T-rKf^vrofxai tfoi o=xa raXavla, I promise you ten talents. 
 The noun m the dative is sometimes put in the accusa- 
 
140 Government. 
 
 tive ; as, tfapsxaXstfo- ds tuvIol for t£7oj£, I exhorted you to 
 these things. 
 
 ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 XXI Verbs signifying actively, govern an accusa- 
 tive of the object ; as, yvSSi oWIov, know thyself. 
 
 1. Some verbs are active in Greek which are neuter in 
 Latin ; as, ojxvufAi, to swear ; 'cwro&ip txtfxw, to escape from ; 
 XaW)avw, to lie hid ; tfe'iGu, to persuade ; £/3pi£w, to insult ; 
 'a<Ww, to injure ; 'a^si/^ojuuai to remunerate, &c. 
 
 2. Some neuter verbs are followed by an accusative of 
 the object of immediate reference ; as, 6opvq>opeu Viva,) to 
 bear arms for some one ; pdixvw, to anticipate ; ^i7po*sJsiv, 
 to be a guardian to any one ; SxXsiVw, to fail ; 'a^ro/xa^ofxai^ 
 to fight off. 
 
 3. Some neuter verbs expressing an emotion or feeling 
 with regard to an object, are followed by it, in the accusa- 
 tive ; as, aifl^vof/iCti tov tfoXC'v^vov 0t6v. I blush before the 
 God distinguished in song, p ' * " L 
 
 4. Neuter verbs govern the accusative of a noun, whose 
 signification is similar to their own ; as, sroXefjiov sroXejA £eiv, 
 to make war. The Poets often use neuter verbs in an ac- 
 tive sense ; as, tfupi^wv <pW, hissing slaughter ; ai irriyai \i- 
 ©utfi yaXa xai jjls'Xj, the fountains flow with milk and honey. 
 
 5. The Attics delight in the accusative, and often use it 
 after verbs which govern the genitive or dative ; especially 
 after verbs of sense ; as, 'ax£w rau7a, 1 hear these things. 
 
 6. A clause or a sentence often expresses the object of 
 a transitive verb ; as, Jffi&ufjuoufjbsv 'axStfai t\ tfoV idl-v o /xuSos, 
 we wish to know what the fable is. Here ri zsoV gtf?/V 6 fjuu- 
 So$ is the object of the verb 'axatfai. 
 
 TWO ACCUSATIVES. 
 
 XXII. Verbs of asking and teaching, clothing and 
 concealing, speaking or doing well or ill, and some 
 others, govern two accusatives, the one of the person, 
 the other of the thing ; 
 
 Xp^ aflsiv tou£ 0s*£ 'ayaSa, we ought to ask good from the 
 Gods ; JEsch. ; egsdvifav au7ov r^v ■nfopcps.'pav, xou kviSvtfav aJ7ov 
 «rot ijxa7ia <ra <5»a, they took oft' from him the purple robe, 
 and put on his own garments ; Mark xv. 20 ; tjjv &uya7spa 
 
Accusative. 141 
 
 btfvrfe tov ^ava7ov r* 'av5po£, he (concealed from his daughter 
 the death of her husband ; L] tavpov av- 
 
 rio ill of \ris- 
 
 toph . .ou£, *oX/ '.o7acr. xa« 
 
 tht* Laceden ! done the city many, and 
 
 great injuries ; Demoath. 
 
 I.J . when the included 
 
 i have 
 
 «XO£ COV KwplOV, I 
 
 bind j ;in oath 4t\H? t«rt) xoXo^fi 
 
 in with cl >ph. 
 
 \e with | rue- 
 
 <\ and thus 
 es ; as, xalrryopC) (St 4*sC<)o£, 1 accuse 
 you oi >od. 
 
 an ace may 
 
 similar fica- 
 
 tion I -MTTog vixrfiac. ,v sv 
 
 ' m in 
 
 uatf 
 c '?arfax7a, ye load nun with burdei ult to be 
 
 borne. Luk< 
 
 PASSIVE VOICB. 
 
 Will Tl put in the lenitive, af- 
 
 of a passne signification, 
 
 with the j >r« •} >» i-it i« m-, - . -<. wa 
 
 hri c* as til ; *pig 8s2 xou 
 
 • norcd by God and man. 
 I - omitted ; as, q>iXwv 
 
 xwv7ai fiXoi, friem d by each other ; Soph. 
 
 r tlie Per the preposition is generally omit- 
 
 2. The noin t in the dative instead of the 
 
 fSai, to be governed by 
 ian : fwoiqlai M- 01 - H bw be< n done by me, 
 
 XXIV. When the verb in the active voice governs two 
 ii the passive n retains the latter ci - 
 
 Ka?7)}opr'oaai xXm%, I ■ n iCCUSed of i ( 'rtfa rh /3ac7j<T-, 
 f*a, 6 eyu /3atf7i£o|xaj, Bailtfdr, vat* can ye be baptized with the* n , 
 Jti 
 
 * B«tW£u>, is an inr' reining two accusatives, because the 
 
 inclu. B<nrrw govern* one. See rule JJ. 
 
14 1 Government. 
 
 baptism with which I am baptized ? Math. xx. 2£ ■; of #o7i- 
 £6fjusvo* <ro yaXa, who are fed with milk ; Kaiv wapd ts (5ia€oXs 
 rov(p^6vov xa/ cpovov J5i5a^^, Cain was taught envy and mur- 
 der by the devil ; Nazian ; 'sv<5s<5ujj^voi ^7wvi'o'xsg, clothed in 
 little tunics. 
 
 1. Sometimes the dative of the remote action is made 
 the nominative of the Passive ; and the accusative of the 
 immediate action is retained after the verb ; as, At)jxwvo£ 
 'etfidlsd'&ri t^v dpy(r}v^ for Ar)fxwvax7i 's^Kfls^Tj 77 'apX^i Demo- 
 nax was entrusted with the government ; Lucian ; <rrjv 6s 'sx 
 %sip£v aptfa^ojxai, she is snatched from my hands ; davct7ov 
 xcJaxpiSsis, condemned to death. 
 
 2. Passive verbs are often followed by the accusative, a 
 preposition being understood ; as, Jlpo^rjSsus tur' cU7S '•xsi- 
 p*7o 1-0 yjtfap, Prometheus was torn by an eagle as to his 
 liver ; Lucian. 
 
 3. Passive, like neuter verbs, take a noun in the accu- 
 sative, of a similar signification to their own ; as, 'exap^tfav 
 X a pM |xsyaX7)v, they were rejoiced with great joy. Matth. ii. 
 10 ; <x\riyaLs kxalov ry padliyi <rw7£<r0w, let him be beaten a 
 kundred stripes with the whip ; Plat. 
 
 IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 I. Impersonal verbs govern the dative ; 
 Miyuflov Zdogsv uvICj, it seemed to him a very great thing- 
 Xp>? more commonly governs the accusative. 
 
 II. Xp^, tfpsVei and 4*T, it behoveth, govern the accusa- 
 tive, with the infinitive ; 
 
 •%pri <rs7o iroieTv, this must be done. 
 
 III. Ae7, fAs7s<r7i, and some others, frequently govern 
 the dative of the person, and the genitive of the thing ; 
 
 As? tfoXXwv tfoi, you have need of much ; nsls<il\ <jlo* <rzlx, I 
 have a share of this ; twv Wxvwv rut <ra7pj fw'Xei, children are 
 the care of parents. The dative of the person is not al- 
 ways expressed. 
 
 The nominative is often used instead of the genitive of 
 the thing ; as, &ap£psi ri C01 <r$7o or rsfe, how does this con- 
 cern you ? 
 
 As7 sometimes takes an accusative of the person with a 
 genitive of the thing. 
 
Infinitive and Participles. 143 
 
 I ncral principles respt the Infinitive and Parti- 
 
 When a Verb in l^nt on a preceding Verb or Ad- 
 
 b or A<! er, 
 
 I l .id- 
 
 em >. 
 
 tjcu, but f« : or 
 
 II. ■ i s to 
 
 . €t 1 CC .011 ; 
 I 
 
 In in n the Leadin makes 
 corn 1 1 
 
 \\'th 
 
 yM.ru/ivo studj of literature 
 
 that 
 
 Iv in put in tl ' T<xro$ 
 
 <f r 6 vdvra urofAsTvai he was 
 
 i the 
 llj after 
 
 mean, lo think 
 
 : 
 of the lii 
 (to sat/ n or gj$. 
 
 ally ; as 
 \um ut omnia "/, I am here 
 
 to furnish all. 
 
 e is 
 . of con 1 object of 
 
 l That obj< <-t ma] f it ; 
 
 and then thai mc- 
 
 ''.pitfrog ax&vW^siv, 
 • to the • 
 
 >m- 
 <* with uf. i 
 
 hartor te ut 
 are all rendered 
 
 : but not / 
 
144 Government. 
 
 in Greek by the Infinitive, Stomal <fov i>6e~v; irapaivcj 4ti 
 ypacpsiv ; -7rapoj|uvcv sp£ fi,av0avgjv ; ixukvdev fxs ypaqjsiv (or /x^ 
 
 This rule embraces Verbs denoting " to say" and all 
 included in that idea; as, to assert, deny, mentron, announce, 
 shew, also to give, think, mean, hope, seem, and verbs of 
 motion, 't'hese are followed by the infinitive, though verbs 
 of the class first mentioned are sometimes followed 
 by the finite Verb with on or w$, as, Xs^outfi <rov i<ra- 
 ipov <rs0votvai, or Xs^outfi 0V1 (or Cjg) 6 §raFpo^ ri&\y\xe % they 
 say that our companion is dead. Sometimes the conjunc- 
 tion and a finite Verb are used in other cases ; and this is 
 always done after aVifxsXsr^ai, to take care.* 
 
 The Infinitive is likewise put after words which express 
 a quality, and shows the respect in which that quality ex- 
 ists ; as, dsivos 'stfri Tdyew, he is powerful in speaking ; *X\s 
 -/aXttvi Xa,Ssrv a city difficult to take. Here it corresponds to 
 the Gerund in do or the Supine in u of the Latin language. 
 
 2. The complete leading Verb may have some person or 
 thing as its object, complete in itself, but qualified by 
 some farther description ; and then the verb expressing 
 that qualification is put in the participle ; as 6pw rfs ypcxpovra 
 I see you writing. This use of the participle, which is 
 common to all languages, is extended in Greek much far- 
 ther than in Latin ; and embraces many cases where the 
 Subjunctive with ut, or the Infinitive would be used ; as, 
 aiV^avojAai <ts ^aXstfaivovra, sentio te iratum esse* I perceive 
 that you are angry. In this it accords with the English 
 idiom, but goes much farther ; k X>;|w x a 'p wv > I w iH not 
 cease from rejoicing, (or to rejoice) sojpwv rovg tfTpar'iwrag 
 dp£0of/*£vou£ they saw that the soldiers were angry ; yvure 
 avayxaibv te ov ujuwv &c, know that it is necessary for you 
 &c. If the subject of the participle, be the same with that 
 of the leading verb, it is put in the nominative ; as. 6pw 
 's^aapTavwv, video me errare, I perceive myself to err. 
 Otherwise it is in the case which the leading verb governs ; 
 
 * The distinction here made between the use of the finite verb with 
 conjunctions, and the Infinitive without them, according as thv sense 
 of the leading verb or Adjective is complete ox incomplete, must be 
 taken only as the prevailing usage ; from which a departure is ad- 
 missible in cases of necessity. Thus in English the regular and nat- 
 ural form would be, M I gave it to him to keep." But we may ?ay, * 4 1 
 gave it to him, ika! he ??i:gkf keep it.'' Still there must m 
 be a reason for the departure from common usage. In other cases, 
 either form is admissible The same is the case in Creek, cspe. 
 after Verbs which may, without inpropriety, be considered either as 
 complete or incomplete. Such as Xeyovai, and many others. 
 
Infinitive and ParticipU I 15 
 
 ^ojtoltwv I perceived 
 them to think them jicrpoxXsa 
 
 wpo£ c^v fufrfta ^aXs-raivovra perceiving Lamprocles to 
 be angry with hie mo th< ^6ictftvr. vrus 
 
 -ented to /tare had; in mi th< 
 ptfai 6»au. 
 repn 
 
 'I'li» t compli -elf, 
 
 but qatlil 
 the Infinit 
 bearing, end' 
 
 fM(i, and 
 ►wed 
 by tl lion. 
 
 THE [NFINl 
 
 I The iofinitiTe, frith or without an article, i- m 
 
 as a noun in ct or agent of 
 
 b i- ml. 
 
 ad, not 
 tol<* ac. 
 
 n. coXXaxȣ 6oxb7 ro ^uXot|oti c'a /i ^aXe- 
 
 more diilicult 
 than I .a phil 
 
 pher without 
 
 out of 
 
 Ace. «*^X&r$ nroXXois ^ap»<fa - lie gave sight to 
 
 many blind. 
 
 \t or 
 '. and tip 
 
 t'lnlip cal ^a»v£<rdcu, 
 
 •il. lit! panripfcu, and 'a/yaibg ^aiW- 
 
 £ai, ar ed by the preceding 
 
 ton. 
 
 re suppl'n lace of gerunds and su- 
 
 psvog 
 iv, minus peritaa equitandi ; siov [dciksh sip 
 
 noii voni missam paci 
 
 The infinitive nsteadofthe imper- 
 
 sonal participle ; as, appeared 
 
 to me ; Sen for it. /- t* 
 
 II One virl) governs another in the infinitive, (when 
 
 13 
 
146 Government. 
 
 the second denotes the object to which the action of the first 
 is directed ;) 
 
 *Hpga7o hsysri, he began to say. 
 
 Many adjectives, especially those which denote fitness, 
 trill or power* govern the infinitive ; as, apidlos 'axov7/£eiv, 
 excellent in darting. 'Ogug opav, sharp sighted. 
 
 III. The infinitive mood has the accusative before 
 it, (mhen its subject or agent is different from that of the 
 
 preceding verb /) 
 
 Ti /3po7ou£ <ppovsiv \iyxtfi ; why do they say that mortals 
 are wise? 
 
 Sometimes the noun before the infinitive is governed by 
 a preceding verb. 
 
 IV. When the subject or agent of the infinitive is the 
 same with that of the preceding verb, it is put in the 
 same case ; 
 
 4>*)<r?v ou7g£ 'ajAslvGJV yeycVYjtfGai dlpalriyog 'sfxs, he says 
 he was a better general than I ; xai oux 'sv^wtfofxsv crpo- 
 ycufiv ou<5svi xaxw ysvsvdai, and we will not give to any one a 
 pretence of being bad. 
 
 1. When the subject of the infinitive is the subject also 
 ©f the preceding finite verb, then it is omitted in the infini- 
 tive, except when an emphasis is laid upon it ; as, Ipj s/vai 
 frpanoyo's, he said he was general ; but s$rj ajros sTvat tfrpa- 
 srjyos, 'hx sxsjvoi, he said that he and not they, kc. 
 
 2. If all things in the sentence refer to the same person, 
 ug or wtfls, or a preposition may be joined, even with a nom- 
 inative, to the infinitive ; as, oi JJs'ptfai svofxiCav, si #apaxa\£- 
 jjlsvgi, u<fls tol ojjuoia <oiouv7££ tojv 0u7ojv r\>yx<xven the Persians 
 supposed that, if called, they should obtain the same re- 
 ward, doing the same things ; 8ux <ro fx^ tfovpoj' sivoi, because 
 they are not wise ; tfpos to dyadol qjaivsotfai, to appear good. 
 
 3. A few instances may be found in which the accusative 
 precedes the infinitive, though both verbs refer to the 
 same person ; as, \iyt\ §au7ov srspov ysyovs'vai, he said that he 
 was become another. 
 
 V. The infinitive is often used for the impera- 
 tive ; 
 
 Xaipeiv fxs7d ^aip6v7cov, xKaisiv ^sla xXaio'v7wv, rejoice wit/j 
 them that do rejoice, and weep with those that weep; 
 §s tfw£siv fxsv rxg Mstftfijv/^, cfjj^eiv ds xoti tfsau7ov, save the 
 Messenians and yourself. 
 
Participles. 147 
 
 VI The infinitive, is often put for other moods, with 
 
 pJjQM or fjLS^pis, and o/o£ 
 
 wco^, when the man saw ; 
 fou before the cock Cl tltfi oigi pi) 
 
 u.g7a?<xXXcr.. the Gods are such as cannot chanjj 
 
 PARTICIPLES 
 
 I Participle! govern th of their own verl 
 
 ToJ: .£ ToiaTJa rfiza. cat Jfutv7f?, instructing the young- 
 
 er m« Ij manni i 
 
 II Partici] e often used as noun- 
 
 Oi j :i Xcjxparrjv, the I of Socrates ; o ep^o- 
 
 irho corn* 
 
 There ii thil dif ween tlie participle and the 
 
 ending noon. I \presses the person 
 
 latter does not. 'O So\j\og is a 
 
 ink or condition of a slave : 6 5ouXsJwv is one, 
 
 at tli- red to, fulfilling the office of a slave. 
 
 III. Participle! <i for the infinitive, after 
 
 verbs. 
 
 Th ^ense, and those denoting any act or 
 
 f the mind, also f bearing, o? erlooking, 
 
 : as, oj rajtfoiLcu ypo^wv, 1 will not 
 
 - >;, 1 remember to have done 
 
 . he appears to have done it ; oux 
 
 %iSa lyuryt xa'AX'c I know not that 1 have seen a 
 
 ■-..) TtToir,x'lg I will show myself to 
 
 have done it member that you are 
 
 am r : \.rc*jvi«, the people 
 
 perceived th ii tfe fxer' oX/yov 5a- 
 
 ru\. I m iter a lit! . weeping. 
 
 1. The partici] irith its noun; but after a 
 reciprocal Pronoun may tbei with that pronoun, or 
 with the nominative of the verb : i>a ^jlccutw afjLapra- 
 vwv or afiapravovTi. ! am <■■ j wrong. 
 
 2. Ad |- denoting charm** are followed by parti- 
 ciples ; as ■/ plainly a sycophant j 
 
 - clearly about to say. 
 
148 Government. 
 
 3. A participle, with the verbs s/juu, Ccrap^w, yivojxai, Ij£Wj Jjxw, 
 is often put for its own verb ; as, itpo^sQr,x61sg %(fa.v, for tfposSs^- 
 xsiGav ; dtfsxloixug icfliTov avfywtfov, he has killed the man, for 
 ewrsYIaxs ; s^'S rapagas for £7apagas, you have disturbed. 
 
 4. When the participle is joined with Xavdavw, <p0avw, ruy- 
 p(avw, .fya7eXsw, &ayfyvofxai and &<xyw in any tense, it is 
 rendered by that tense, and the verb by an adverb ; as, 
 §\aQs fiotfxuv, he secretly fed ; s'Xadov Tivzg gswVavleg Tovg dy- 
 yg'Xs^, entertained angels unawares ; ol slvyxpivov ovfes, who 
 were there by chance ; ilvyyavo^sv xepitfarkvleg, w r e hap- 
 pened to be walking. 
 
 5. In some instances, the participle has a real and per- 
 tinent signification, though apparently redundant ; as, <pavs- 
 pog ? t v xal SypcTixbg xaT (piXavdpaj'aros «v, he being sympathetic 
 and humane, was manifest — being really humane, he, in 
 consequence, so manifested himself; dyatfrficg au7ov fyw, 
 having loved him, I so have him — having loved him, I still 
 hold him dear. 
 
 6. Participles are often used for the sake of emphasis ; 
 as, Mwv Wov, seeing I have seen. 
 
 7. Participles have sometimes the adverb fWagu before 
 them in whatever case the construction requires, and thus 
 used have the sense of the Latin gerund in dum ; as (x#ragu 
 op'Jotfuv, in the midst of digging. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OP CIRCUMSTANCES. 
 
 I. A noun expressing some quality or circumstance 
 is put in the genitive ; 
 
 'AvSpiag dddsxa tf^swv, a statue of twelve Cubits. 
 
 II The cause, origin and part affected, are put in the 
 genitive; 
 
 Maxapios <rr.g rt^r,s, happy from his fortune ; or fortunate ; 
 yiksT aurov T^g dpSTTJs, he loves him for his virtue ; Xuxov xpa- 
 tsIv cjTwv, to take a wolf by the ears. 
 
 The cause, source, origin, and part affected, are very 
 frequently put in the accusative by synecdoche, xa7a, 8ia, 
 &c. being understood. 
 
 III. The manner, instrument, means, and end, are 
 put in the dative ; 
 
 KpaTsT jxqxavaig, he conquers by stratagems ; dpyvpatg 
 Xoy^aitfi f^a^s. xai tfavTa xparrtfs^, fight with silver weapons, 
 and you will conquer all things ; tfapafxudyjTixov 6 yiXog xa/ tt, 
 S-4/61 xa< «rw Xo^co, a friend gives consolation by his looks and 
 words. Ariat. 
 
Participles. 149 
 
 The manner, instrument, means and end, are often put 
 
 in the accusative by synecdoche ; as, xaryp tfoi <njv rjXixiav, 
 
 /xa> av, a father to you in respect of years, more 
 
 s<» i. r of kindness ; Ileliod. ; §iav 5pa<r>£ jati&'v, you 
 
 uld do nothing with violence. 
 
 IV. Noun* which denote that with regard to which 
 am thil roe, are commonly put in the genitive; 
 
 favourable in mind. 
 
 Y The price of a thing is to be put in the genitive , 
 an<! - in the datii 
 
 opa^/julv. I bought it for five drachmae^ 
 XpjGiur- Jit the victory with gold. 
 
 xou has ti r it in the accusative governed by 
 
 some verb 
 
 In pun the thing received 
 
 it from a rd (change is made, and 
 
 it in the r^fo XP^' ia 
 
 X a ^ mged golden RMf brazen arms — his receiv- 
 
 the ground of giving away the 
 I, it expreaaco the means 
 
 >ld. 
 
 \ I The | put in the dative with- 
 
 out a preposition 
 
 rathon. 
 though rarely, it is put in the genitive ; as. 
 Hf for h I 
 
 VII Measure put in the dative ; 
 
 \ III The m one place to another is put 
 
 ui the accuaatn 
 
 rpiohf fasfi ifl distant three 
 
 .')c«;p, the 
 
 walei rbove the mountains. Some- 
 
 i rarely, in the d r miXsug Tpi^o- 
 
 Xi$ 6.. >p<, Tripoli is distant from 
 
 Pentapolii urney for an active man. 
 
 IX Part of time is put in tlie genitive, Jixcd time in 
 the dative, time how long, in the accusativ 
 
 ^IfjLi'pas xa. "1 night ; '"J-ipa \iavl, on one 
 
 day : . the anger of tin 
 
 who love prevails but a short time. 
 
 13* 
 
150 Government. 
 
 The time when is put in the accusative when duration is 
 expressed ; as, ^v StScufxuv rag qpspag. rag Ss vtxlag r,uX(£s7o slg 
 <ro opog, he taught by day, and by night tarried in the moun- 
 tain ; Luke xxi. 37. Here some preposition, as Sia, is un- 
 derstood. The time how long is put in the genitive when 
 it denotes " & portion of time since ;" as, tfoXX* ailig Zy£ 
 £wpaxa xp& vx > I have not seen them for a long time ; in the 
 dative, when it reaches to a fixed time; as, k toXKaig r^spcug 
 vtf7spov, not many days after. 
 
 CASE OF THE SYNECDOCHE. 
 
 X. Substantives are very often put in the accusative 
 by synecdoche, xara, 5ia, &c. being understood ; 
 
 Jlalrjg tfoi rr\v yjXixfav, fxaXXov Se svvoiav, a father to you in 
 respect of years, more so in respect of kindness ; (f'jtaSaTog 
 rev rpotfov, of ingenuous disposition. 
 
 Nouns signifying the form, manner, distinction, object, 
 measure, number, or part affected, after substantives and 
 adjectives ; and those denoting the cause, instrument, or 
 manner, after adjectives and verbs ; are commonly put in 
 the accusative by synecdoche. 
 
 CASE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 XI. A substantive and participle are put in the geni 
 live, when their case depends on no other word ; 
 
 ©si SiSovlog, zdsv iV^usi cpMvog, when God gives, envy avails 
 nothing. 
 
 1. The genitive is not, in such cases, really absolute or 
 independent ; it expresses the origin of some circumstance 
 mentioned in the preceding or subsequent clause ; as, 0s- 
 hyvv^g i<fli xal tfw£g7ai, ©e£v 0sX6v7wv, Theagnes exists and i* 
 preserved^/rom the Gods willing it. 
 
 2. The participles of sijxi and y'lvopai, and some others, 
 are often omitted ; as, I|s<r7j yuvsTv, ug s/xS fxo'vrjs, (sc. scr^s) I 
 may speak when alone. The genitive, especially of pro- 
 nouns, is sometimes omitted ; as, xXTjpsjxsvwv, (sc. aj]7£v,) 
 they choosing by lot. 
 
 3. The infinitive, or part of a sentence, seems sometimes 
 to supply the place of the noun ; as, tfup *vsh rig raipsg. jau^o- 
 Xoyrjsvlog, that bulls breathe fire, being circulated as a 
 story. 
 
 4. The accusative and sometimes the nominative, are 
 
Case of the Comparative. 1 o 1 
 
 used absolutely ; as, xcti raGla ra revcasva si*ps«ug, s<f]r\<Sa.\) 
 :?s7g xcu A:- "f.i, and these things being properly per- 
 formed, the Priests and Levites stood ; dvo»2;av7ss r* ffw/xalos 
 •jro'pss, *a> n thej have opened the pores 
 
 gf the body, tliei 
 
 The dative is Utt d when There ia reference to fixed time ; 
 
 as, sfl rC: hua/llij the year having come round, c\:c. 
 
 so likewise of an instrument or means. These instances 
 
 from thi ds : thus, dvoigavlsg ri 
 
 . ugdvoll i, when they have opened, 
 
 e) 
 
 participles are ofl .1 instead of the case 
 
 zspov y there being 
 a difference, 
 
 n of another's conduct is given, it is 
 genitive or accusative 
 ita, £>£ * avl as si S 61 as, or favlwv e /- 
 • #7wv, I supposing all acquainted with it. 
 
 atFAC vrivE. 
 
 Ml T \erns the genitive, 
 
 when the CODJU1 <1 ; 
 
 M • ' \ than honey; *a7po$ a/xsivajv, bet- 
 
 it -r than his father ; xps'tftfwv oix7ipf/.wv 9^vo£, hatred is better 
 than pit] 
 
 1. The noun in the genitive, denotes that in respect to 
 which the augmentaf munition takes place ; as, Xeu- 
 
 whiter t l ■ — i.e. from comparing them 
 
 wit they appear whitl 
 
 over another is put in the da- 
 tive ; : bj a finger. See rule 7. 
 r part of a sentence, is sometimes gov- 
 d by the comparative ; as, -xoKkung 6oxs7 to qrjXagai r* 
 riilspw eivai, to preserve good seems 
 often more difficult than to gain it. 
 
 4. MuUipli umbers, like comparatives, govern the 
 
 iov for ctxkiv <rS Xs'yfiv, one should hear 
 e as much as lie speaks. 
 
152 Government. 
 
 ADVERBS, 
 
 I. Adverbs are often used as substantives or adjec- 
 tives ; 
 
 'Atfo to7s, from that time ; cwr' ap7i, from this time ; sue 
 ccp7i. till now ; to tfs'pav q% daXao'a'rjs, the farther part of the 
 sea ; 6 sgw ccvdpwtfos, the outward man. 
 
 II. Derivative adverbs govern the case of their prim- 
 itives ; 
 
 'Ag/ws tx Xo/s, agreeable to reason ; to 4u\lol ojuioj'ws to~£ 
 gapivofc livGetfi fxapaivs7ai, the body, like vernal flowers, de- 
 cays ; dp50'xov7w^ fjLoi, pleasing to me ; because dpeCxw governs 
 the dative ; ala&eTticx. tw texvw tfXyjtfiov, standing near the child; 
 because i(\ r t\<fio$ governs the dative ; rfs'pig to tsj^os, around 
 the wall ; because tfspi governs the accusative ; tfdpsx vSja, 
 without the ship ; because tfapd governs the accusative ; 
 iyyvg tw Ts/^st, near the wall. 
 
 'Eyyvg, ^X^tfjovj.^pig and -ztfapsx, govern the genitive like- 
 wise. 
 
 III. Adverbs having the force of prepositions gov- 
 ern the same cases ; 
 
 'Of**, ctjxa, together, (tfuv, with,) svsxa, on account of, (<5«x,) 
 &c. 
 
 IV. Adverbs of place, time, order, quantity, conceal- 
 ment, separation, number, exception, exclamation, and 
 some others, with adverbial nouns, have a genitive af- 
 ter them. 
 
 "Avsu, <x7sp, <Si'x a > X^P'S? without ; clv7ixpu 'av7ixp^, 'aflrav7ixpj, 
 against, opposite ; axP*'* /j/s'^pi,* to, even to ; £v£xa, evsxsv, 
 on account of ; iyyvg, <ir\y)<fiov, ayyi, dotfov. near ; sx7o'$, ££u, 
 sxlo&Qsv, without ; sv7o£, stfw, si'tfw, iv7otf^v, within ; *X>jv, ca- 
 psx7o$, except, but ; fAs7a|u, ?mong ; oVktw, oVitfdcv, behind ; 
 tfpocrttev, before ; tfs'pav, ssrs'xeiva, beyond, &c. 
 
 "A^pi <rris tfrjfxs^ov ^spas, to this day ; svsxa ts /3sX7j<r7s, for 
 the best ; ^ojas'vws t£7wv, after those things ; Xddpot staTp .^, 
 without his father's knowledge ; dvsu xafxafe, without labour; 
 toi£7wv <x6V, abundance of such ; owraf t># ?-ffcspas, once a day; 
 X^piS twv s/pvjfxsvwv, beside what has been said ; go tS 'aOixv;- 
 f*a7os, Oh, the injustice ! w,aoi twv x77)jULa7wv, alas ! my posses- 
 sions ! tv^ ti/^s, for w t^t^&, what an incident ! rlvo^x*" 
 
 *A#$kj, fttxWi before a rowel. 
 
Adverbs. 
 
 for whose sake ; <5ixr,v sro7af*£v, like river* rtov *i 
 
 I 
 
 The adverbs enumerated above, and many others, bare 
 much the nature of prep 
 
 etimes omitted ; as, 
 
 fcypa^a r* (J.7) rivets ^7>j<rai a . | I have written 
 
 for tl. bouldba] enquire. Thucyd, 
 
 \ \.i . arc followed 1>\ the tla- 
 
 pa, at day break ; together 
 
 with I 
 
 \ I Idverbs ol ing are followed by the accu- 
 
 Pluto ; fjta ro Si <r>. 
 I 
 
 \ 1 1 Advei towing u * » \ « • r n the nominative ; 
 
 • hold thy son ; Hi o avtyw*o£, behold the 
 
 VIII Two or more Degati' 'hen the nei 
 
 Lion if they 1>< loot t<» I 
 
 o im aiM eat of it any 
 more It n rw *<$£<$ xsi^svo^, in which 
 
 no one had e?ei been placed. Luke axiii. 
 
 i. 1 eral advn ' different things. Thus, 
 
 in the second in.-tance, ix denies of the fact ; ifo'ww, of 
 tune ; Mf%, of pel 
 
 2. When the negative- belong to different each 
 
 qualif I they generally affirm Jfoa- 
 
 iuu M , I cannot avoid remembering him. 
 
 • ph. 
 
 j ^ are offen placed, not before the verb which 
 llify, but before some other one in the sentence ; 
 as, ax . -aid he would not depart. 
 
 aious < asss after adverbs or pla< i 
 
 MTIVE OR DATIVE. 
 
154 Government. 
 
 Oftener a Genitive. 
 
 &¥X l > ftTX^ 1 ' ^*oJwv, flrXetfiov, itftofo4&&. 
 
 Oftener a Dative. 
 ctvotataXiv, gfjLTjj'aXiv. 
 
 GENITIVE OR ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 s'/Vw, f/i<f<pa, $rap?x or *raps§, *£ pig. 
 
 DATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 <5supo. 
 
 GENITIVE, DATIVE, OR ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 MOODS. 
 
 1. Adverbs of likeness, manner and interrogation, have 
 commonly an indicative ; of doubting, an indicative or op- 
 tative ; of exhorting or encouraging, an imperative, and 
 sometimes a subjunctive or indicative. Other adverbs have 
 various moods. 
 
 2. A'/, aMs, sU sTfa % us, joined to the imperfect wqtfiXev or 
 JcpsiXov, or the second aorist w<psXov or cpsXov, are placed be- 
 fore an infinitive, in the sense of the optative ; as, sid' o<ps- 
 Xov uyctpos ri juusvsiv, ayovog rs yevsoflai, I wish I had remained 
 unmarried, or had been childless. 
 
 3. v fi<psXov or o<psXov, without the preceding particle, is 
 placed before other moods ; as, ocpsXov ^XP^ 5 ^> I would 
 thou wert cold. 
 
 4. E/Ss precedes an optative in the present and future 
 tenses ; an indicative in the perfect, and sometimes an in- 
 finitive ; as, eT$s /pa^oifu, I wish 1 wrote; si§: ysypaya, I wish 
 1 had written ; el§s <$i py ^v^Tota ysv&frtti tr^a. coSsivov, I 
 wish thou wert not a desirable evil to mankind. 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 Conjunctions couple together the same cases, moods 
 and tenses ; 
 
Particles. 
 
 155 
 
 ''Hpgaro o 'Ii)<fS^ x»jp„V(ffiv xcu Xi^eiv, Jesus began to preach 
 and to say. 
 
 MOO 
 
 The following conjunctions govern an 
 Indicative and 
 Subjanct 
 
 > when. 
 
 Indicative and 
 Optative 
 
 ti-6, that. 
 
 
 when. 
 
 
 xv, after. 
 
 Indicative and 
 
 Infinitive.* 
 fVs'i, ) after, 
 &, $ since. 
 
 Indicative, Optative, and 
 
 iav, ^ a, ^ 
 
 xav, although. oja^, ) 
 
 that. 
 
 •Vav, when. 
 
 M\s, that. 
 
 Indicat. < )f)t. 
 Sub. and lntin. 
 
 hat. 
 until. 
 
 •NDINi; PARTICLES. 
 
 160 : 
 as ; 
 
 M • 
 
 u ., both ; 
 'Ofufwf, lit 
 
 a here ; 
 
 ■ 
 
 O.c 
 
 Hol( . so ; 
 
 crjvixctCra. then. 
 SO. 
 bat, 
 
 !l(l. 
 
 wtfstfep, as. 
 there. 
 
 . there 
 ug. | 
 
 as. 
 >?, ti. 
 ^jpiv, that. 
 
 •rav, «vb< 
 
 ., when. 
 
 f, thu?. 
 
 so. 
 xcu. 
 w<raJ7(j^, thus.* 
 
 I conjunction or adv »cfore an infinitive, there 
 
 the con ttcd : a», 
 
1 56 Government. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 I. "Atfo, av7i, ix (sg) and *po, govern the genitive only. 
 'Ev and tf^v, the dative. 
 
 Efe (&) the accusative. 
 Aia, the genitive and accusative. 
 
 'Ajuupi', ocva, Iflfi', xa<ra, juusla, «rsp/, tfapa, tfpoV, (Att. w£.) 
 Stfsp, uflfo, govern the genitive, dative, or accusative. 
 
 II. Prepositions in composition often govern the 
 same case, as when they stand by themselves ; 
 
 'EgSjXds Tr t g olxiag, he went out from the house. 
 
 The principal relations of things to each other are ex- 
 pressed in Greek by three cases; origin and possession, by 
 the genitive ; acquisition and communication, by the dative; 
 and action, by the accusative. But the^e cases being alto- 
 gether insufficient to express all the varieties of these rela- 
 tions, prepositions are used to denote many relations of 
 place, time, cause and effect ; motion and rest ; connexion 
 and opposition. Every preposition has one primary mean- 
 ing, to which all the other significations, arising from figura- 
 tive or analogical relations, may be referred. The meaning 
 of the prepositions is generally adapted to the use of the 
 case. The primary signification of Wo, is under. The 
 genitive, when joined with it, expresses influence or origin ; 
 as, too xau(xa7o£, under the influence of heat : the daiive ex- 
 presses the instrument or manner ; as, x £ P^ v ^<P' $jULs7s'pijtfiv 
 aXStfa, taken under, by our hands ; the accusative, motion ; 
 as, feo "IXiov ^XSs, he came under the walls of Troy. 
 
 The primary sense of the several prepositions will be 
 first given ; and under each, the more distant and figura- 
 tive significations will be ranged in perpendicular columns. 
 
 I. Four Prepositions govern the genitive, dv7/, awo, ix, srpo. 
 
 'ANTI' 
 
 Denotes originally, facing, fronting, set over against, an- 
 swering to. Hence its common signification is against, in- 
 stead of. 
 
 For. '0<p(?aX/xov avri o^aXjuiou, an eye for an eye. 
 
 Before. *Av7i ypypaluv §Xs0$aj t^v (Sogav p(p>j, we ought to 
 
 choose glory before (instead of) wealth. 
 Against. 'Av7; dvdfog Hw, go against the man. 
 
Prepositions. 157 
 
 By a slight change of signification, av'/i some- 
 times denotes in addition to s or upon. 
 Upon. 'Avis corresponding to, in ad- 
 
 dition to) upon sorro 
 
 'AIIO 
 
 Denotes from, and expresses separation or distance from, 
 begi,, use or w 
 
 pressed by *h«' word of irbicl or 'a-nfo. 
 
 j. 'n. bed from Strdis. 
 
 \ \ - . about (i. 8. from] the third hour. 
 
 Aft* ^Jvou, from (the tune of) supper, i. e. after 
 
 ropj 
 
 Agai: de fr<»iii ;'i. <•. nion. 
 
 For. ! they du 
 
 from Gw 
 
 \Ai rt ''..,1 ip i;d from (of; til 
 
 Of. Oi 'aTo «->j£ -as of the council, coun- 
 sellors. 
 
 Of. i longing to) 
 
 philosophy, i. <*. philosophei 
 
 With. 'H Ji'^ou^ fj^x^ri, th»- battle (commencing) 
 
 fron irord in hand. 
 
 Without. 'H W 'a.opog Ida., - 'it (scpai. 
 
 from) a husband. 
 
 T.K.or 'ES 
 Denotes Ml o/. It i /ro7rt one. 
 
 to anotlier ; and hk< M or 
 
 materials of any thu 
 
 Out of. *E| i(fa «-o* ulov fxs, out of Egypt 1 
 
 called my son. 
 >m. | out of (from) peace to make 
 
 Of. I top 'made out) of ?old. 
 
 From. m) the man. 
 
 By. 'O ' just shell livi 
 
 faith, (as the cause < 
 rr. ; , time of supper.) 
 
 With. nth all care. 
 
 npo 
 
 Denotes priority either in place, time, or estimation. 
 
 H 
 
158 
 
 Government 
 
 Before 
 
 For. 
 
 Place, npo Supwv, before the door. 
 Time. TIpo <rov flroXs/xou, before the war. 
 Preference. IToXsjulov -cnrpo slprjvris, war in prefer- 
 ence to (before) peace. 
 We generally stand before what we de- 
 fend; hence 
 In defence of. Mays&ai zspo rwv zsaiSuv xui 
 •afpo yuvaixwv, to fight (before, in defence 
 of) for wives and children. 
 Instead of. npo ztoaSos Savsn/, to die for his child. 
 II. Two prepositions govern the dative only, iv and o^v. 
 
 'EN 
 
 Denotes in, contained within, either in time ox place. 
 In. 'Ev Xijxgvi rarXffvj to sail in harbour. 
 
 Within. ? Ev k</la ^fxspais 'asuSvvjCxstfjv, they die within seven 
 
 days. 
 After. 'Ev stfoXXw xpovw, (within) after a long time. 
 Against. 'Ev ipol SpoufCg. bold (in case of) against me. 
 Among. "Ovos 'ev peXklais, the ass among (within) the 
 bees. 
 'Ev MavTivsia ^rJi^svos, conquered (in) at Manti- 
 
 nea. 
 'Ev paprvrft <rwv 'EXX^vwv tXs'ov vj <rpi<fjxupi'oi£, before 
 (in the midst of) more than three thousand wit- 
 nesses of the Greeks. 
 
 Sometimes it denotes within one's power, or 
 
 sphere of operation ; as, r;yslo ev rveufi«7i, was 
 
 led in the operation of the Spirit ; by the 
 
 Spirit. 
 
 'Ev r slots ro7s vojxoSsVais ^n &Sj<fSs vo/xov jjLyjfc'va make 
 
 no law by (the operation of) these lawgivers. 
 
 'Ev coifc (JJo otoXoa/ £$tewp*v fiv, s; jmry rSc sypaq>i), they 
 
 might have seen for the price of two oboli, had 
 
 not this been decreed. 
 
 "EX&sTv 'ev e EXXa5i, to come into (within) Greece. 
 
 Ka/'gv "gXsoiifiv IStojxf, and he put (the roasted pieces) 
 
 (within) upon the tables. 
 'Ev xg&rws xui axovriots, (in the way of) with 
 shields and darts. 
 
 At. 
 
 Before. 
 
 By. 
 
 For. 
 
 Into. 
 Upon. 
 
 With. 
 
 With. 
 
 2TN 
 
 Denotes with, junction with. 
 •EgfjXSa 'Ir,<j% <ruv roTs {xa^rfiaTs y Jesus went out 
 with his disciples. 
 
Prepositions. 1 59 
 
 At. pper, 
 
 together with) tx all these 
 
 thii 
 With. 1.. 0«S -..■•-,. with God [with the aid of God) 
 
 I will attempt it. 
 During. at the I with, during the 
 
 drink:!, 
 riope-ffofiai $ ;, 1 will go in junction with 
 
 III. One preposition got ive. 
 
 [>< Dot< ud motion, trmh nc>/ Of direction at, or 
 
 At. loor. 
 
 Intu. at of the pan into the 
 
 About. 
 
 Agai: i ufjuxpra. 1 against (the of- 
 
 mL 
 Among. Eig r*f r^pdagxa' oned (at tlie 
 
 place of) an. 
 «. C'\ anso 
 
 Jr I of bfa beauty — the prais* g directed to 
 
 ( his * 
 
 (1 (at) for a very 
 
 In. a xadi£ofJ4u ; 1 sit (at the place of) in 
 
 the assembly. 
 < >f. \ ,-" k of Chi 
 
 ;'op€op*, the sow that was 
 
 washed, to lier wallowing in the* mire. 
 Toward tod will toward n* 
 
 Until. they feast (till they ar- 
 
 at; until sui:- 
 
 IV. One pri .-position governs the genitive or accu- 
 iath 
 
 6IA, Through, 
 Denotes the medium, instrument , or agetU; the matt 
 als of which any thm de : the distance measured hy 
 
 any thing in motion, and governs the genitive* 
 
? 60 Government. 
 
 ''Ezspstte xoli Siol tfavrwv, he excelled (through- 
 out) among them all. 
 Among, i Eur' av crp&rot cpvyrig r'Xoas <Jia nxirpas, as soon as 
 thou hast passed secure (through the place 
 of) among the tremendous rocks. 
 Into. Aiot paxns te'vai, to go (through) into the battle. 
 
 Of. Bpw|xa7a &a yaXax7og xa/ jxsXi7osyiv6|xsva, food made 
 
 of milk and honey. 
 Through. Aid nrvsu^alog, through the Spirit. 
 To. KarsSvffs &d Tpj7r65wv, he descended (among) to 
 
 the tripods. 
 Until. Aia <riXa$, until the end. 
 With. Ou SsXw Siol juugXavo^ xai xaXapus <foi ypa^ai, I will 
 
 not write with pen and ink unto thee. 
 At. Kwjjiai Sia. rfoXX2 ; (supp. x^P*) villages at a great 
 
 distance. 
 After. Aid SvsTv lyxepuv, after two days — two days being 
 the distance. 
 Aid has that, on which it terminates, i. e. the end 
 or final cause, in the accusative. 
 For. To' (Td€£a7ov 8ia ro'v avdpwtfov Jygvslo, the sabbath 
 
 was made for man. 
 
 Sometimes,jhough rarely, the means. 
 Through. 'EvixYjffotv au<rov Sia to" a/jxa tS dpvfe they conquered 
 him through the blood of the Lamb. 
 
 V. Ten prepositions govern three cases. 
 
 AMS>I 
 Denotes round about, in all directions, near about, or 
 beside, about, concerning. 
 
 C 'A/uup/ tfoXrjos oixe'stfij they dwell about the city. 
 Afi.<pi 6' (ig wfAoitfiv /3dXs7o £i<pos, and he hung 
 About. i the sword about his shoulders. 
 
 'Aypojxsvoj 'Iop&xva 'afjup/ 'ps'sSpa, collected about 
 ^ the stream of Jordan. 
 After. Af*.<p* 5' ap aJ7w dXXoi §Vov7o, others followed (near 
 
 about) after him. 
 Among. AfMp* etyfai tfs'vdos opwps, sorrow rose (round about) 
 
 among them. 
 Beside. "Hpitfs <P djuup' au7w, he fell beside him. 
 Near. Apq>i 5s xauXo'v <pdtfyavov ejjaitf&ij, the sword was 
 
 broken near the hilt. 
 Upon. KaggaXev 'avtyot xa7d x &ovoV , 'ocfupj <&' 8f «toy ^fly. 
 
Prepositions. 161 
 
 he threw the roan upon the ground and sa' 
 down upon him. 
 
 Concerning. Mdyschoy vsiSaxos 'afiqT oXiyns, they fight about 
 a small fountain. 
 
 Of. Afx^j 'a^spojv 7pa9t a description of the stars; lit- 
 
 erally, a writing about the stars. 
 
 AN V 
 
 Denotes to more up or back, and refers to the line of 
 direction trai < wards. Hence it denotes back along, 
 
 against, n, upon, up and down, or among. 
 Against. Ati *-o"7ctfj^v (JjexofAKfav, they bore them back along 
 
 the river, i. e. against the stream. 
 About. *A)fv 6 1 'OpuSa 'ava xpola^oio TV/r^ag he 
 
 took the noble Orvthaon about the temple. 
 A I 'Ava v Xo^ov, according to the same 
 
 , c word, q. d. tracing the same course of speech 
 
 * * ( back again. 
 Over. mountains. 
 
 Thro 'av ava (rfpalov, tin scattered up 
 
 and down, or through the army. 
 Among. 'Ava ca opfa cXavatf^ai, to wander up and down [a* 
 
 mong] the mountai; 
 A-po \ rps~t, containing two or 
 
 three firkins a-piece, [i. e. up to two or three 
 
 firkins, no farther.] 
 
 Q. EuS$ zial-np 'ava rapyap.i axpc^, the father slept 
 upon the to|) of mount Gargarus. 
 In. I ^sptfjv iXoCtfa, taking it up in her hands. 
 
 With* Xputf^j 'ava fxf,*7pij, with a golden eceptre. 
 
 'Em 
 
 poll, in different modes. With the genitive it 
 action <»r .situation upon. 
 on. 'H r. c <rpa<7rs£/,£, the ball rolls 
 
 upon the table. 
 Through. 'Esri Gp6.xr t g ^x^? 2 ^ * lC marched through [upon] 
 
 Thrace. 
 Of. 'Etfi *ai8o; Xf'yojv, speaking upon [of] the child. 
 
 At. 'Er< too** TogeusTv, to shoot at the mark. 
 
 Within. 'Ezsi vltf<fn$ e<r7av sxaerloi, they each stood [close up- 
 on] within the goal. 
 14* 
 
162 
 
 Government. 
 
 Beside. 'Eqjavlpwtfsv iau7ov szsl **£ SaXatrtfi^ *% TiQspiaSog, 
 showed himself just upon, fi. e. at, beside] the 
 sea of Tiberias. 
 
 After. T*£ viroKfwtfloLg <5ia§aivsiv ixd\Sb(fs, xcu £*ie] <r£7wv rag 
 rageis rwv Maxg56vcov, he ordered the shield-men 
 to descend, and after [close upon] them the 
 Macedonian ranks. 
 
 During. 'E*r* Kpovou, during the life of Saturn. 
 
 With the dative, fasi generally denotes junct ion 
 of one thing upon another. 
 C 'Erari To7gcpikoi£ n joined with, or among, his friends. 
 
 Among. < npo<p7)7susiv i<irl\ao7g xou g&v>]fl'i, to prophesy among 
 { people and nations. 
 
 Following upon in the way of dependence, ad- 
 dition to, or in pursuit of. 
 
 With. 'Eflri <ro^<roi£, in addition to [with] these things. 
 
 From. 'Etfi rrj zsitflsi, in consequence of [fromj faith. 
 
 For. 'Eat? <rri xipSsi, in pursuit of, for the sake of gain. 
 
 Above. Nsxpo; TpiaxoVioi izsi -%tkioig, three hundred upon 
 [above] a thousand dead. 
 
 With the accusative, it denotes an action di- 
 rected upon. 
 
 Upon. Aftos flriV7si M rfy yrp, a stone falls upon, or to- 
 wards the ground. 
 
 At. Ka^|ui5vov ivsl to tsXwviov, sitting upon the business 
 
 of [at] the receipt of custom. 
 
 To. Kuwv itfidlpi^ug hai to Wiov hgipapa, the dog return- 
 
 ed to his vomit. 
 
 Towards. 'Eat' otva7oX?;v, towards the east. 
 
 Against. BoctfiXsia sqp !au7/jv cJja.uepia'Ssra'a, a kingdom divided 
 against itself. 
 
 RATA 
 
 Denotes along, against, according to, down, and refers 
 to the line of direction along which a thing tends, or is sit- 
 uated. 
 
 Along. Kct7a r*p hSov, or xala <rr t g oSov, along the road. 
 Through. Ka$' oXtjs rife 'IxSaiag, through all Jewry. 
 Tn. KaV ovap, in a dream. 
 
 To. "Hxov7o xa7a c7pa76v, they came to the army. 
 
 Toward. Ka7a fiopsav Idlyxug. standing toward the north. 
 Against. Ka7ci Xpitfls* against Christ. 
 Over. ETtfi xaV *psa£, goes against [over] the mountain. 
 
Prepositions. 
 
 153 
 
 Und< he went against [under] the earth. 
 
 •j. Kola yrg rfafav, to fall against [upon] the ground. 
 
 At. Ka' igainst [urat] a mark. 
 
 About. KaT o^aXu a mist was spread 
 
 Of. because we have 
 
 : <l |nf ] God. 
 Down. xpy;fjLv« eiV r/ ( v SaXatftfav, rushed 
 
 down tl into I lie* - 
 
 Among. Ka" rifines them along the 
 
 line ol [i. e. an 
 From. Ka" "\ the black blood 
 
 m. 
 i ; fa K '" I »rdinL r to Matthew. 
 
 •axon xalct. <pprj7pa$, according to [i. e. by] 
 
 U 5uvafjLiv, according to his strength, <o far as 
 id. 
 
 ".iW7os, ac to, or after, the 
 
 m w ho cflfeated. 
 
 h fore 
 
 tr. K ,•-/.. the Corinthi- 
 
 - had the 
 
 META 
 
 • ita nry. and is rendered by 
 with, nis 
 
 With. wrimijj found the 
 
 young child with Ins m<>; 
 
 me place with (or among) 
 the 
 With. f O 8 Ciod wrought with them. 
 
 B] . -■*>■,$, their in • re blown 
 
 rid. 
 With. M :" If Z apvi'ou iroXtfjLrjtfoutfi, they shall fight with the 
 
 On. f O ^ he that showed mercy 
 
 on him, i. e. with him as the object of it. 
 In. ~i x s y^ tving between (in) his ham 
 
 Amo: he was busy among the fore- 
 
 rac 
 
164 
 
 Government. 
 
 To. Ms7a (JfAwJjo'iv eWsv, he spoke among (to) the female 
 
 attendants. 
 Mg7a cf<pr<fi tfYina t?Ssv7ss, placing their destruction 
 
 among (within) them. 
 Ms7a t^v SXi^iv tojv yjfxepGJv toi;7wv, after the tribu- 
 lation of these days. 
 Nux7wp rsxai psW ?)fA$'pav, by night and by day. 
 B/§Xov pela x g *P a S S'^-^ws, having taken the book 
 between [into] his hands. 
 Among. "I&j vOv f/,s7a Xaov, go now among the people. 
 
 Within. 
 After. 
 
 By- 
 
 Into. 
 
 IIAPA 
 
 Signifies at, beside, or near, 
 or from beside, from* 
 From. 
 
 With the genitive, from at, 
 
 Ilapot Kupiou r) /3ofy)sia fxou, [from beside] from the 
 
 Lord is my help. 
 With. 'fytfous xoli oi Tap' ai37ou, Jesus, and those who were 
 
 from beside [with] him. 
 Of. 'Erfuv0avs7o Trap' au7wv, he inquired from [of] them. 
 
 Above. "E^si <nv' oyxov "Apyos 'EXXrjvwv -tfapa, Argos has 
 
 something to boast from among [above] the 
 
 Grecians. 
 After. Ilap^ fySovJj^Xuflrif), from [after] pleasure, pain. 
 Near. Ilapdc xpo7a<pwv re tfapsiai, the cheeks from beside 
 
 [near] the temples. 
 
 With the dative close beside, i. e. at or with. 
 With. Mifltfov oux fpceJs tfapdt tcj tfa7pi, ye have not a reward 
 
 [laid up] beside, or with, your father. 
 Among. AisXoyf£ov7o crap' Jau7ai£, they reasoned [aside] 
 
 among themselves. 
 With. IlapoL rtp Kupiw s'Xeos, [beside] with the Lord is 
 
 mercy. 
 To. 'Is'vai rfapa tcj TiotfoKpspvei, to go to Tissaphernes. 
 
 With the Accusative beside, for the sake of 
 comparison, or contrast, or as a reason. 
 In com- } 'ftpecibs tfapa t*s ui*s tojv dvdpwtfwv, thou art fair, 
 parison. \ when set beside or compared with the sons of 
 
 } men, i. e. fairer than the sons of men. 
 Beneath. 'HXa77wa'as aulov jSpa^ ti orap' dyyeX*s, thou hast 
 
 lowered him a little, when set beside or com- 
 
 * The Genitive in Greek has frequently the force of tendency 
 from. 
 
Prepositions. 
 
 1C5 
 
 pared with the angels ; i. e. hast lowered him 
 rath the 
 For. rufuftf, [for this reason] it 
 
 l- DOl out of tin 
 
 ©ao^iooxavc rnrpayfAsvwv, I seem- 
 
 d by reason of [ tor j the greatness of my 
 actn 
 From. H Jpm arapa ri7o tfw7»jpiav iivci, I think that safe- 
 
 Ts<r<rapaxov7a *ap,i one. 
 
 -iid. lie/ " ifLov If*) led to the farther 
 
 of [ 
 Against. Ilapa tcv vcifjLov, beyond, against the law. 
 
 hep] 
 
 - afio*t % round about. ling. 
 
 \ n. c pi /Stp* it the alt; 
 
 About. ;ibout his loins. 
 
 S II.,'. pftfiipCpiav, ;. »n. 
 
 Concerni: Jt» ol 'UiaTw wspi wfhS t the Jews mur- 
 
 mured com - in. 
 
 I JJffi «cl4t} roXsi ifiiivcu, to he in fear concerning 
 
 [for] tin- whole ( 
 
 !n xou tjfpi au7i vsw7£pitfr»;-, fearing lest 
 a new attempt against him. 
 tUfliis Qesg d<re€>jfux7ot, impieties against the 
 
 Towards. ll:v. rui i , concerning [towards] those 
 
 injured. 
 \ tUfi rz$ yovsTg co«!7#£ yi'vx, be such in respect to 
 spect to. ) [toward] thy parents. 
 
 s denotes superiority . what is 
 round another is of course great i 
 Over. 'Ejjafflav rS i&i* 6e\r t ^loc, has power over 
 
 OWO will. 
 
 !TIspi irav7wv Ju/xevai aXXwv, to be above all others. 
 llspi vowv /3po7wv, above the comprehension of mor- 
 tals. 
 
 npos 
 
 /ore, towards j facing for the purpose of acting, 
 er being acted upon. 
 
166 Government. 
 
 Before. *0 Se TLilpog sidlyxst irpbg <ry dupa, but Peter stood 
 before the door. 
 
 With. 'O Xoyos %v *pbg «rov ©gov, the Word was with (be- 
 fore the presence of) God. 
 
 n . | npo$ «r£> tsXsi tS /3/a, about the end of life. 
 * f Upog sctagpav gV7j, it is about evening. 
 
 Between. Tsxfx>jpjov <rifc itpig r^dg cpiXiag, a proof of the friend- 
 ship that is between us. 
 
 By. Ilpo's <r3 Ajog Ixstsuw, 6/xas, I beseech you (in pres- 
 
 ence of) by Jupiter. 
 
 Near. Tlpog fxsv aXogKcipsg, the Carians near the sea. 
 
 Of. Xprj^S zxpog av5po$ nr\8zv ucrovogrxaxov, suspect no evil 
 
 of a good man. 
 
 Through. ^utfwv "zrtpos %ivag cJfxa, blowing out the blood through 
 the nostrils. 
 
 It often denotes tendency towards or against. 
 
 For, Toulo yelp tfpos vpelspag tfulyp'ioig u^ap^gj, for this id 
 
 tending to (for) your health. 
 
 Towards. 'AtfSjXdov tfpdg savlkg, they went away towards their 
 own homes. 
 
 * Hpdg avSpog ^P ^ ^^{puv rov ^(pov, giving his 
 I vote against an enemy. 
 
 Against. < NSjas tfpo's (ftznXaiga'o'fv gagav, dashed the ships a- 
 
 # gainst the rocks. 
 
 ^IIp&£ xsv7paXax7/£s'iv, to kick against the pricks. 
 In addi- i Upog roTg sipr^svoig, in addition to the things that 
 tion. ( have been said. 
 
 With the Accusative only, according to; i. e. 
 so far in the presence, or under the inspection 
 of; as, 
 pr\ds foiyctag zipdg rodsX^jxa, neither doing according 
 to his will. 
 
 On account of, pointed towards as a cause. 
 On ac- i Tlpog ity tfxXnpoxap^iav ujxuiv gypa^gv, on account 
 count of. ( of your hardness of heart, he wrote. 
 
 For the i npo£ t^v ^Xg^/xotfuvr^v xadrjjxgvos, sitting for the 
 sake of. { sake of alms. 
 
 'E^ia^IoX^ hsivr\, el xai tfpeg wpav, iX'tfrfzv ijjwxs, that 
 j* • y epistle made you sad. though but for a season. 
 i 'A-&o<f*a<f6£v1eg vspog xaipov upas, separated during 
 an hour. 
 
Prepositions. 167 
 
 "rm:p 
 
 Mr, M defence of. Over, in respect of place 
 or | 
 
 over [above] his 
 id. 
 
 ieir progress 
 ID. 
 Upon. <l. 
 
 what is 
 
 of Ethio 
 
 oold defend, we 
 
 r In //<///'. <<r for the 
 
 ( I jv, rig xou? for us, 
 
 y Knitted to 
 
 ( 
 
 f >ray by [foe Um 
 
 hi as, 
 
 I in our st i 
 Of .;ng\ as it in 
 
 thou 
 
 Concerning. H our hop 
 
 With tl D any 
 
 -I'jlii- 
 
 8 than. '< ho loves- 
 
 fat!. 8 than] j. 
 
 , xno j ] <>j. mi I 
 
 1. With the I iiscrimin- 
 
 lU 
 Under; whether in place, time, power, or any other 
 mo- .innVr ; ; 
 
 under the earth. 
 
 under [after? 
 on. 
 
168 Government. 
 
 At. "Ttfo vux7i, under [at] night. 
 
 About, "rtfo <rov op^pov, under [or about] day-break. 
 
 Under. Asyw w$ too @goj, I speak as under [the direction 
 
 of] God. 
 Behind. Ka/ fjuv xa7axpu#7si too <n}v dupav, and he conceals 
 
 him behind the door. 
 
 !'Y#o Tpolrj Yiyo^ev, we led [under] to Troy. 
 Ai'tf^ioflos av^p tod "IXiov ^>is, he was the most ab- 
 ject wretch that came to Troy. 
 With. Ka7a§a(vov7i too Xafwira<5wv, coming down [under 
 the guidance of] with torches. 
 
 2. With the genitive, by, as a cause or an in- 
 strument. 
 By. To prfisv tod rou Kupfou, what was spoken by the 
 
 Lord. 
 Of. 'Evgtfai'^?] too «-wv fxayojv, was mocked by [or of] 
 
 the wise men. 
 For. 'Tq>' yiovrjs <5axp^siv,to weep for joy. 
 

 APPENDIX— L 
 
 From VaJpy'fl Grammar.) 
 
 DIGAMMA. 
 
 Tur origina] P of Greece, 
 
 ad m ;imma was early 
 
 the hiatus, which the concurrent 
 1 produce.* Aspirafc tro- 
 
 - \\ . — lint the 
 haixh an< 
 
 imi «»r 
 
 It wa.v •xj.r. Med in Latin 
 
 •ur \ . It 
 lient- 
 
 .iiccs of 1 d in 
 
 eel in 
 
 • nto 
 ov. a*. I • k Btoyl\io> :nd 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 i W, 
 d as some argi. 
 >rdinar to those prii. I final 
 
 ur J , and rowel 
 
 iv V. It 
 
 ttiah, half* 
 'tze ia 
 so dif; 
 
 theDigan 
 . es. 
 Tii afa 
 
 :> pometin n r. 
 
 ITtff v for TfOtv ; Wr? 
 
1 70 Appendix — Digamma . 
 
 duced into all Dialects except the JEolic, which adhered to 
 the Digamma. Hence it has preserved the name of the 
 iEolic. It has also with great propriety been called the Ho- 
 meric Digamma. That great Poet adopted the 
 forms of the JEolic and Ionic Dialects,* which threw a ma- 
 jestic air of antiquity on his poetry. This ancient form 
 Homer dignifies by the appellation of the language of the 
 Gods. Virgil, and among the moderns, Tasso and Milton, 
 successfully imitated that practice by the introduction of 
 antiquated expressions, which removed their language from 
 the common idiom, and cast a venerable gloom of solemni- 
 ty on their style. To that principle may in a great measure, 
 be attributed the frequent use of the Digamma by Homer. 
 
 The use of the Digamma having been insensibly abolish- 
 ed by the introduction of Aspirates, the transcribers of the 
 works of Homer neglected to mark it. and at length the ves- 
 tiges of its existence were confined to a few ancient Inscrip- 
 tions. The harmonious ear of the Poet had led him sedu- 
 lously to avoid every hiatus of vowels ; but the absence of 
 the Digamma made him inharmonious and defective. To 
 remove in some degree this difficulty, his Commentators in- 
 terposed the final v|, or the Particles y\ 6\ «-' : but these 
 
 for e\ro, from ?Xo ; Taiia, gaudeo, for Fd<5c*, &c. It has frequently been 
 expressed by B ; and sometimes too by M, fl, <I>, K, X. 
 
 Used for the original Digamma, rhad not the sound of our G, but 
 a soft guttural sound, like the German g final in JVenig. Indeed the 
 ancient form of r was a curve thus, (,) which became afterwards a 
 mark of the rough breathing. 
 
 The German g, commonly expressed bjgh in the English language, 
 has shared, in South Britain, the fate which the Digamma experien- 
 ced in many pajts of Greece, and has been disused. The few in- 
 stances, in which it is sounded, follow the principle of the Digamma 
 F, as, cough, enough, rough, tough. 
 
 It is not improbable that this guttural sound of r, softened by com- 
 mon use, may have given rise to the opinion that the Digamma was 
 pronounced like our W. The difference of the two sounds maybe 
 exemplified in the modern word abySv, an egg, whieh the Greeks pro- 
 nounce of one, gutturalizing one. 
 
 * It is not to be imagined that Homer adopted arbitrarily the dif- 
 ferent Dialects. His was the pure, appropriate diction of Verse, the 
 classical language of ancient Greece, the source of all that was sub- 
 lime and beautiful in Poetry, and the model of all succeeding Poets. 
 
 t They have even, by the addition of v, altered the case, and con- 
 sequently the sense, of some words. An instance of this appears in 
 the last Book of the Odyssey, 312, where vwiv i6\iru has been put far 
 v5i ftfwXra. 
 
Appendix — Digamma. 
 
 could only be partially adopted, and were far from display? 
 in all the charms ot Num- 
 
 berless passages remained i;: their , and ex- 
 
 ercised the conjc < 
 
 i the opening of the Iliad, 
 
 ^harmo- 
 nious effect ot the concurrence of the two r, they cut orTthe 
 foru: latter created another difficul- 
 
 >., and others assert t!iat : was 
 i hefore the ! 
 
 •»licable. A 
 was mad 
 e embtrrmmmenl nma 
 
 has a laved tli t 
 
 f h\< or m. To give the 
 
 lean 
 
 an alphabetical table is ad<i<-il of th hich 
 
 mtly or generally, admit the Digamma in the in- 
 itial VO'A 
 
 A. 
 
 
 off- 
 
 
 ' ^°f» 
 
 
 1 
 
 S break. 
 
 
 a p, 
 
 
 
 B. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 poc#, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3V, 
 
 
 •t!^ 
 
 
 
 f>a, 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *f«*, 
 
 
 
 
 
 Iffe, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ao.~\.. 
 
 
 • *•, 
 
 
 
 IfMf, 
 
 
 to be like Jxa7o$, 
 
 .*a.* 
 
 * A linma oft as, ? >r« froni 
 
 i>»*, li.rj dj words take & double ! 
 
 before the Mg other before the verb, e 
 
 :.any compounded words the Digamma Jdle, 
 
 as, »po'*<iV*-», dfiiKi-f. Ki<6Upy<i^ k erted in several simple words\ 
 
 ved, that « and v were substituted fcr the Di- 
 gamma. Hence to I 'Arniiii ; to * x at6 <* 
 Thus l. Jfw made Jfirw in th +dv % ifrffw 
 
172 
 
 Appendix— Digamma. 
 
 ifc, 
 
 £w, to put on. 
 
 MpK, 
 
 S«os 9 
 
 
 iSjuiai, 
 
 sVw, 
 
 H. 
 
 »xsXo£, 
 
 §'pyov, 
 
 f$£, 
 
 ^'IXios, 
 
 2p/W, 
 
 ^w, 
 
 Tv£^, 
 
 spSu, 
 
 $&*, 
 
 IV I0V, 
 
 SlpW, 
 
 jP*» 
 
 i'ov, 
 
 tyvpys. 
 
 ^xa, adv. 
 
 iov^ot£, 
 
 Hfy>, 
 
 ^v(4, 
 
 T IpK> 
 
 spuu, to draw, 
 
 fp> 
 
 n 
 r* 
 
 stew, 
 
 ^pa, 
 
 /Cos, 
 
 itftios, 
 
 "Hp*), 
 
 irtpi, 
 
 ftrtfspos, 
 
 %C* 
 
 itfxw, 
 
 itfir], 
 
 
 Wiif, 
 
 srr\g 9 
 
 I. 
 
 i'<f7wp, 
 
 leaf, 
 
 Mx* 
 
 iVs'a, 
 
 &rwo'io£, 
 
 {&xw 9 
 
 fatf, 
 
 ;<pi, 
 ?+; 
 
 iWiJ. 
 
 O. 
 
 ooco£, 
 
 OIVO£, 
 
 ©0, 
 
 oOXafAos, 
 
 oupov. 
 
 n. 
 
 The Latin Dialect naturally adopted the ^Eolic Digamma, 
 which it expressed generally by V, as will be seen in the 
 following list : 
 
 loVspa, vespera ; 
 l(f\loi % Vesta ; 
 t7os, vetus ; 
 ?p, ver ; 
 '£*£, viscus ; 
 i'ov, viola ; 
 k, vis ; 
 iw, ivi; 
 xaw, cavo ; 
 xspocos, cervus ; 
 xXsfs, clavis ; 
 xo'pos, corvus ; 
 Xaios, loevus ; 
 Xap^j, larva ; 
 Xslbs, levis ; 
 XoJw, lavo ; 
 Xuw, solvo ; 
 jxaw, moveo ; 
 juuxXtj, malva ; 
 fjuxopos, Mavors ; 
 
 ayofxai, vagor ; 
 aiwv, aevum ; 
 dXwflrqg, vulpes ; 
 «opvo$, avernus ; 
 dX ai °S) achivus ; 
 «w, vapor ; 
 /Siow, vivo ; 
 fiosg, boves ; 
 £io£, divinus ; 
 sWsw, video ; 
 si'xa7i, viginti ; 
 sXw, volvo ; 
 sf*w, vomo ; 
 £v5jxw, vindico ; 
 £vs7oi, veneti ; 
 £v7spo£, venter ; 
 spxw, vergo ; 
 spos, servus ; 
 £pw, verto ; 
 stfdrjg, vestis ; 
 
 vaio£, ncevus ; 
 vaus, navis ;* 
 Vc'os, novus ; 
 vixw, vinco ; 
 o/xos, vicus ; 
 olios, vinum ; 
 o7$, ovis ; 
 oXw, volvo ; 
 0^X0?. vulgus ; 
 ow, voveo ; 
 srajpos, parvus ; 
 aTpta, privo ; 
 £iw, rivus ; 
 (Txai's, saevus ; 
 raus, pavo ; 
 uXtj, sylva ; 
 L'w, uvesco ; 
 uov, ovum, kc. 
 
 * Nouj was probably pronounced na/> ; hence navii* Th«i Haff»c ; 
 pa/res^ was transposed into parvus. 
 
Appendix — Subscript «. 173 
 
 Sometimes by other letters, among which are B ; as, <5jw, 
 dubium ; fjwpos, morbus ; gww, robur ; uw, uber. 
 ; as, ilepa ; cetera. 
 
 F ; as, dyooa, forum ; o/uliXo$, famulus ; aiXo's, fell* ; I 
 times ; fi/o£, i tluo. 
 
 R ; as, /:or, Boreas ; xXeiw, celebro ; VXaoc, hilaris ; jxuag, 
 mun Musarum ; virff, nurus, &c* 
 
 In I Di^amtna has become W ; as, vs'os, new ; 
 
 mni/m, wine j virus, wick : fistula, whistle ; tisjki. wasp ; 
 riit, way. It is pronounced, without being written, in th« 
 ie. 
 
 V; as, vao<:, nave 
 
 II. 
 
 Tin; SUBSCRIPT i 
 
 II found in KM, in 
 
 f ularof' !ul 2d Declensions. 
 
 I I. Tin and Dati\c Dual 
 
 III. Adjectives c lit*, as, n^sis, tua*£. 
 
 IV. In the 2d and liar Stibjunct as, 
 
 rl» in aw and 
 
 active of 
 frith that of 
 
 . £&j, and 
 
 * The Digamma was a principal agent in the format 
 
 MO, ama i, was termed amau; from a> 
 : from ru; audio, uudu. 
 
 amo, amai I . I 
 
 nay be carried to plural cases in bus. I 
 
 . utus, audibo, A/ 
 lhjunctive mood a . ; ii tcrmin- 
 
 ations from those of the present indicative, < lian^nio- the short into 
 long vowels, dropping v and subscribing t when they 
 occur; c. g. 
 
 Indie. tt5tt-«, cif ci ; cror, tro* ; •pCV 1 trc, *c ( . 
 
 t Except that verbs in »/n make the 2d and Jd persona singular in 
 
 16* 
 
174 Appendix — Article. 
 
 V. In other contracted terminations of Verbs in aw without 
 distinction of Voices where * occured before contraction ; 
 as, /3o-asi£ a£, f3o-aoig-Cj$. 
 
 VI. In the 2d Singular of Tenses of the Indicative Mood 
 in ofxai, and of the Subjunctive in wjwxi, Passive and Middle 
 Voices ; as, T^7-ofxai-^. <rw7-cjfxo4-7) : and retained after Con- 
 traction by Verbs in aw and ew ; as, rifjL-0117-a, 91X-S17-1). 
 
 VII. In the 2d Sing, of Tenses in the Subjunctive Passive 
 and Middle of Verbs in fw ; as, 
 
 Present. 2d Aorist. 
 
 <f7qitai tf<r*i tfrw, Cr^ 
 
 <ndwfi.ai, c^i? Ow, d>j 
 
 (Ji^wfAai, 6kJcj 5w, &J) 
 
 In the Subjunctive in the three Voices corresponding with 
 that of the contracted form of Verbs in aw, ew, and ow, un- 
 der the exceptions already noticed. 
 
 III. 
 
 ARTICLE. 
 
 The article was originally a relative pronoun, and as such 
 was used by Homer and others in the sense of a-jlog or exsT- 
 vo£. *0 yap f3a(fiX>}"i }£oXw0s;£ vStfov ava tf7parrv &p<fe xaxijv, he 
 being enraged with the king, raised a destructive pestilence 
 among the people. Iliad. A. 9. *Oyapf>A-, for he came. 
 1 1. TUN $5 iyui k XJtfw, but I will not release her. 2 
 
 When the antecedent is so situated, that the relation of 
 the pronoun to it is obscure, the antecedent is repeated after 
 the pronoun, to remove the obscurity : in this case the pro- 
 noun takes the name of the article. Thus, Iliad, A. 33, 
 h$ s(poLr\ I65skTsv l O — Here it would be doubtful whether the 
 pronoun e O referred to the person who spake, or to some 
 one mentioned before. To remove this ambiguity, the 
 Poet goes on, eSStuftv e O yspwv, the old men feared, viz. 
 Chryses, who had been before introduced ; line 11. 
 
 The article 6 differs from the relative S$ in two respects 
 only. 
 
 (o ; which is indeed a more natural contraction of ojjj, 09. than m 
 used by verbs in a<* ; and that the 2d aorist varies from the present, 
 and consequently from the contracted form in verbs derived from «a, 
 tssuming 17 instead of a. 
 
Appendix — Article. \ 75 
 
 1. It has so obscure a reference to its antecedent, as to 
 require the repetition of it, to remove the obscurity. 
 
 I is antecedent is more ex ; and from this cir* 
 
 « e. in part, arises the obecuritjfcof it! nee. 
 
 I to an artich e any thing which lias 
 
 familiar to the m >i be- 
 
 tn its ini| 
 
 ance or notoriety . In the caw as of the re- 
 
 late, the pro- 
 
 der- 
 
 ; the pel 
 
 is, 01 fxaXi(r7a 
 • ! TXacstfi, rthj arecomii 
 
 \ from b what the 
 
 asserts. In trn luxpdlrfi q>iX- 
 
 lit I, and 
 
 i an assertion is : 
 
 ;, asserts tl 1 man ; the thing 
 
 h follow! 
 aine, 
 
 that the 
 
 I without 
 Hut uh< I 
 made f \Vh« \c are about to mention, 
 
 for ire are anchor- 
 <* existence of that to be known, which has 
 If in disco 
 ;on to mention him again, 
 I may assume that has 
 fore ~^c;, which is equivalent I foaHf, abc 
 
 d, and therefore as to he known. It 
 
 iain that I could iy 'O iWo$ on the first 
 
 of the horse, for this would be to assume that which 
 
 . and therefore not conceded. 
 
 It remains only to point out in what cases the assumption 
 
 way be made. 
 
176 Appendix — Article. 
 
 I. Renewed Mention. 
 
 1. When a person or thing, recently mentioned, is spoken 
 of again, the article is inserted, whether the same word is 
 used, or a synonyfhous one. Xen. Cyrop. 'Eiraifo^*) yz 
 jwiv iv nsptfGJv v6/xoi£ — ou7oi 6s (Joxstfi O'l NO'MOI ci p^stfdai, he 
 was educated according to the Persian laws — and those 
 laws seem to begin, &c. Xen. Mem. III. 13. KoXatfav- 
 Tog Si vivos ''erxupwff 'AKO'AOTGON, %s7o ri x aX£ * ai ' V0 » T ^' 
 dspu,«?rov7j, and some one beating his attendant severely, he 
 inquired the reason of abusing the servant. 
 
 2. The article is inserted before a word specifying the 
 known state or qualities of some thing just mentioned ; as, 
 2wxpa<r>is e O 'ASqvaibs, Socrates the Athenian ; iyu e O afiap- 
 7wXo£, I confessedly a sinner. 
 
 It is not always supposed, that the state or qualities de- 
 scribed are known to the person addressed, but only that 
 they may be generally known. 
 
 3. The article is inserted before a noun, when the exis- 
 tence of that, which the noun denotes, has been implied in 
 the preceding part of the sentence, though not expressed in 
 form. 
 
 iEschin. cont. Ctes. § 56. Ou7og nPOAOT2 roTg *o\s- 
 fjJois NufJKpouov (pvyac; iyivslo, THN xpitftv itf turofUivas, he hav- 
 ing treacherously surrendered Nymphaeum to the enemy, 
 became a fugitive, not waiting the trial. Here <n}v xpitftv is 
 the trial, implied as the necessary consequence of the 
 treachery. 
 
 Ibid. § 34. "07av n YEY'AQNTAI, dopirfa xou a<fa$7 t t 
 pwv7ai Xsyeiv, <po§£|u,fcvoi TO tXs^ov, when they lie, they seek 
 indefinite and obscure expressions, to avoid the reproach. 
 TO tXeyxov refers here to the reproach implied as the neces- 
 sary consequence of their falsehood. 
 
 The clearness of the implication will be very different in 
 different cases. In many instances it exists only in the 
 mind of the speaker: and is authorized, only because it 
 will appear just, when the sentence is concluded. 
 
 II. KAT' 'ESOXH'N. For Distinction. 
 There is a multitude of ideas dormant in the mind, which 
 are perfectly familiar to it, though not constantly the sub- 
 jects of its contemplation. A reference may be made to 
 these, with the same certainty that the relation will be per- 
 ceived, as if it were to something recently mentioned, or 
 actually presented to the mind. 
 
Aftjundix — Art i 177 
 
 1. The arti <r distinction, when 
 
 many, but noue 
 is so well known as : 
 
 T\ > a^a xoj 'f> VoXifMC, i. e. 
 
 the < !oponnesian i 
 
 'O - the 
 
 I'TC 
 
 lire, 
 rw>W base ibis rded 
 
 rlh. 
 
 e case • 
 those wl. rsons or things >n ) 
 
 e se?eral, on 
 
 ■ 
 
 • o^a* T \ 1 
 'nving knocked at the git< 
 ed f < n'a apart mn 
 
 Iou7ivK THN /3*Xi}v 6xct- 
 X*v fig TO fit 
 
 we can know a noun t 
 
 A 
 
 when a < d, these nouns <1 as 
 
 is no 
 
 wlikli the ar 
 
 sessive pronoun. 
 
 I> ca7p/ xai Till \k>' 
 
 .(Jhcu, aXXci xai T H» carp, r Alt 
 
 failn r or hi* mother only, bat fur i 
 
 I \ N KSfjfl 
 
 i the 
 
 ncur< . are use*) I ittri- 
 
 Plato, vol. 1.;, II. | otfiov xxu TO 
 
 what do you say to be justice and injua- 
 
178 Appendix— Art i< 
 
 No ideas are more familiar to the mind than these. 
 
 In cases where the article is used y.clV ^o^rjv, its reference 
 is sometimes more obscure than in instances of renewed 
 mention ; yet its insertion is explicable on the same prina 
 pies. 
 
 III. Correlatives. 
 
 Correlatives are words between which there exists a mc- 
 tual relation. 
 
 1. When wo#ds are in regimen, if the governing noun has 
 the article, the one governed has it likewise. 
 
 Plat. Thraet. p. 71. vj TON <fwuo/wv f£is, the state of bo- 
 dies. 
 
 To this rule there are some exceptions, but these are 
 chiefly cases where the article is omitted, according to the 
 rules for omission to be given afterwards. 
 
 2. When a partitive governs a genitive, the article is 
 prefixed to that genitive. 
 
 IIoXXo/ TQjJ tc7jv, many of the wise. 
 
 The genitive following the partitive, denotes the class to 
 which the partitive belongs. 
 
 The rule is sometimes violated, especially in the case of 
 avfyi^tfwv. Some partitives, as rig % ocfog, cannot from their 
 nature admit the article ; and some only in particular cases, 
 as tfoXXoi, sT$. They will be noticed hereafter. 
 
 3. The article is used with fxfv and 6L when things are 
 opposed to each other, so as to have a mutual relation. 
 
 *0 fjifc'v, the one ; 6 fe, the other. 
 
 To fjusv diorflovy to Se fxavjxov ; the one foolish, the other 
 mad. 
 
 In the same manner, sig and srspog. 
 l O els, the one ; 6 Iftpo?, the other. 
 
 HYPOTHESIS. 
 
 In the preceding cases, the article with its predicate re- 
 calls some familiar idea. In this, it is used for no purpose, 
 but merely for the sake of assumption. The article used 
 hypothetic ally denotes that every individual is intended, to 
 whom the predicate can be applied. 
 
 Demosth. de Cor. § 71. IIov^pov l O <f\jxo$a\~ the 
 
 sycophant is always evil. This is equivalent to 'O gjv c 
 pavlr\g. whoever is a sycophant. 
 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 1. v sS (ripctlvryrtfwla lich 
 
 it becomes a good General to have, i.e. every good General 
 
lpj>nt(' 179 
 
 Had fax*pa\ been recentlv men- 
 
 tion* renewed 
 
 mention; but as i '.and:*, we clearly p that 
 
 't,xo^av7ig 
 can 
 
 In plural, 
 
 hisses of beings. 
 
 > guard 
 
 I to two ; 
 
 ed n is. 
 
 I familiai 
 
 mi- 
 
 h the art 
 
 I be- 
 
 >av be n 
 
 the 
 
 i • 
 
 affirm 01 
 
 pro- 
 
1 80 Appendix — Article. 
 
 Demosth. de Cor. § 23. AI"TI02 EI'Ml rov sroXIfAou, 
 am guilty of the war. 
 
 iEsch. cont. Ctes. § 52. IIPOAO'TA2 rwv 'EXXtjvwv rkg 
 fioiurdp-xas haksds, he called the leaders of the Boeotians the 
 betrayers of Greece. 
 
 Ibid. 43. *0 toXjulwv Jv rcug irfidlo'kaTs ypcupew, o7i AE2IIO'- 
 THJS 'E2TIN owrav7wv avflpatfwv, who dared to write in his 
 Letters, that he is King of all men. 
 
 In these instances, the words in capitals would have the 
 article xaV sgo^v, were it not forbidden by the verb, which 
 is used to indicate, as hitherto unknown, the very truth, 
 which the presence of the article would imply as known or 
 supposed already. Hence, in the e lrom ^Eschines, 
 
 had the Persian Monarch written Sn 'O dstftolvig sdli, the 
 sense would have been, that he was the person recognized, 
 (for here hypothesis ha* no place,) to be the lord of man- 
 kind. But he knew the Creeks had not thus recognized 
 him. 
 
 3. After verbs of appointing, creating, choosing, 6rc the 
 noun expressive of the appointment, choice. 6cc, is without 
 the article. 
 
 Demosth. de Cor. §59. 'HrEM'fiX koj KT'PIOS f HPE'- 
 ©H $iXivmog itfavlwv, Philip was chosen ruier and governor 
 of all. 
 
 Isai. v. 20. oi TT0ENTE2 to <tx61og *fi2, xeu to <p£<: 2KO'- 
 T02, who put darkness fof light, and light for darki" 
 
 r I he article could not be prefixed to any of these nouns, 
 because the existence of the appointmtnt. &e. is not (»t a 
 nature to be recognized, being now iirst declared ; and hy- 
 pothesis, as before, being out of the question. 
 
 4. Nouns in apposition, not explanatory of tin 
 of the preceding noun, but of the end to which th< 
 
 or thing intended is affirmed to be subservient, are without 
 the article. 
 
 Demos, de Cor. § 15. Tw vrpoSorji 2YMBOT AHi XP 7 «' a '» 
 he uses the traitor as the counsellor. 
 
 In-such cases, z\\a\ or wv may be supplied. 
 
 5. In exclusive propositions, where it is intended to ex- 
 clude universally every individual, the article is omit! 
 
 Demosth de Cor. §28. OuNATS,i 
 xsxrr^ivr^, the city possessing no 
 
 If the article had been inserted- it v ;ue implied 
 
 that the existence of ships and wal i ither recognized 
 
 or conditionally admitted ; both of which are inconsistent 
 with the nature of the' proposition. 
 
 i 
 
Appendix — Article. 1 8 i 
 
 S are in I and cannot 
 
 Herod, lib. it. p AETM.A ..-rs, xoj *cty* 
 
 II. but it is omitted ho- 
 
 ith the sense in- 
 
 latlOfl Will explain why. 
 
 i d ii 
 i. ^lodwrxaXc. MOTZIKH2, i tett 
 1*1 ii t . page "o (fifia, for the body 
 
 nld have the ar- 
 
 M mul Omissions ct 
 
 ms and the prin- 
 • mi II h« 
 
 I. ind irith 
 
 prrdicaii fit. 
 
 I I ! i i\;i- 
 
 sii rvty i < III 1 II I . , nor 
 
 I 
 
 ks ; and 
 8 
 
 Pit 
 
 -nnnt to ti 
 
J * 2 Appendix — Article. 
 
 Pla- vol. xi. p. 38. TO dxps'Xifxov soixsv ynTv sJmi TO 
 ;:aXov. forests us, that utility should be the greit good, 
 or, thiii 3 great good should be utility. 
 
 Arist. de Inter, c. 6. KATA<f>A2I2 sV7/v 'AnO'*A2I2: 
 nvbg xuIol nvo£. 
 
 2.* When two or more attributes,! joined by a copula- 
 tive, are assumed of the same person or thing, before the 
 firdt attribute the article is inserted; before the others it is 
 omitted. 
 
 Pint. Vit. Cic. p. 68. 'Futfxiog 'O uio£ KA1 xXripovo'u-os rl 
 rs&vYixorog r.yavuxlci, Roscius, the son and heir of the deceas- 
 ed, was grieved. 
 
 Demosth. de Coro. §27. T'g *0 rfi toXci . A I 
 
 ypa<pwv KA*1 cfpaTJwv KA'l 
 and acts, and gii 
 
 Jbid. § 61. 'O ertfA •:•//. og KA'l . the adviser 
 
 and orator. 
 
 Philo. 309. 'O kupwj 1 '.v, the Lord 
 
 God is a benefactor. 
 
 The article l O, which precedes the first attributive, is a 
 representative of the person to whom all the attributes be- 
 long. 
 
 Were it inserted before the remainder, the pi rep- 
 
 resented by the article thus inserted, must be the same or 
 different. Different they cannot be by the ;:on. If 
 
 the persons denoted by the article , we have the 
 
 absurdity of coupling a bring to hin 
 
 When £ne article is lore the several words, 
 
 they denote different persons. 
 
 Demosth. de Cor. 57. f O otfj&jSsXog xai l O tfuxrxpav'^s— • 
 qpipstfi, the adviser and the sycophant differ. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Three classes of nouns are exceptions to this rule. 
 
 1. Names of substances, considered as substances; as, 
 *0 Xi r (Jog KA I xp ufl, °'s> stone an d gold. 
 
 2. Proper names ; as, T OIS T 'AXsgavtJpov, KAI 4>/Xj^rov. 
 Alexander and Philip. 
 
 * This is the celebrated Rule of Granville Sharp, Esq. 
 
 t By attributives are meant adjectives, participles, and nouns sir- 
 nificant of character. relation* o*r dignity ; such nouns are often inter- 
 changed with adjectives or participles ; as, f O BwAfim for '0 ^ 
 and are therefore similar to them in nature. 
 
iract nouns ; as. 
 
 ,tnou 
 ■ 
 
 It ins, Um 
 
 ■ 
 
 i 
 
 and x/u$ v ab- 
 
 • 
 
 ruau. el in the ptst 
 
 \ \ 
 
 • . I ! . X . 
 
 llus ca- 
 itlribotii 
 
 ipov xa* <t>i>jcrov, f 
 
 t i 
 
 led dy. 
 
 ; and ti 
 
 * K**ay. book U 
 
1 64 Appendix — Article. 
 
 It would, therefore, be as contradictory to assume that 
 quality represented by 'H was at once axeipia and &*cu6$u4t* t 
 as that the same person was both Alexander and Philip : 
 whence it is immediately evident, that such an assumption 
 could not be intended. Under this head we may class 
 verbs in the infinitive mood, which differ not in their nature 
 from the names of the corresponding abstract ideas. Thus 
 we read in Plato, vol. xi. p. 43, Tilt IosTv ri KA 1 tib&rou : in 
 the next page we have TIL o-^si rs KA I c.xof,. The two 
 cases evidently require the same explanation. Infinitive 
 moods, so coupled together, are extremely common. 
 
 The rule likewise is true conversely. 
 
 If two or more attributives, coupled by xai, have the arti- 
 cle prefixed to the first, and not to the others, they all be- 
 long to Ihe same subject. 
 
 This is plainly the case in all the instances cited above. 
 The only exception, in addition to those mentioned before, + 
 is with regard to plurals. 
 
 A single individual may stand in various relations, and 
 act in divers capacities ; and, consequently, if two such re- 
 lations or characters be connected by a copulative, and the 
 first be preceded by a pronoun, the reader will reasonably 
 understand them both of the person represented by that 
 pronoun ; because such is the general usage, and the com- 
 pliance with it will not involve any contradiction. But this 
 does not happen in the same degree with respect to plurals. 
 Though one individual may act, and frequently does act, in 
 several capacities, it is not likely that a multitude of indi- 
 viduals should all of them act in the saine several capaci- 
 ties : and, by the extreme improbability that they should be 
 represented as so acting, we may be forbidden to under- 
 stand the second plural attributive of the persons designed 
 in the article prefixed to the first, however the usage in the 
 singular might seem to countenance the construction. The 
 meaning may be illustrated by a familiar example. An indi- 
 vidual is at once a member of parliament and the colonel of 
 a regiment. Speaking of such an one, and having occasion 
 to advert to these two characters, we might say in Greek, 
 l O fi&'kevrYig KAT Xo^apc: : and if, by such a phrase, we 
 meant to indicate two different persons, we should speak in 
 a manner not authorized by the Greek idiom. But suppose 
 we should say, speaking of several persons, O'l /3aX: 
 KAM Xo^a^oi ; the inference would be, either that the per- 
 
 t Page 18.2. 
 
parliament, and -nmanding regiments, 
 
 are usually lb< , r t lit in not to be the 
 
 re of two 
 If they be 
 rved : if they are notori- 
 olated, hut in such ■ man- 
 ner that r though O'l \'> 
 
 • ns knowledge of 
 he poesibiliti 
 
 R MAJ I \< I NOUNS. 
 
 Tl vbicfa ha -tide, do not 
 
 ahva and abstract nouns. 
 
 froii I NU' 
 
 r names, 
 ace laid down* 
 
 ly with- 
 out I ed by thr notori- 
 al meotion, the 
 
 I, bow< wr. indit 
 
 the name is repeated, it naturally 
 
 though the article 
 should n- .1 to mark that r» : 
 
 frequent fthe na- 
 
 . and follow the rules : of this 
 
 kiin limes /3a<ftXi-v-. c^c. 
 
 ABSTRA NS. 
 
 tract nouns. 
 
 1. \\ hen the no 
 
 xai' 'II axo/ tfr* 
 
 l#ci, Itij ,d intern; 
 
 • 
 
 lb. . the 
 
 of wick« 
 Tl fthe art:< 
 
 and I already mer.' 
 
 mm will mean, I 
 ■ 
 
 2. When th> 
 
1 % 6 Appendix — Article . 
 
 Aristoph. Av. 1536. Kai THN /SatfiXslav doi yuvctfx' !j£w 
 fliftji, And I give you the kingdom as a wife. 
 
 Xen. Mem. II, I. \H Kax (a utfoXaSatfa sf^sv, And Malice, 
 interrupting, said. , 
 
 The article is not always inserted, as in the case of proper 
 names, to which this is analogous. 
 
 3. Abstract nouns, according to the rule already given, 
 take the article when it has the sense of a possessive pro- 
 noun. 
 
 Aris. Ran. 45. 'AXX' ou^ olog <r' s/fjt,' atfotioSvfiou TON 
 ys'Xwv, But I cannot restrain my laughter. 
 
 4. These nouns take the article when they have reference 
 of any kind. 
 
 Flato, vol. iv. 31. 'Exv fxr) tfpoeiSfi nrspl tstwv THN dXij- 
 dsiav, Unless he foresee the truth concerning these things. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 It was not to be expected, that the rules now given for the 
 article should be entirely without exceptions. The first 
 are in the case of 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Words which would take the article by the preceding 
 rules, often lose it after prepositions. 
 
 Plato, xolIol nO'AIN, the city (Athens.) xar' 'ArOPA X ; 
 the Forum. 
 
 Arist. His. II. 2. ex A ggijpaive7o 5«ri KT'NA, which wore 
 withered by the dog-star. nX*)<ft'ov 0AAA'22H2, near the 
 sea. npo£ 'HAI'OT &'vovro£, at sunset 
 
 Hence it is evident, that the absence of the article, in 
 such instances, affords no presumption, that the nouns are 
 used indefinitely. Their definiteness or indefiniteness, 
 when they are used after prepositions, must be determined 
 on other grounds. 
 
 ENUMERATION. 
 
 When several nouns are coupled together by conjunc- 
 tions, or, what is equivalent, the conjunctions are omitted 
 by the figure Asyndeton, they frequently all drop the article, 
 though each taken singlv would require it. 
 
 Msck. cont. Ctes, 6SE. Kai XEIPI xai TlQSl xa< *P-- 
 
Appendix— Article. 187 
 
 MI. !> my hand and foot and voice 
 
 c D where there are only 
 
 Plato, li. 1 PI'OIX, men and 
 
 be a- 
 
 h might b( "(1 that ordinals would uniformly be 
 
 monadic. 
 
 In l first, 
 
 »ne third. 
 
 »uns 
 with wfa we with- 
 
 euth 
 
 sig- 
 
 tlie 
 
 ifETl 2THN 
 
 >' mitaiid. 
 
 Con fii ttAJ, ' <> k02, (/ 
 
 1 . When n m or ' \ 1 1 \i in th< H \< used to de- 
 
 to ii \~, 
 or to tin- N ith win- 
 
 I < > cr: lie whole 
 
 I _ 
 
 I). TON kJSm 
 
 t his who 
 
 UIA2 in tb( r is used to de- 
 
 7 individual of ih» omitted. 
 
 X' ov, they 
 
 i pery dai 
 Ptait. page :' !. ii very 
 
 art and power of man. 
 
 E und All I plural, the 
 
188 Appendix — Article . 
 
 article is inserted where there is reference ; where there ii 
 not, the usage is various. 
 
 l/ OA02. 
 
 The construction of e/ OXo£ resembles that of «%$. Whea 
 the substantive is without reference, it wants the article ; 
 and vice versa. 'Ewai/Jov 6'Xov, a whole year. e/ OXr,v 
 THN tfoXiv, die whole city. 
 
 When o'Xo£ is used in the sense of wholly or altogether, 
 the article is omitted. 
 
 Demosth. JlXatf/xa *'OAON itfiv r t jiadqxi). 
 
 O r TT02. 
 
 A noun, when joined with the pronoun ourof, always has 
 the article prefixed. TON atovov tstov, this labour ; aClrj l H 
 fxa^yj, this battle ; ravla T A drjpi'ct, these beasts. 
 
 This rule is not observed by Homer. 
 
 Proper names usually take the article, but not always. 
 
 "OAE. 
 
 What has been said of O r TT02, will, for the most part, 
 apply to %Sf. 
 
 T*i(fSs TH2 fyikipag, this day ; TON vo/xov rovSs, this law. 
 
 There are, however, instances in which the article is 
 omitted, when the noun precedes, especially if it be a pro- 
 per name. 
 
 'EKEIN02. 
 
 Nouns joined with this word, have the article in both 
 numbers, like olios, 'Exelvyjs TH2 fyxspac:, that day. 'Exs/- 
 voi£TOI2 xp°vo'Si at those times. 
 
 \\ hen this word is associated with a proper name, the 
 article is sometimes omitted, at least when the proper name 
 precedes. 
 
 On the Position of the Article* in the Concord of Substan- 
 tives and Adjectives. 
 
 1. When an adjective is preceded by the article, a sub- 
 stantive is understood, which, together with the adjective, 
 is the predicate to the article. 
 
 *0 oixaio$ is equivalent to f O iixouos ctvrjp ; and the article 
 
Appendix — Article. 
 
 'Ob* , but to ctvqp joined with 
 
 xatog. 
 
 • r the i Ijective and 
 
 both, 
 
 -pa- 
 
 i 
 
 - 
 
 v d not to 
 
 »uo. 
 
 '>".£, til*-' 
 
 IHN ... . ' '.: •?■ >ic© 
 
 .It d 
 i nine 
 
 I compn two last 
 
 In the 
 
 to mike i |>! 
 
 Bui :> ; ; : 
 
 I. H ben the i »* and adjectire havo both the ar- 
 
 invariably [>1 
 
 : to my 
 
 the ancient 
 lau 
 
 i ,?h- 
 lar the most 
 Wheil thr art: 
 
 i ticoltr thing 
 
 ted to tl • ; in 
 
 ■ 
 adjectirc % red b? the speak- 
 
1 3® Appendix — Dialects. 
 
 er to mark an emphasis or opposition. Of the first kind, an 
 instance may be found in Eph. i. 13. h Jxai «ritf7fa(favfefi 
 (ppayitf&rfis TQ.i rr-jsu^aii <r7js ^ayyiXictg TQi otyiw. In whom 
 believing, ye have been sealed with the spirit of promise — 
 the Holy One. Here tcTj flrv$ufwx7i could not be easily misun- 
 derstood ; yet the addition of rC) dlyiw absolutely limits the 
 sense. Of the second kind, an instance may be taken from 
 Demosth. (de Cor. § 27.) who exulting in having saved the 
 Chersonesus and Byzantium, exclaims emphatically, "These 
 successes 7) tfpocupscfrs *H 'E3VTH &Stfpaga7o, my counsel, 7/i/?*< , 
 has produced." 
 
 An instance where the article is repeated before the ad- 
 jective, for the sake of marking opposition, may be found, 
 John x. 11. syu si/uui o toiju^v 'O KAAO I, I am the good 
 Shepherd ; as opposed to e fjutfdw7o£, the hireling 
 
 IV. 
 DIALECTS. 
 
 The first settlers of Greece spoke a common language, 
 with probably but little diversity of pronunciation or inflec- 
 tion. Gradually, however, as the nation was divided by 
 government and local situation into different tribes, certain 
 peculiarities of dialect sprung up, both with respect to the 
 use of single letters and of particular words, forms of words, 
 inflections, and idiomatical expressions. The Greek nation 
 was first divided into two parts, the Doric and the Ionic 
 ing rise to the two fundamental dialects of the language. The 
 Dorians were more numerous, but their dialect was rou 
 A part of this tribe, however, the ^Eolians, polished the lan- 
 guage considerably, especially in the colonies situated in 
 Asia Minor. Thus the original Doric was divided into two 
 branches, the Doric and the .Eolic. There were slight pe- 
 culiarities, also, in different portions of these tribes, which 
 are called the Bosotic and Macedonian dialects. fc< 
 
 The lonians originally inhabited Attica. Colonies went 
 out from this people and settled on the shores of Asia Mi- 
 nor, where their language was very greatly softened and im- 
 proved. Those who remained at home were called the .4/- 
 fics ; and, after the establishment of free institutions, their 
 
\UcU — Attic. 
 
 ined than that of 
 
 i of the early 
 
 in which 
 
 ward the 
 
 the Ionic 
 
 I 
 
 an- 
 in t 1 
 
 of 
 
 I 
 
 ami 
 I 
 
 ii all 
 iiich 
 . hut 
 
 ATTh 
 
 iiiar 
 
 i'octs, 
 
19i 
 
 Appendix — Dialects — Attic . 
 
 PROPERTIES. 
 
 1. Contraction 
 I. Of syllables in the sa.me word ; as, 
 
 . } into a. See Obs. 19. 
 as ^ 
 
 aai \ 
 
 .. > ... 71 10. 
 
 Tjai J 
 
 o.si ... 7) 9. 
 
 ao into w. See Obs. J 1. 
 
 aw . . . gj 19. 
 
 U V 6. 
 
 fa ' ' I n 6, 20. 
 
 ss ...-/] 6. 20. 
 
 so \ 
 
 7)0 \ ... * 11. 
 
 no J 
 
 su . . . w 5. 
 
 To this Dialect properly belong 
 verbs. 
 
 2. Of Syllables in different words 
 there are six species ; viz. 
 
 a 
 
 W2 
 
 Apocope, as 
 
 Aphceresis, as 
 
 Synaeresis, as 
 Crasis, as 
 
 Apocope k ) 
 Synaeresis, $ 
 Apocope &, 
 , Crasis, 
 
 <ro «pv'piov 
 <rS dvdpog 
 <rw djady 
 
 tyi '/jjuipa 
 7j ciy^affct 
 <ra Bpyc 
 
 TW OCVTpCuJ 
 
 ou fvsxa 
 «ro Ifjianov 
 to sXa^i(f7ov 
 
 I- is 
 
 oj s ( ao; 
 
 all contract nouns and 
 by Synalcepha, of which 
 
 <r av 
 
 r' dyad'Z. 
 Qriix trips. 
 ^,a>;pa. 
 jcra. 
 r rtpy-a. 
 "p:j. 
 ouvsxoc. 
 
 doijXtt-TIOV. 
 
 TuXu^dlov. 
 
 i oCfJLOI. 
 
 \ Attic 
 
Appendix — Dialects — Attic. 
 
 193 
 
 Contractions of the Article, the Pronoun Jyw, Conjunc- 
 tion xoi, and the Preposition irpo. 
 
 Article. 
 
 ; 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 ~ 
 
 L 
 
 ro 
 
 
 / a,ff,o 
 
 70 
 
 
 lis 
 
 TO OiXi <• 
 i 
 
 'to ovo/Jia 
 rw *£ar6\Xwvo$ 
 <?a r* {7f p* 
 
 
 5 <! 
 
 <« 
 
 j/JLOi. 
 
 • '>I0V. 
 
 -Xo. 
 
 act. 
 
 da7/p* . 
 
 Before 
 
 .fJUZJ 
 
 /pr^fv 
 
 
 Kal. 
 
 I 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 01 
 
 u 
 
 > into xa ? 
 
 V ' { XOi it 
 
 xa 
 
 XOi 
 
 xou' f v 
 
 XOi 
 
 xt; xou ijfjuv 
 
 5a. 
 
 J-OJ. 
 
 I 
 
 Attic. 
 
 xcrv. 
 xa7a. 
 
 I xuvov. 
 
 Before an aspirate, x is changed into x it M » 
 
 ; Attic. 
 
 XOi 
 X04 >) 
 
 xoj *} ay^stfa 
 
 X' W* 
 
 
 * 'O before , makes sometimes \ m ; * ''*•'• *:'<"< • 
 /onic Dia! 
 
 17 
 
1 94 Appendix — Dialects — Attic, 
 
 ITpo. 
 
 Before w, a, irpotxpeiXeg, ^pk^iksg, 
 au, wu, crpoauOav, <7rpwi/6av. 
 
 
 II. 
 
 Change of Letter or Syllable ; as. 
 
 
 7 
 
 into 
 
 fr 
 
 as yXifruv, 
 
 pX^ojv. 
 
 
 x 
 
 
 5 7, 
 
 -- fto'Xi^, 
 
 fjLO^ir 
 
 
 
 
 xXij8avo£, 
 
 xp//3avo£. 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 - - 
 
 <r, 
 
 cri^aj&.aai, 
 
 Taai. 
 
 
 V 
 
 - - 
 
 \ 
 
 crvsJjLtojv, 
 
 crXfJj&wv. 
 
 
 
 
 r** 
 
 efCfc, 
 
 Mfc. 
 
 
 
 
 Iff, 
 
 tfjV, 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 - - 
 
 <pi 
 
 — daptf^ 
 
 da^en/. 
 
 
 
 
 f T, 
 
 ( tf-^spov, 
 I Tpatffl'&j, 
 
 : OOV. 
 
 
 
 
 \ ' 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 - - 
 
 *; 
 
 Xao£, 
 
 Xew£. 
 
 . 2 Obs 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 f iXaa, 
 
 VXsgj. 
 
 o 
 
 a i 
 
 - - 
 
 w, 
 
 — ? <ra, Fem. Art. 
 
 TW.t 
 
 
 6 \ 
 
 
 
 ( Xaoc;. 
 
 ; . . 
 
 . 2. 5. 
 
 g 
 
 - - 
 
 •j 
 
 •critfSjUL^a, 
 
 RfefAfB. . 
 
 . 15. 
 
 
 
 <«, 
 
 Ev(p\)r,, 
 
 t. * 
 
 4. 
 
 *) 
 
 w - 
 
 {*, 
 
 x^yjtfofJLai, 
 
 .'TO/XOU. J 
 
 
 
 
 (•■ 
 
 csV»jda, 
 
 - 
 
 . 16. 
 
 / 
 
 
 w, 
 
 eixa, 
 
 Diphthong. 
 
 m. 
 
 . 17. 
 
 aei 
 
 into 
 
 *l 
 
 page 18. 
 
 
 
 cti 
 
 - - 
 
 *l 
 
 xXafejv, 
 
 xXa'civ, 
 
 
 fj 
 
 - . 
 
 7>> 
 
 — xteTSag, 
 
 j&xg. 
 
 . . 6. 
 
 01 1 
 
 - - 
 
 W> 
 
 t, xXoio's, 
 ( Tjpwivrj, 
 
 f/pcjvr]. 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 /.) 
 
 — Xocs, 
 
 Xfui. 
 
 o 
 
 A 
 
 
 w, 
 
 Syllable. 
 
 
 
 vutiav 
 
 . - 
 
 v7wv 
 
 rv-^txiutfav, 
 
 cu^avrwv. 
 
 
 IX\ 
 
 - - 
 
 1)V, 
 
 — fStUfAl, 
 
 fiowriv. 
 
 M. 
 
 VjtfOL 
 
 
 *, 
 
 yvoiijtfav, 
 
 jvoifv. 
 
 . 8 
 
 *■ Busby, after Joh. Grammaticus. reverses this instance, making 
 Ba^oCtv Baphuv ; but greater authorities are against them. 
 t See Article. 
 X In common with the Baotic, 
 
I 
 
 III. Insertion o/"v, o, cj, in P 
 
 17. 
 
 IV 
 
 Syn cope. 
 
 * in <>bs. 
 
 1 I. 
 
 x i: 
 
 'iral IMiij 
 
 i fov, Imperil 
 
 # i.. 
 
 \ I \gc. 
 
 i in I Uons ; ;> 
 
 jular of Verbs ; as, -%pr<rda. 
 
 . I ■ 
 
 VII, lj 
 
 and 
 
 I. I lcn- 
 
 ; and ll n ao$ f 
 
 //* /c \. ; ,: .,. . . ) , .-, . . 
 
 I 
 
 the 
 
1 96 Appendix — Dialects— Attic. 
 
 Contracts. 
 
 4. In the first form of contracts, the accusative singular 
 of Adjectives in ns pure is contracted into a ; as ; svfe'a, ev- 
 <$ea. Page 19. 
 
 Proper names of this declension, it forms after the 1st de- 
 clension ; and one appellative dxivaxr^. Page 
 
 5. In the 2d and 3d, it makes the genitive singular in w£, 
 contracting that from fug pure ; as, x 20. 
 
 6. In the 3d, it contracts the accusative singular into r. 
 and the N. A. V. plural into r,g ; but s-jg pure has both accu- 
 satives in a ; as, x o6CL > X°* 5 X 0£a S* X°"S- Tpopas also occurs. 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 7. It forms comparisons by -idlspog, -V<r7a7o£ ; -aHcpoc, -: 
 V ; and, in common with the Ioh 
 
 Pronouns. 
 
 8. See Rule V. (Syncope.) 
 
 It uses ^aJoj in the 2d person, and tav%g for : 
 
 Verbs. 
 
 9. In contracts £aw, Oi-^aw, rrfjvacj, crrpiCaw, and / 
 after the Doric mariner. 
 
 10. It contracts aai, sai, ijcu, made by the Ionic Syncope, 
 into r\ in the second person singular of the Present Indica- 
 tive passive and middle of Verbs in fx; 
 
 tuGrfiai, r i<flr), - And sometimes in that of the Per- 
 
 fect Passive of Baryton- 
 
 11. It contracts the Ionic aw into w ; 
 
 the second person singular of the Imperfect Indicative : and 
 of the Present and Second Aorist Imperative passive and 
 middle of Verbs in pu 
 
 12. In the first Future of polysyllables in i£gj, it drops tf ; 
 as, s\ix& ; Middle, iX^^xai. It does the same by the 
 2Cgj. stfw, ocrw, which are afterwards contracted ; 
 
 But sx^w, uncontracted occurs, Joel ii. 28. 
 
 13. It affects the augment 6 different ways. 
 
 14. It syncopates the 1st Aorist ; as, slpalo for 5 
 *yup*L for sya!xr}<fa. By tlie Ionic it is made ^r^aa, which is 
 most in use. 
 
 15. In dissyllable perfects in pet, x«, it changes 5 ini 
 
 16. It changes r\ into o, according to some grammarians, 
 in the Perfect Active of obsolete verbs 
 
 . inserting v But they are better derived 
 ^n the table of anomalous Verbs, 
 
197 
 
 In the ami P: Eliot, aveijjLai ; 
 
 iddle iWa, it changes i into u ; as, 
 
 U retained ; as, 
 
 \ccordii: ■ change, but an in- 
 
 . hich :*- to sanction. 
 
 t inserts 
 sa- 
 te* x in t! live, 
 and ( £(f7ax6jc: - t 
 
 allowing \uw- 
 
 .rav. 
 — 7f, i(f1a — <fav. 
 
 I 34 
 
 recti into 
 n, ne % n ; as, 
 
 as, 
 
 i ^escwtfo plural of 
 
 • I in the 
 1st Aonst on uliar 
 
 oged i nt i * &. except in the 
 a is changed into w, u into *, and * of the 
 as, 
 
 Barytons. 
 Pres. «vr7 
 2d Aor. n*r 
 
 utracts. 
 ) -a 
 
 MM&y Kin 
 
 I not always ia 
 aw. 
 
 } * ,! by reason of the preceding I 
 
198 
 
 Appendix — Dialects. — Attic 
 
 Verbs in /xi. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 2d A. 
 
 ► -rwd'av,- 
 
 v7wv. 
 
 23. In the 3d plural of the Imperative passive and n 
 die, it syncopates tfa ; as, 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Pres.*WK<rtw 
 
 Perf. rsTu(p6u) }> »cfeny 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 lstA.Tu^affdw 
 
 24. In the Optative active of BarytOQfl and Contract- 
 is changed into yjv ; as, 
 
 voioT* j 
 
 The persons are varied in all the tenses, as in the 
 passive of this mood : 
 
 TUirloi \ -r,v, r,g 9 r t . 
 
 /3ow \ rjlov, 
 
 tfoior* ) -^wV, r's. rfiox. 
 
 25. It uses the 2d and 3d singular, and the 3d plural of 
 the .Eolic Aorists. 
 
 26. It changes oi, the penultima of the Optative active of 
 verbs in jxi, from ogj into w ; as, &<)oiV, &£ofop. 
 
 27. It syncopates y\ in eirj^sv, sirfls, of the Aorists passive 
 Optative of Barytons,and peculiar tenses of verbs in jjli of the 
 same mood ; also in ccitjju^v, on^tv, of the latter ; and. in 
 both, changes yda in the 3d plural into s ; as, 
 
 1st Aor. ru^&sP 
 
 \ -^fxffv, -rtfe, -rjtfav, Attic, -u 
 
 * The Doric moreover changes »< of the penultima into ? ; tfl 
 
 2d Aor. 
 
 trvtfsi 
 
 Pres. 
 
 T&rf 
 
 ?d Aor 
 
 Srd 
 
 Pres. 
 
 I<f1ai 
 
 2d Aor. 
 
 (f7ai 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Ol&l 
 
 2d Aor. 
 
 $01 
 
.'</>•. Pi .v, Isocra 
 
 into 
 / Plato, and Aristo- 
 
 phanes u 
 
 [OR 
 
 I >ialect was to the colonies of 
 
 • 1 the adj 
 
 the Auic 
 Dial* frequently by 
 
 'jr. 
 
 PROFERTn 
 
 It i stin 
 
 ntractions. 
 
 — 
 
 n 
 
 
 1 1 . Syncope of 
 
 liiquc cases. 
 
 p -irticularly tlio^c 
 
>00 
 
 Appendix — Dialects — Ionic . 
 
 i in many words ; as, riXeov, -sfXe'wv, fJ^wv, swv for fi'wv, inx- 
 perf. of saw. 
 
 tf in second persons of Verbs, 
 x in the Perfect active. 
 
 III. Epenthesis of 
 a before terminations of Verbs. 
 
 s before terminations of Nouns and Verbs, of some in all 
 cases ; as, udsXaosog, xttrtfg xaiverig. 1. 4, 
 
 i in dual cases and many Nouns 5 as, rffavog, zaroirj for tfo'a. 5. 
 u ; as^ouXug. 
 ou before a and r\ ; as, tfeXsvas'a, 'Adrjvajyj, ctvayxaiV. 
 
 IV. Prosthesis of 
 
 s before many words ; as, fcif, gwv. 
 Reduplication in many tenses. 
 
 V. Aphceresis of 
 
 s ; as, 6p7>j, xeTvog. 
 
 tf ; as, xs&x£w, fxiXctg. 
 
 t ; as, >Jyavov. 
 
 X ; as, sl/Serai, or "ksifierou. 
 
 Augment. 
 
 VI. Paragogc of 
 a in the Perfect middle 
 
 12 
 
 12. 
 
 as, yaw, ys'yijxa, P. M. 757a. 
 ysyaa. 
 
 tfi in the third persons of verbs. 
 
 Change of letter or syllable. 
 
 into £ 
 
 — ov 
 
 6 
 
 It 
 
 !/3apa0pov 
 •nrsqjuyws 
 5opxa5sg 
 
 vols 
 
 flskpog 
 a<pixnf/.sv 
 
 ov X i 
 
 * Change of vowel and consonant. 
 The rough into the smooth. 
 
 Ionic. 
 
 £spedpov. :V 
 s°P xa 
 
 [3v<f dag. 
 xoslv. 
 xotog. 
 *<5sxc" 
 
 rs7spo£. 
 
 dtfJXOJXSV . 
 
 Ssxopai. 
 
Appendix — Dialects — Ionic . 
 
 201 
 
 The smooth and aspirate mute reciprocally ; as, 
 
 into 
 
 
 111. 
 
 
 
 
 . a^avTi 
 
 
 j8aty*> / 
 
 
 V :>tt<?paxo$. 
 
 
 W)aZboL \ 
 
 /onir. ; 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 x :, p* f 
 
 
 'pyj. 
 
 
 s jSapadpov 
 
 
 
 \ J pev. 
 
 6 
 
 >1 ia7pof 
 
 
 
 c£. 
 
 4 
 
 ^Xov 
 
 
 
 \ov. 
 
 
 jlo£ 
 
 
 
 **. 
 
 
 w XP f,a 
 
 
 
 ric*. 
 
 
 
 
 
 WW, 
 
 
 »] fXSplT;&v7o£ 
 
 
 
 
 Y7i*i 
 
 
 
 i<f7r»}. 
 
 
 cj rXicj 
 
 
 
 tX^ 
 
 
 u /8»€Xo$ 
 
 
 fbft 
 
 
 oj &upo 
 
 
 
 pw. 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 Kf|. 
 
 
 w rpa^ua 
 
 
 
 xa. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 i \pitf7a^ 
 
 opav 
 
 
 
 *1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ( 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 f 
 
 
 "a. 
 
 
 OB> 
 
 iral. 
 
 contract* 
 
 nns. 
 -/. of all terminate 
 al and N. \. \ . plui the 
 
 article 
 
202 Appendix — Dialects — Ionic. 
 
 subjunctive vowel ; a of the genitive into e«, av and ?jv of 
 the accusative sing, into sa, and as of the plural into sag — 
 N. G. D. A. G. D. 
 
 1. Sing. /Sops -rjs, -su* -r), 7)v or -s'a. PI. s'wv, -;/}£, or -jj'cfi or 
 -aid. A. sa£. 
 
 5. In the 2d, it changes a of the genitive sing, into oio, 
 (and in the Article, which is of this declension, into ew, 
 whose dative also is in cw,) and oi of the dual into ou, 
 
 G. G. D. ' G. D. G. D. 
 
 Sing. X6^-oio. Du. -om/. PI. -sgjv, -oiVi. Sing.coTb andTs'w,Tfcj. 
 
 6. In the 3d, by syncopating 6 and r it makes -i£, -*<5o£, 
 -a^, -a7o$, of the 2d and 5th of the contracts. Btr-ithg, -io$. 
 
 Contracts. 
 
 7. In the 1st and 2d form of contracts, the genitive and 
 dative sing, and in the 3d, all cases have s of the penultima 
 
 G. D. G. D. 
 
 changed into r\. 1. Sing.. "Ap-r,o£, r,i. 2. cr6X-?]o£, -r,i. In 
 
 G. D. A. 
 ■the 3d form of contracts : Sing. /3a<fiX-yj©s, -fy, 9ja. Dual, 
 N. A.G. D. N. V. G. D. A. 
 
 -r}6 9 -rjoiv. Plur. -*;££, -»jwv, ~r t <fi, -r t ag. 
 
 8. In the 4th, it makes the accusative in av ; as, Arjriv. 
 
 G. 
 0. In the 5th, it changes a of the penultima into s. xs'p 
 D. 
 -si, &c. 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 10. In the feminine sia from u$, i is syncopated in every 
 
 N. G. 
 
 case ; as, og-»* or -s'/], -sag or 5r,£. 
 
 Pronouns. 
 
 11. It insferts s before every termination of olToc, and aJ- 
 rog with its compounds ; G. re7&, D. au7g«. Less frequent- 
 ly when au is changed into wu :t N. &i)7o$, A. uuJov, particu- 
 larly in the compounds ; D. c: ; but IwuKjc, and 
 its contracted form huliz for a-J7S, also occur. 
 
 12. It removes the augment syllabic and temporal. — Bs- 
 tp'^xsi, ax#f$, sojda,} Herodot. Sometimes the reduplic:. 
 only ; as, Ixrfyxai ; sometimes both ; as, - 
 
 yyrplou, and from the Pluperf. both augments ; as, XjJ7o for 
 
 * Bopiu in Hesiod,by Syncope, for t hpciu. 
 
 See Rule I. Example 1st. 
 J On the supposition that w is an insertion, and not a change of/. 
 The augment of this verb is <. 
 
/ — Dialects — Ionic. 203 
 
 . it reduplicates the Pres. Imperf. 
 • »t h the I - .Tk 4 >j- 
 
 <Tw, xsxofjwj, xexpar 
 
 nd the 3d Plur. 
 of th< by annexing xov, 
 
 ely, dropping 
 I id contract* wing the long 
 
 VO\M ifJti. 
 
 
 !iim<tn. 
 
 
 
 Imp* 
 
 MVr" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 id 
 
 
 \or. 
 
 In*} 
 
 -xs. — xov. 
 
 \ur. 
 
 fiv- 
 
 
 
 
 ft%* 
 
 
 
 
 **, 
 
 
 
 nave and ,v7o; 
 
 11 In liquid verbs, 
 
 and three 
 
 the hitmitiw 
 ?o in the Dual and lMur. 
 
 Tov, -ftlti Part. 
 
 -^*<Ta, -fov In l] 
 
 * aim I N*//v- 
 
 jutu' rucgofx^ frfdov, 
 
 -V ; -flftife, -£€(f^c I'ut. 
 
 ■d shortens 
 
 In the PlO] changes, ei*, 
 
 fi$, fi, into to . 
 
 17. It 1 nd x in the and 
 
 Bubjand 
 
 !* the Per: 
 middle, and the k bjoncthre mood, it 
 
 anin as, 
 
 D the Infin " odot. 
 
 bout the augment ; as, rir~ 
 
204 
 
 Appendix — Dialects — Ionic. 
 
 Active. Passive. 
 
 Pres. riiflyitfi. 1st Aor. tu^y^i* 
 
 Perf. reTtipjuti. 2d Aor. riflrijCi.* 
 
 1st Aor. rv-^rfii. Middle. 
 
 2d Aor. r(>*rfi%. Perf. ritirtyflu 
 
 Sometimes in the Indicative ; as, <pops»j<ri for (po'pssi. 
 
 19. In the 2d Sing, of the 1st Aorist middle, it resolves 
 w into ao ; as, iru^-u), -olo. 
 
 20. In all tenses of the Indicative and Optative, whose 
 3d ^ing. ends in ron or to, it forms the 3d Plur. by inserting 
 a before those terminations respectively, and, ©f the next 
 preceding letters, shortening the long vowel, dropping the 
 Subjunctive of the diphthong, (except in the Optative,) 
 changing the smooth mute into the rough, and <? into the 
 characteristic of the 2d Aorists S or & $ as, 
 
 Pres. & Perf 
 
 '. Sing. Plur. Imp. L 
 
 Plup.Plur 
 
 rotfls 
 
 tvjtIs 
 
 IWfc 
 
 
 tscplXri 
 
 •3TS(plXg 
 
 irteqn>J 
 
 
 xe^p'Jtfw 
 
 xe^putfo 
 
 sxc^puCo 
 
 
 xsT 
 
 X£ 
 
 Us 
 
 
 xsxoXs 
 
 xsxoXo 
 
 SXcXoXo 
 
 
 s^aX 
 
 , -<rai i-s^aX 
 
 „ -arai i-yuX 
 
 l -aro . 
 
 relwr 
 
 <rslu(p 
 
 sis'. 
 
 
 Xs'Xsx 
 
 XsXg'^ 
 
 i\s\^x 
 
 
 <r£<ppatf 
 
 a"/;(ppct(> 
 
 ^pkS \ 
 
 C£crX7)a' 
 
 rtSKXati 
 
 i*eir\ctd J 
 
 
 When a precedes those terminations, instead of inserting 
 another a after it, this dialect inserts an e before it ; as, 
 3 Sing. 3 Plur. 3 Sing. 3 Plur. 
 
 8Cv ) iSuv 
 
 fjuY/^ctv J -a7ai, ealcu i^riyav } -aro, -c'a7o. 
 avatfsV? 
 
 i- 
 
 otvsiwr 
 
 21. 
 
 In common with the Doric, it contracts Verbs in aw 
 into j) ; as, oprjs, 6p»i, op/jv. 
 
 22. In the contract tenses of Verbs in aw, it inserts e after 
 contraction ; as, ^pswfjuai, g^^avgwfjiTjv ; Imperat. XP 5 
 but oftener changes a into e ; as, ^pso/jtai, opso/xai. Some- 
 times in the Tresent Subjunctive passive of Barytons ; as. 
 
 * Also rv<pOirioi, Tvtpijjffi. See Observatiou 21 . 
 t xpf* occurs in Hippocrates, the Ionic of xf£, imperative of xtf 9 ?* 1 
 forxpdopai. 
 
< ndix — Dialects — Doric. 205 
 
 a. Also 
 
 hi fxi from 
 
 at aiul t: of those 
 
 from «:*. and :u in tin '«. n- 
 
 • tunes in the 2d person middle 
 I 
 
 It . - i • and middle 
 
 Of \ J.I. 
 
 ural of I Q ui 
 
 diph- 
 
 I 
 
 into uj . ,<Su\ 
 
 ■ 
 
 and 
 
 I n in the redupl 
 
 ■ 
 
 DORK 
 
 Jos ; 
 
 It was hI.Ioih il 
 
 I I and >.ai, when prefixed to vowels and 
 
 dipbiboi 
 
 \\. 
 
 tla. 
 
 cS 
 
 ri ■:. r& u * 
 
 18 
 
^06 Appendix— Dialects — Doric. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Doric. 
 
 roc ayxio^pa, 
 
 T6J7xi(f7pa. 
 
 <ra o(f7sa, 
 
 W(f7sa. 
 
 xai sgatf/V/js, 
 
 x'flgar'vr*. 
 
 "tod si'nrz, 
 
 lejr*. 
 
 xa/ o "A<5wv*£, 
 
 ^' oj^ajvig. 
 
 xa/ 6 sx, 
 
 x' * '*• 
 
 xai s'fjus' 
 
 xfyji. 
 
 Other contractions ;" 
 as into *j ?%itf. ) 
 asi — 7] rpris. } 
 sa — *) xp??s, (pprflt. 
 so — su dsug, "Apsug, /SaCiXnJf, Gen. 
 oa — w /3wxa£. 
 
 II. Change of Letter or Syllable ; as, 
 y into 5 5a, 5av.* 
 * ( 4/^0^,* sV*fJLr^^, datfos. 
 
 {t Qsfxilog, 'Ap7t'|iii7oj. 4. 
 
 , tf<5 (fuptV5w, fjLaa'66^. 
 5 yu/xvaiw, £s'5w, by Metathesis, i'pSw. 
 88 fjux<56a, XP?1^ W » a ^ so &olic. 
 ' t 6pi'7wv. 
 
 ' <rc tfupir7w, <ppar7cj, /3pi^ar7oj. 
 ,5 av^yjpa, Ajjm£pi£. 
 £ufx£paio£. 
 
 crapfle'vos, iX'o(fi88u* (fiog. 
 avrj7ov. xXa?tf7pov.* 
 (pyjp, (pXiSojmai. 
 wy&og, swyp^v for ioixajAev. 
 rsivof, <r*}voc;,* for sxs?vo£. 
 <piv7i£, ^vflov, xsV?o for xs'Xs7o.J 
 (pavpog. 
 
 jSuptfi'vij, /3i;p ( ae/g.* 
 ru«rtof**£, xaXac;,* fjusfe, also-JSo/ 
 Sj^€oX>i, dfx^Xaxia. 
 juuixxoj for fjuixpog-. 
 
 * Words to which the asterism is affixed, undergo some change of 
 another letter. 
 
 t When r or 6 follows. 
 $ £ee yirro in the JEolic. 
 
 & 
 
 - < 
 
 
 r 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 - 18 
 
 V 
 
 — <r 
 
 - f3 
 
 P 
 
 X 
 
' .r — Dialects— Di 
 
 
 
 csppaOjxou. 
 
 rixa 
 
 I 
 
 rpa^u, rp 
 
 Jov. 
 
 23. 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 111. 
 
 j Da, *aa- 
 
 ;gc. 
 t <u was used for the ancient and Attic tyai % tiarb 
 
 me from verbs in aw made c# by 
 
 ( By ai icope for flia'car 
 
208 Appendix — Dialects — Doric, 
 
 i rfaflsg, rCtflsv, rihsvh.* 15, 17. 
 
 v SiSovli* 17. 
 
 oj tfpav for tfp&ijv.* 
 
 (f otf&ev for oVi<r$Sv. 
 
 IV. Epenthesis of 
 
 a vaua7ai. 
 
 / Tu-s^fi-rov, -rs ; Tu%J,si-<rai ; ri^oug* 16. 
 
 <f TimlojULStfSa. 20- 
 
 V. Apkceresis of 
 
 Ss in Xw, X^, X>j. 
 
 VI. Ilap for tfapa, <xv for ava. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 M.F. 
 
 1. It makes the nominative plural of the Article toi, rai. 
 
 Declensions. 
 
 2. In the 1st, it changes s of the Gen. singular, w of the 
 Gen. plural, and r\ of every termination, into a. Sometimes 
 also the Gen. plural of the 2d and 3d ; as, 
 
 N.G. D.A. V. G. 
 
 tfsXwv-i 
 dp ST • 
 
 3. Proper names in ao£ have o syncopated, and are de- 
 
 N. G. D. 
 
 clined after the 1st ; as, for MsviX-ao$, -s, &c. Msv=X-as, -a. 
 A. V. 
 -av, -a. 
 
 In this declension, it changes a into w ; that of the accu- 
 sative plural sometimes into c, and rejects the i subscript of 
 the dative ; as, 
 
 G. D. G. A. 
 
 Sing. Xoy-w, -cj Plur. -av.t -«g or -og. 
 
 It also changes s into w in the Norn and Accu. Sing, and 
 Nom Ace. Voc. Plur. contracted of the 3d ; as, N. /8wff, 
 Ace. /3wv. Plur N. A V. /3w$. 
 
 4. It changes o into <r in Nouns in £, -i jgc : as. 
 
 Gen'. &8firi7os, u^pi7o£, \Ap7ijjif.- 
 
 -a, -as, $ ' 
 
 * Third singular, 1st future middle. 
 t This infrequent. 
 
I rndix— Dialects — Doric. 209 
 
 Contra* 
 It changes tj and su of the Norn, and Voc. of the 1st 
 
 v. N. \ 
 and vocally ; -£. Eo 
 
 or * of al 
 
 lg. of the Uli 
 lom. Plur. out the l >t. Ew of all 
 
 into a: 
 
 In 
 i. it chai 
 dual and plural- 
 
 ( changes c into 
 
 . illi u 01 
 cd : r au7- 
 
 » tJie 
 I 
 
 b and >),: 
 
 ^^rp^ — aft 
 « — 
 
 bs. 
 
 it, into 
 re ; as, (fupitfxw, yvf/LveuJw, ctmoflcj, opi7«, <pp<x7- 
 
 It rnak< 
 
 -», C£*«;JCW, <5sO0»XW, X 
 
 I 1 . It changes rf, the Future 
 
 vc. 
 
2 1 Appendix — Dialects — Doric . 
 
 12. It changes s in the penultima of the 1st Future and 
 1st Aorists of verbs in w pure, into oi ; as, cfattMftj, axoitfov. 
 
 13. It changes r\ in the penultima of the 1st Future and 
 1st Aorists Perfect and Pluperfect into a ; as, vpiXatfw, ili^a- 
 tfa, TS^vaxa, f/,s'<xvajuuxi, g/xsjAva^v. 
 
 14. It changes si the augment, formed by annexing i, into 
 y\ without a subscript ; as, ^ov, ^Xxov. 
 
 lo. It syncopates \ in the 2d and 3d persons singular of 
 the Present Indicative active, and in every tense of the In- 
 finitive ending in siv ; as, <rjcr7-g£, -£, 
 
 16. It circumflexes the 1st Future active and middle, and 
 forms it like the 2d ; as, 
 
 Act. TU-vj^W, -S?£, -£?, -Sj'7oV. • > U.Sv.t - 
 
 , -x \ v7i. 
 V 
 
 Mid. Tu-^-Sjxai, -Sj, -gIVai. -ifxs^ov, -g?: 
 
 17. It changes v into rf in the 1st person plural of all ten- 
 ses Indicative and Subjunctive active, and of the 2d Aorists 
 Subjunctive passive : also tf into vr in the 3d plural, drop- 
 ping the subjunctive vowel of the preceding diphthong. 
 cept in the 2d future 
 
 fj.sc;. &c. tJ-7t7ov7i,j ru>}/ov7i.J 
 
 rucr7cjv7i, tu-4/wv7i, Pass- rwv7i. 
 
 18. It changes oiintow in the penultima of Barytons and 
 Contracts of the Optative active, whose termination \xi, the 
 Affic had before changed into up ; as. Attic 
 
 ^pucTo/Tjv ; Doric, tW^hjv, qroi6M)v, ^putfcn 
 
 It also often changes s of the penultima both of Con- 
 tracts and Barytons into 8u, sometimes into oi ; as, Active, 
 cpiX-su/xsc:, -suv7i. Imp ftpiXfSv, Tu^stf/xs^, 
 or -suv7i or -ov7i. Part. TW&flF&efa. (piXs-jv. Pass, and Mid. c 
 jxai. 1st Fut. aXeufxai. Imperat. qjiXs-j — Also flw7wfl*i, 1st 
 Fut. Ti^oKfi. Particip. rfarTwtftt. g is sometimes inserted in 
 the Subjunctive ; as, jtfopgorf-ojtfi, -g'wv7i ; tfuv7i Ar- 
 
 chimcdes. 
 
 19. tft changes" ?j into a in most tenses of the Indicative 
 and Optative passive and middle : also of Verbs in jaj end- 
 
 * See Obs. 18, and Note to the same. 
 
 i See Obs. 18. 
 
 J This person is likr the dative plural of the Participle of the a 
 tense : but the Doric Dialect makes it like the dative singular. 
 
 § The 2d future commonly retains the v. if the penultima be 
 .'hanged into tv or oi but not always. 
 
Apj 
 
 >11 
 
 in ry ; as, IWofM 
 
 pax . o a. 
 
 ts a in tlic 1st person plural passive ; as. 
 
 In the king <r in the 
 
 oas. 
 It con f Don with the 
 
 the u contracted into 
 
 ular 
 
 i into a, and 
 
 Sub- 
 as, 
 
 
 
 - 
 6! 60 
 
 
 IK in 
 
 r a in the mascuhne and feminine of 
 
 ; but tli- ined 
 
 1U. 
 
 Writ! 
 
 igoras, Pindar, Theocritus, 
 
 {piodfifiivaii aft' 
 
2 1 2 Appendix — Dialects — JEolic. 
 
 Bion, Moschus, Callimachus, and the Tragedian$]in the 
 Choruses. 
 
 JEOLIC. 
 
 This Dialect was used in Bceotia. Lesbos, and JEolia in 
 Asia Minor. It is a branch of the Doric, and has some 
 changes in common with it. 
 
 PROPERTIES. 
 
 I. Change of the rough into the smooth breathing ; as, 
 
 To compensate the loss of the aspirate, it sometimes pre- 
 fixes j3 to p when the next syllable begins with £, x, <$, or c ; 
 as, /3p»£a, /3paxo£, /3p6<5ov, /3prj7wp. It sometimes prefixes 7 
 to a vowel ; as, y£v7o for ?v*o, Doric for sX7o, by Syncope for 
 s'Xs7o, which is by the Ionic Dialect for sfkslo. 
 
 II. Change of Letter or Syllable : 
 
 
 /Sinlo J 7 Z"*""* 7*"W«* 
 
 /3<xp|xi7o 
 5 — ' /3 ^X*jp,* fithpks, fis)jfiivss. 
 y — tf S] rpoL&etfia, tfSsug. 
 
 $ — (p (pXiow. 
 
 , — ^ tfejjo^og for ^spio^og. 
 
 H^ — -^ tfs7ut, ow^fa7a, aXi^j'ztfa for aX?i/xa. See 
 
 Rule IV. 
 v — tf jAffe, ygXct'i'g,} u^oib.| 
 5 — tfxj (fxsvog, tfK/(po^. 
 
 i (p (psptfs(p6vra. 
 ^7 — tftf zsirftfw, oWw, viWw. 
 ' v <rs7u(pwv. 
 p £7op, isfntop, tfitfop,! Ttfap, Ciop,J for 
 *7o£, iWog, tf i^os, tfs<:, Seo£. 
 T — # <f#oX?jv, tirtciksig, tfffASff. 
 y — <p a\)(psva. 
 J, — tftfJtfsraXXiw, tftfaXkiSu. 
 
 tt 
 
 * For £Asap. 
 
 £ f is 3« ) ) ,* 
 
 t An ^"Eolic resolution of < f - *<r > by Metathesis ^ <r*r 
 
 f ^ - TTC ) > cr 
 
 t Words that undergo a complicated ciiangc. 
 
 
— JEolic. 213 
 
 added. 
 
 ot into 
 
 y 
 
 ffjpxa£. 
 
 k ai \aiva, «-a\aiva. 
 
 v 
 
 -ap. 
 4 a 
 
 { o G 
 
 — cu $- 
 
 : 
 
 — 
 
 t 
 
 » ' — r 
 
 III. Prosthesis 
 (3 before p. 
 
 ■ 
 
 11 1. 
 [V. f 
 
 Jljn nth 
 | 
 
 Particip '.so of the i Sub- 
 
 pt 
 
 u after - r when folio another I \ for 
 
 .'• ; : 
 
 d dnivaios are of &o\ on, from yovfj and tyoroeiV 
 
 f in the au^ 
 
214 Appendix — Dialects — JEolic. 
 
 A consonant to compensate the loss of the aspirate ; as, 
 allies , vfwss. 
 
 A consonant when the vowel or diphthong preceding is 
 shortened ; as, x7ivvw, <pSs||w, s^a, ip^i, irev$s<f<fr)s, ri&fifu, 
 aXrztfora. 
 
 tf in Futures in Xw, pw. 
 
 /3 in dXi€5Jsiv, IXaSov. 
 
 V. Syncope of 
 
 y in dXio$, fug, (pop/xi^. 
 
 tf — fxwa, Tact. 
 
 1 — «X a ^» ^a^afe ; also i Subscript ; as. 
 
 o — jii/jtfa, /3uX>7, "IXa. 
 
 v — 'Opavo£, Hupaxotftfai. 
 
 VI. Paragogc of 
 
 v to the accusative singular of the 4lh of the Contracts ; 
 
 as, Atj7wv. 
 
 OBSERVATIOI 
 
 1. It changes r t g in the nominative of the 1st declension 
 into a ; as, eoiqla, xof*i)7a ; and a of the genitive singular 
 
 into ao ; as, 'Epasiao. It inserts a in the . plural of 
 
 the first declension ; i in the 
 
 accusative of those ending in a and /-,. 
 
 2. In the da jular of the 2d, it omil bsoript ; 
 as, Xo'yw ; and el * of the accusative plural into 
 
 3. in the 1st form of Contracts, it rejects s from the 
 cative singular in sg ; as, 2wxpa7s, Amfafot 
 
 4. In the 4th, it makes the genitive singular and 
 the accusative in wv ; as, G. ali r \ 
 
 It makes of genitive cases a now nominative of ano* 
 declension, from winch it forms its cases : as, of 
 the genitive, it makes a nominative, from wlnV 
 the dative plural- So pAsXavs from y.:Xavo<:. and rise. G. 
 D. <nw, kc. from the genitive rivog, which has sometimes the 
 v syncopated. 
 
 It changes <f into p in the Genitive Singular and Accusa- 
 tive of Nouns in au*j of the 1st declension, the Nominative 
 Singular of the 2d, the Nominative and Genitive Singular of 
 the 3d, the Genitive and Accusative Singular of the 
 the Genitive of th nn of C . and the Accusa- 
 
 tive Plural of all the rive decV A 
 
. G. xp-ljaarop ; Plur. A. 
 
 \. •'/. i. ffoXiop. 
 
 I alar of the 
 
 the Infinitive! mto r\ ; as, 
 
 - <7 ill fulim 
 
 'tat 
 
 i pi, both 
 
 ;>lura!s i 
 ! |M from aw, 
 
 i 1 in 
 (1 plural 
 in back ( 'it ; a*, 
 
 AUcrvA > 
 
 fi into 8 
 
 y — (3 £ava* for j 
 
 rito a, the Bcrotir does not 
 
 i 
 
 .*&/« jt ipwa occuri in Pindar, 
 
2 1 6 Appendix — Dialects — B cootie. 
 
 X 
 
 I 
 
 igov, s/gatfi,! Perf. Active, 
 
 fS — 
 
 I 
 
 atfixsiga. 
 
 
 \ s 
 
 Xs^ofjLsdcv, v added. 
 
 Ot ■ 
 
 S ■ 
 
 Tpltfc^a. 
 
 9 
 
 1 
 
 IWV. 
 
 7) 
 
 si 
 
 f*gfe,* 0£i?a0sv, tWsijxi, tTpusg.* 
 
 U) 
 
 01 
 
 ypoTos. 
 
 av — 
 
 atfi 
 
 sVgacri,t 1st Aor. Act. 
 
 W$l — 
 
 av 
 
 Telucpav 
 
 OBSERVATION 
 
 1. It inserts <ra in the 3d plural of the Imperfect and both 
 Aorists Indicative active. 
 
 Common. Boeotic. 
 
 iVu-v^a \ -v, <Tav. 
 
 -■j } 
 
 And in the Imperfect of Contract 
 
 Common Boeotic. 
 
 fcOW J 
 
 £vp»Xa > -v, -tfav. 
 
 2. It sometimes makes the 3d plural of the 1st Aorist 
 o.tfi ; as, iri^atfi. 
 
 3. It sometimes makes the 3d plural of the Perfect in av ; 
 as, <rs'7u<pav, zticppixav. 
 
 4. It makes the 2d Aorist Imperative active in ov like the 
 1st ; as, *vsf-ov, -a7o. 
 
 5. In the Optative active, it changes e of the 3d plural 
 into (fa : as, 
 
 Common. Boeotic. 
 
 1 ) 
 
 <» > -sv, (fay. 
 
 i ) 
 
 6. In the 3d plural of both the Aorists passive, and of the 
 Imperfect and 2d Aorist active of verbs in fU, it synco] 
 
 tfa, shortening the preceding long vowel ; 
 
 : e note on the preceding page. 
 t Some grammaria? s make this the perfo 
 others, the 1st aorist, hy changing av into aai. 
 
J 17 
 
 .1011. 
 
 
 
 pd'fi 
 
 
 
 T-l) 
 
 
 
 -a 
 
 
 
 '•«*- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -av. 
 
 m the penultima of Verbs IE {M, fron 
 and use- T6q)i- 
 
 ecn 
 I tine. 
 
 illy intro- 
 
 SDCftlci D 11 Id 1 
 
 POETIC LIC1 
 
 1 . »ng ; as, 
 
 *3ot^o<* for ooii&f ; pou* for 9^ ; 1 
 
 ; xpaiaivuj for nf 
 ofMio^ ; t'fiT: for 1 1 
 
 .*£ for ?J 
 
 • 
 rpai for *CLpa. . 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 ; as, W> 
 vftj* n ben 1 
 
 ] 
 
 the 
 
 I 
 
Ill Appendix — Dialects of the Pronouns. 
 
 *parisyllabics, rejecting v and tf from the terminations; as 
 aur6(pi, #axpuop», xoTuX'/]3ov6<pi. for au7o£, (Saxpiov. xor-jXrj^wv, 
 -ovog. Neuters of the 1st of the contracts reject o only from 
 the genitive ; as, opsog, opstfcpi. To the Attic genitive in w 
 they add o ; Gen. Euyswo for Eyysw. 
 
 7. They form the dative plural from the singular, by 
 changing i into etfi or stftfi ; as, Jjpwi, rjpustfi or yjpusiftfi, and 
 change oiv into oiiv in the dative dual. 
 
 8. The termination of the 2d declension is often given to 
 nouns in the 3d ; and that of the 3d to Nouns of the 1st and 
 2d, especially in the dative ; as, yspovloig for yif*6 
 
 P>6ltq\s for ira^HJLaa'i ; aXxi for aXxrj ; u<Tf*ivj for utffjuv?) ; -srap- 
 diw for flrapfls'vw ; xXatSstfi for xXaooij. 
 
 9. They change Ban/tons into Verbs in fxi ; as, t^uu. 
 jSpf^jxi, from Ij^w, {8pMw. 
 
 10. From regular Verbs in u are formed, by the P«> 
 Verbs defective in a da, edw. 6mj, yjtftfw, *jw, oiac 
 
 tf#w, (J'xe*), tf^fw, tfw, uflw, utfCw, wtfw, 
 
 are often formed from the Future ; as, oWis, Imper. from 
 oi'(fw 4 Fut. of 9?pw. Verbs are sometimes formed in wu ; 
 op^oj for 5paw. 
 
 11. The termination xWai is changed inloyjtfco ; as, fj. 
 (Tot* for jn,s5ia(rai, from f*e5iaw. 
 
 DIALECTS OF THE PR 
 
 Ionic. 
 Sing. G. eVoib, Ifli*. Pi. N. %f*&£, G. ^j.i'wv, A. v^sac- 
 
 Doric. 
 
 Sing. N. £ywv, lywya, ?; uv'ij. G. 
 
 A. afjLS, afjLfjLg. Dual, N. A. otfAfis. M. X. ifJ 
 Of*£>v, «|ULs'c*JV, D. cqju'v, A. &(*«£, SffcS, Sffcj 
 
 iEolic. 
 
 Sing. N. Jrwv, ?w. iCya, iwvya, G. If«£u. Dual. X. 
 PI. N. fiftfg, ofAf&SS, G. afAfJicdv, otffcfliuv, D. a.a.ur.. 
 jjias, SffcS, a/xfjLS. 
 
 Poetic. 
 Sing. G. ifwio, ^liofcv, ^*tfev. Dual. X. V. (l 
 
 >. Pi. G. %j*swj*« 
 
ippendix — Du 
 
 1 . 
 
 I ' 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 l)ual. N 
 
 I 
 
 ak i n i 
 
 ■ ; ■ l>- " raf, 
 
 .lie. 
 i. cap. PI. G. c 
 
 I 
 
 * To every case of the ar 
 
220 Appendix — Dialects of the Verb Substantive £jj*i. 
 
 The Dialects, which by some are annexed to the relative 
 o's, by others to the relative otf7i£ belong properly to olog, used 
 for odlig. 
 
 From 6'7o£ come regularly the genitive oVs, I. oJfy, I). o7su, 
 oV7eo, P. orlsv ; pat. Sfy, I. o'7cc,j, P. ot7soj : Plur. Gen. fJoiv, I. 
 ols'wv ; Dat. o'7oi£, I. o7s'oi£, 67cWi. "Atftfa and <x<r7a are used 
 by the Attics for aliva. 
 
 DIALECTS OF THE VERB SUBSTANTIVE E<><\ 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Present Tense. 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 1 2 3 2 S 1 3 
 
 S '*'• 
 
 lO- ------ - ,_ - _ msv - - < 
 
 Do. 6W .i - - Mi - - - - j £J _ _ j ., v?j> 
 Poet. iaal IvuMi. 
 
 Imperfect Tense- 
 
 At. y\ rfi^a. ^v ^j(f7ov ^(f7r]v - - violS - - 
 
 liL fcjft. — -- ""|£. 
 
 Do. (, {£?" 
 
 Poet.^a guj&a tV 
 
 Future 
 At. - - faft - - 
 
 lo. — -* scffai 
 
 lo. 
 
 Do. - 
 
 Poet. 1 „' 
 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 Present Tense- 
 
 s<f7av. 
 
 At. ------ - - - - 
 
 Do. - - >;7w ; — — 
 
 Poet. 
 
 ^ee aa syncopated in the ^Hic Dialect. ( 
 
 
Appendix — Dialects of the Verb Substanti* 
 
 
 ( >ptati\L' MoodL 
 
 
 
 
 Prt 
 
 
 
 _ - _ 
 
 - - - 
 
 flfASV 
 
 
 •. In 
 
 Mood. 
 
 
 
 i.i - - - 
 
 • 
 
 
 — - 
 
 iu. — — 
 
 _ _ - 
 
 
 
 
 - Ifjrfi 
 
 - * 
 
 
 M 
 
 Io. TfUvou, t^tfjifvai. 
 
 Poet- iV(T£tf^aj. 
 
 Pnt 
 
 
V. 
 
 ACCENTS. 
 
 The Greek Accents are useful chiefly in two respe< 
 They serve to distinguish between words which are spelled 
 alike, but have different significations; as, /3»o£, lii 
 a bow ; aXXa. other things, aXXa, but.* They also indi- 
 cate in mLny cases, the quantity of one or more syllables of 
 a word. 
 
 Only two accents will be here considered, the acute (') 
 and the circumflex (~), since the grave is not expressed in 
 writing. The character ( v ) called the grave accent, is ne- 
 ver used except in a single case, viz. : to denote the acute 
 accent occurring on the last syllable of a word in continued 
 discourse ; as, deog yap rj/xiv flrpoufl^p^vs. Hence this char- 
 acter has received from many, the name of the Final 
 Acute, which exactly denotes its office. Before a period 
 or colon, (some say a comma,) the regular acute is used ; 
 as, frfci dsos.j 
 
 Every vowel not marked with an acute or a circumflex, 
 is considered as grave. 
 
 The circumflex is founded on the acute, since it consists 
 of first an acute, then a grave ("), (never a grave first, )| uni- 
 ted on one syllable. Hence it supposes two vowels to have 
 been contracted into one syllable ; or at least, that the vow- 
 
 * Scapula has given, at the end of his Lexicon, a list ©f more than 
 four hundred words which are thus distinguished. Among them aie 
 the following : 
 
 gjxws, yet ; ofJLwg, together. wciv, thus then ; sxav. not then. 
 ffai, he goes: cfri, there are. tea, a sight ; teet, a Goddess, 
 otpa, then ; apa, an interro- dswv, running; £&wv, of the Gods. 
 
 [gation. 
 Thus, too, a distinction is made between a proper a.id a common 
 name ; as, "Apyos, a man, or city : apyd?, white. 
 
 t The only exception to this remark is the Pronoun n$, which used 
 * an Indefinite, has always the grave accent [rij], to distinguish it 
 
 om the same word, used as an Interrogative [W>]. 
 
 J If, therefore, the former of two vowels which suffer contract 
 has not the acute accent, the contracted syllable is not marked with 
 the m flex; fyfXw, fyiAovt 1 , except contract Adjectives in ms \ 
 
 £pVff£Oft £pVCOV$» 
 
I>( liter — Accents. 223 
 
 g by nature, and thus equiva- 
 lent to 1 1 . , (fActaXXov,) (Tuifjia, ((foofxa.) 
 The t e no accent, 
 X) n« n. Sic .: ins), fJ if, £/£ (=V) to, £x 
 out of, a; t thr Article. 
 
 live Pronoun, has 
 
 >r he 
 
 Tin the end ofa 
 
 intl after the 
 
 with more than one art-cut, 
 pOO it fioni an Enclitic — 
 
 II of the three last 
 
 111 
 
 m tfa founded, 
 
 id : thus 
 i}fia,) cpiyjAalof, not cpa^f*a7o£, (nrpaay /xa7o$. ) 
 
 I \ * at tin 
 
 il not 
 
 tiny a« , 
 
 I 
 
 I do 
 
 other words the 
 quaii tent, the 
 
 ire or b 
 
 avdpwirou, 
 
 terminal cond and 
 
 third I de- 
 
 < ihe 
 > sug, 
 
 liken 
 
 II in:) 
 
 • - the final 
 
224 Appendix — Accents. 
 
 III. Einal syllable short. In polysyllables, the acute ac- 
 cent is placed on the antepenult ; as, avfywtfos. Ex ept f 1.) 
 Perfect passive participles; as, <r£%w£vog. (2.) Verbals in 
 sog, s'ov ; as, ypairreov. (3 ) Increasing cases of oxy tones ; 
 as, \atxtfu8oc, from Xafjwra£. (4.) Many derivatives ; as. cai- 
 Siov from rtcudog. (5.) Compounds of /3aXXw, irohiu, ^ac*, if 
 not with a preposition ; as, txa/36Xo£. (6.) Compounds of 
 Perfect Middles, with wouns and Adjectives ; as, d<Jlpo\6yog. 
 (7 ) Compounds of t/xtw, jwei'vgj, Tps'^w, with a noun, if they 
 have an active signification ; as, crpwroroxos, she who pro- 
 ducts the first child. If they have a passive signification, 
 they follow the general rule ; as, «rpGj<r Voxos. a first born. 
 
 IV. Final syllable short: If, in this case, a penult long 
 by nature has the accent, that accent is the circumflex ; as, 
 ^fxa, /3ojXoc£ (axos.) Except words into which an Enclitic 
 enters ; as, ro-ltfSs ; and words formed from si and vai : as. 
 sUs, Oh that ! vou'^i, \ i 
 
 N. B. The terminations ai and oj, though long, are con- 
 sidered as short in applying these rules ; hence we find ctv- 
 dpw«7roi, craXcu, tfoir,<fai. But in words compounded with en- 
 clitics, they are long ; as. oI'/jloi, Oh me ! So in oixoi, at home, 
 as distinguished from oixoi. houses. Also in the Optative, 
 in all Infinitives in vai, in the Perfect passive, and 'Jd Aorist 
 Midd e ; as. Opt. (piXijtTaj, rSTixpot ; Inrin. itfravcu. -rsn-v.ai, 
 rsrvtpQcu, rvtfid tfai, (vide Inflection of Verbs.) 
 
 From these Rules and Observations, we learn the follow- 
 ing things as to quantity. 
 
 1. When a syllable is circumflexed. we know it to be 
 long by nature ; as, the u in 4^X°£- 
 
 2. There being no acute on the penult of such a word 
 as apoupa, shows the final vowel to be short. Rule II. 
 
 3. A circumflex on the penult, shows the final syllable to 
 be short, as in nrsTpa, £pi/3wXa|; (axo£.) Rule III. 
 
 4. The acute on the penult of such words as rjfxipa, <p»X»a. 
 4wpa| (axo£,) shows the final vowel <o be long by nature. 
 Rule II. 
 
 Change of accent in the infection oficords. 
 When the quantity of the final adlable is changed in in- 
 flection, the accent will of course Te changed, in accord- 
 ance to the preceding rules. Hence arise most chai 
 of the accent from its original seat . as, N. fMufa, G, fxc 
 N, avfywtfos, G. avtywcrs, by Rule 11. N, tfCpa, G. rf^fxa7<£. 
 by Obs. III. ^siyw, cpsvys, by Rule IV. 
 
Ai>i>cndix — Acct 
 
 rs, and Purticip: 
 I, The ace* ut all the obliqn 
 
 ■mnative. ed 
 
 and 
 
 and 
 
 ii os ; 
 
 [18, even 
 
 f the 
 
 1 1 
 
 • • \ 
 o< tl 
 
 Inj i lie 
 
 on ti milt, if Che nature of the 
 
 ie same rule generallj hoidi ; as, ^pw, 
 
 from a contraction 
 
 iporal lugnH nt ; a?, 
 
 2. In i am- 
 
 \ oriet 
 

 226 Appendix — Accents . 
 
 Real exceptions. 
 
 I. Accent on the last syllable : 1. The 2d Aorist, 
 distinguish it from the Present.) in the Infinitive and Par- 
 ticiple active, and in the Imperative 2d person singular Mid- 
 dle ; as, sjWv, sjVcLv, ^6v5, (but irpoGysvov.) So also in sfcrif, 
 sXde, sups, (Xa/3i, i&/, Attic.) 2. Participles in ug and c/c ; 
 and those in eig, dg y kg, ig, from verbs in («, ; as. 
 r'otfsig, did kg, Lc. 
 
 II. Accent on the Penult. 1. All Infinitives in vai : as, 
 Tucrvjvai, T£ru(p3vai, except those in £f*6vau of the Doric form. 
 2. Infinitive and Participle of the Perfect passive: 
 rCcpQcLi, Tsrvpisdvog, (but if a letter of the Participle has been 
 dropped, the accent is thrown back : as, 
 
 7^vos.) 3. 1 he Infinitive ot the Cd Aorist Middle ; af 
 
 dai. 4. Infinitive of the 1st Aorisl active, and the Optative 
 
 terminations in ai and oi ; a 
 
 Change of place in the accent, from some change or f* 
 Uarity in the word. 
 
 1. When an accent is cut off by Apostrophe, the last - 
 lable which remains, receives the acute accent, except in 
 Prepositions and the Conjunction dXXd ; as, re/. . for 
 <rd Ssivct. $*%, 
 
 2. Prepositions placed after the words which they gov- 
 ern, throw back the accent ; as, ^sl dec. Except &i • and 
 <5id, to distinguish them from ava, the vocative of dvag ; and 
 oid the accusative of 7 
 
 3. Prepositions used for Verbs compounded of them with 
 s/jtf.1, throw back the accent ; as, evj for Ervsrfi. So ava for 
 dvcttfrqdi. 
 
 4. On the contrary, when a verb loses its first syllable, 
 the acute is removed from the syllable dropped to the next 
 following ; as,?<pav (from ^patfav,) ydv. If the syllable, which 
 remains be long bv nature, it receives the circumflex : a?, 
 *#»,.jS?. 
 
 The preceding Rules and Observations decide the ac- 
 cent of most words except particles, and the nominatiit 
 Nouns and Adjectives. As to these, the following r. 
 will be useful. 
 
 * When the penult in this case is long, it receives the cireumfl 
 the Infinitive. Thus we distinguish between rj 
 Tratbetim of the Opt., and naiUveai of the Imperative Middle. 
 
endix — I j * 
 
 Hablc — (Oxytoncs.) 
 Tin ent on the hut syllable. 
 
 I \ 101 contracted ; as, x 6 tyf 
 
 take the 
 
 illofwfa con- 
 
 But tho<e from verbs in 
 
 r and lie*, (fr 
 
 - ' 
 
 as, r 
 I 
 
 ins 
 i 
 
 nt rapa and cfj i throw 
 1 I 
 
 - 
 
 i . T V 0- 
 
 lace ; a.-. 
 
 \ 
 
 ■ 
 N 
 
228 Appendix— -Accents. 
 
 7. Verbals in rwp ; as, £Vwp, xr^rwp. 
 
 8. Adjectives in sis-sitftfa-sv ; as, ^apicis. 
 
 9. Adjectives in w5>js ; as,Xidw5^. 
 
 10. Verbal Adjectives in so£ ; as, ypa^^sog. 
 
 11. o -.paritives in iwv ; as, /3sX<nwv. 
 
 12. Adverbs of quantity in axis ; as, rpitfaxicr, #oXXaxj£. 
 
 13. Adverbs in £'/jv ; as, tfuXXv;/3(5?iv. 
 
 To these are added the exceptions to Rule III. page 224. 
 
 Composition- 
 Compound words in many instances, especially in adverbs, 
 retain the accent on the syllable where it stood in the sim- 
 ple ; as, au-To<pi, oupavodsv. In the following cases, however, 
 the accent is drawn back to the antipe. ult 
 
 1. Words compounded of Particles, a '/xo, ap7i, 
 avri, tfspl, napa, utfo, &c. ; as, atfHfloc from flftrfog, from 
 
 2. Words compounded of two Adjectives ; as, (piXotfopos ; 
 of two Substantives ; as, vcuxX^po^ ; of Adjectives and Sub- 
 stantives ; as, (pikotfropyog. 
 
 ENCLITICS. 
 
 Certain words called Enclitics, throw back (^yxXivsiv, rest) 
 heir accent on the preceding word. These are 
 
 1. Pronouns ftov, jiioi, jas ; Coj, <foi, tfs ; ou, oi, & ; tfpe, 
 tf<piv ; tfpws, tf^itfi, <f<pea£ ; <ri£, n, Indefinite in all its cases, 
 and in all the Dialects ; as, 
 
 2. Verbs slpi and 90^, in tlie Present Indicative, except 
 the 2d person. 
 
 3. Adverbs, «rw£, irr\, tfoi, #w, tfodsv, tfors, unless used in- 
 terrogatively, when they receive the accent ; as, -rws, how . } 
 
 4. Conjunctions, y£, r?, xs, xsv, 0tjv, vu, vuv, #sp, £a, roi, and 
 5s, inseparable ; as, r&tfte; akaSs, to the sea. 
 
 RULES. 
 
 I. Enclitics throw back their accent on to the last syllable 
 of the preceding word, whose antepenult has the acute ac- 
 cent, or whose penult has the circumflex ; as.avfy. 
 
 j-'hdi fjiGi. 
 
 II. If the preceding word has any accent on the las! syl- 
 lable, or an acute on the penult, this serves for the enclitic; 
 as, ayairag |*e,avfy rig. But if in this case, the enclitic be a 
 word of two syllables, the precede .ent. 
 
Appendix — Prosody. 
 
 and the enclitic takes the accent ; as. Xc; So also 
 
 D the pr< suffered apostrophe ; as, #oX- 
 
 Xoi 6' er~ 
 
 III. If several < eh other, the last only is 
 
 • ut the accent : juloi. 
 
 [V, The Enclitic Prono -cut after prepo- 
 
 v their accent when they arc 
 
 emphatic, and w I 
 
 V |. \\"r. it begins a - 
 
 llj or follows ca> 
 
 PROSOD1 
 
 • ither long 
 
 \ douhle tiie 
 
 1 1 ut • as, row" 
 
 t at the will 
 of t 1 table in t 
 
 ii and u in nht- 
 
 ful. 
 
 ; the let* 
 • rid all diphthongs, are long bj 
 
 \ loi another 
 
 j^rrilct^poorj^av. 
 
 yog. 
 
 t>f I word, 
 
 ofa i The 
 
 ; the 
 1 or diphtb 
 
 I 
 
 1. from tl. Ity of con. 
 
 it ri the m:irk>3 of < 
 
23CT Appendix — Prosody. 
 
 vowel or diphthong is sometimes, though rarely, shortened 
 before a consonant, especially a liquid ; as, Ei Ss xsv ( o<xo6' i j 
 x&jjxar (pi | Xrjv sg | rfarpiSa. | yaiav* 
 
 But 1. Cfesural syllables, and monosyllables, begin- 
 ning a foot, remain long ; as,KXs4rrsvo£}S«n'ef £ tfapeXsutfsaf a6e 
 jjus tfsufsig. 
 
 2. The vowel remains long, when by being shortened, it 
 would require a subsequent long vowel or diphthong to be 
 short ; as, 2juliv0*u SiVors roi, &c. In this case, if the diph- 
 thong «u were made short, the subsequent diphthong ei like- 
 wise must be shortened to complete the foot. 
 
 3. When by apostrophe, a long vowel or diphthong is 
 made to end a word, it is not shortened. 
 
 II. Position. A short or doubtful vowel before two sin- 
 gle consonants, or a double consonant, is generally long by 
 position ; as, g ? £a$, rtfrov. tfoXXct, xara <ppsva. 
 
 The vowel often continues long, though one of the con- 
 sonants has been dropped ; as, y-rvofjtoi, which is for yr 
 \ka\ ; ^rvwtfxw, which is for yiyvwtfxu ; r^ag for v^avg ; fxap- 
 TOp for juuxpTups ; Aiag for Aiav7$. 
 
 So where the Digamma* has been omitted; as. 
 •ivg for jxsXavos Fbivs. 
 
 Exception 1 . A short vowel before a mute and a liquid, 
 •r tfr, XT, fxv, is common ; as, 
 
 Mffrpa £s | Tsu^s ^rJoicTi . *o|yap p?rpov|i</Iiv alpiffT 
 
 But a short vowel before a middle mute. r J) fol- 
 
 lowed by X, (x, v, is long. 
 
 2. The vowel is not always long before tf and a conson- 
 ant, or XX ; as, |as7aXXa<:. 
 
 'fipfl'iflVspjr} xpw|£si tfoXvjO'jvos xo|pwvr). 
 
 III. In hexameter verse, a short or doubtful vowel is 
 sometimes made long before a single consonant, par- 
 ticularly before a liquid ; as, tfapd pnyjuvi. crprv i>. 
 Sqpiv. 
 
 A vowel is sometimes made long before the digamma ; as, 
 ii§ kg for F*£. 
 
 IV. When three short vowels come together, one must 
 be made long in heroic verse, for the sake of measure ; as, 
 
 r ddava<ro£ ; npia 4 ai^ ; oia fA&v. 
 
 V. When the article takes the apostrophe, o ons 
 it in the beginning of the succeeding word niftg 
 
 See Appendix No. I. 
 
ippendix — Prosody. 
 
 orbed* the other, and is 
 
 <*>£ i Eurip. 
 
 Ibid. 
 \ I the place of the 
 
 [. The tat syllable of is common. 
 
 DOl 
 
 How the quantity 
 ■ s ; as, a are 
 
 -.prxa, btfl 
 a print 
 api, fpi. iiort ; as, £d 
 
 r AND MIDDLE 8YLLABLES. 
 
 1. \ doubtful i c consonant 
 
 ii the p« -ouv, -ac. 
 
 ben 
 
 ill 
 
 in i ;n s in -arris ; as, 
 
 and 
 
 a r< 
 
 -apo$ ; as f t ftvwp, 
 
 in d rod -pou 
 
 and in xfpoc, xpa;, x«p, ~^pag, kp«£, »P*"fc **<i £ a b* 
 
 in the penult of noun- 
 
 But we must 
 
 - 
 nouns in . frvyf, 
 
 , *ro>Jnc. 
 
 ! 
 
 mmarian j)Jed a contra' 
 
232 Appendix — Prosody. 
 
 in diminutives in -i<W, from pure genitives ; as from 
 ifxa7iou, ifxa7r&ov. 
 
 in the penult of verbs in -iw, -iQw, -ww ; as, rrw, rpr/3w, 
 <tvoj ; as also cSrvsw, xrvsw. But the Attic tragic wri- 
 ters have -rw, -fvw ; as, 
 
 I I I l l 
 
 Ncwv <pdrvov/wv fxsj^ov apvu/xai xksog. Iamb. Trim. 
 
 3. « is common (i. e. either short or long) in the penult of 
 
 nouns in -ia, -ir\ ; as, xaXra, or xaXra. 
 
 4. v is long in verbal nouns in -ufj.a, -v^og, -vrr\p, -uros,. 
 
 -i/7wp ; as, XOjxa. 
 in pronouns ; as, 'ojulsj^. 
 
 in the penult of verbs in -uvw, -upw, -o^w, -ujuli ; as, *Xcvw. 
 in adverbs in -u&>v ; as, /3orpo<$ov. 
 
 5. u is common in the penult of verbs in -uw. 
 
 OF THE DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN FINAL SYLLABLES. 
 
 II. -a, -i, u, in the end of a word, are for the most part 
 shortened ; as, jutoutfa, /xeXr, ^Xuxu. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 1. -a final is long in nouns in -sa, -5a, Sa ; as, Ssd, A> 
 
 Map6&. Except dxavdd. 
 in the dual number ; as, *7rpo<pr]7ft. 
 in polysyllables in -aia ; as, ^sX-yjvaid. 
 in -sia, from verbs in -suw ; as, /3atfiXsid, a kingdom, but 
 
 /3acfiXsjd\ a queen. 
 in -ia ; as, xaXict. Except verbals in -rpia ; as,4aXrpid, 
 
 and 5ia\ fxid, worvid. 
 in the vocative of mums of the first declension from -as; 
 
 as, Aivsia, from Aivfiacr. 
 in the feminines of adjectives in -og ; as, 6/xgicL 
 in nouns in -p«. when a diphthong does nol precede : as. 
 
 7}^$pa. Except 'or. xjpa, veqwptt, Kspxupd, oXXypa, (fxo- 
 
 Xotfsvfyd, tf(pupd. ravct} pa ; and compounds from f*s- 
 
 7pov ; as. j =w|ULs7pd. 
 in poetic vocatives ; as, IlaXXd for IlaXXas. 
 
 2. -i final is long in the names of letters ; as. 
 
 3. -u final is long in names of letters ; as. 
 in verbs in -u/ai ; as, 
 
 in fxe7a£o and yptJ. 
 
 I 
 
endix — Prosody. 233 
 
 4. Final syllable?, in which a single consonant follows 
 a doubtful, are (v. option of -up) shortened; as, 
 
 ■ 
 
 in masculine* ; as, Ti7fiv ; and *dv, when 
 if nominatives are long; as, 
 
 -ap. 
 -ap in xdp, ±&p is lo er long or short. 
 
 in n i termination Qomina- 
 
 i 
 
 -»&>£ ; a^ 
 
234 Appendix — Prosody . 
 
 -uv. 
 
 10. -uv is long in nouns in-uv, -uvos ; as,>o<ftfcv,fjio<r<fuvos. 
 in nouns which have two terminations in the nomina- 
 tive ; as, cpopxov, or (popxus. 
 
 in accusatives in -uv, from -us ; as, o<ppuv from o<pp: 
 in the ultimate of verbs in -u/ju ; as, £<puv. 
 in vuv, note. But the enclitic vuv is short. 
 
 -us. 
 
 11. -u^ is long in monosyllables ; as, ptfc 
 
 in nouns which have two terminations in the nomina- 
 tive ; as, <popxU£, or qjopxuv. 
 
 in nouns which have -uv7os, or -os pure in the genitive ; 
 as, Ssixvts, <Jsixvuv7os ; oq>pO£, oppuos. 
 
 in xojfxos, xw/xi;0o£. 
 
 in the ultimate of verbs in -u/xi ; as, 6<pu£. 
 
 OF THE DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN THE OBLIQUE CASES OF NOUNS 
 THAT I>< 
 
 1. The quantity of the nominative remains in the ob- 
 lique cases ; as, Tnftv, Tirdvos ; £gyj . xvtj- 
 
 txioog. 
 
 Except -up ; as, fxapcop, /xap7cpo£. 
 
 2. Those nouns, which are long by position in the nom- 
 inative, are shortened in the oblique i J. au- 
 
 Except nouns in -ag pure ; as. 
 
 also §upa%, icpag, xvw£a|, xop: ag, wag. 
 
 <pafj, vpfvag ; with most in il. -i~:; ; bs, 
 and -if, -90s. or -ixos, as, |xa<r7ig. (u-affrryos, (pot./ 
 xos ; to which add 7 p 
 
 A pure genitive from a long nominative is varied ; as 
 #poc, opttos, or 6p; 
 
 4. The penult of the dative plural, in nouns which are 
 <racted, is short ; as, mrp£& 
 
 OF TnE DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN THE FLEXIONS OF VERBS. 
 
 a and u, before -tfa in participles, and before -Ci every- 
 where, are long ; as, ru^atfa, (Jt/xvutfa, foixvutfu* 
 
 * It is to be understood that a, *, *, are jAot/ in verbe ; unlesf i 
 -©thersrise specified in the rules. 
 
JLr — Prosody. 235 
 
 : tu re in -orfft or 
 
 ><n -a^j, 
 to ; ppita, j3prft»; 
 i 
 
 Limit in the first future ; as, 
 
 ond future nult ; as, <r 
 
 Til I 
 
 in the de- 
 II, 
 
 rjv. 
 
 i the 
 <*, is 
 
 null long as, 
 
 • a. d of an argument, arc 
 
 \ unless d 
 
 re -tfa or as, 
 
 'he singular of I 
 
 o. long ; (contra- 
 The pa :i pronooot, (except in the dative plur; 
 
236 Appendix — Prosody. 
 
 and adverbs, is long ; as, oJrooT, vuvr, (contrary to Rule II. 
 but, dative plural, <rou7oi<rf. 
 
 IONIC. 
 
 The comparative neuter iov, which the Attic makes long, 
 is shortened ; as, xaXXfov, Ion. xaXXrov, Attic. 
 
 In adjectives which signify time, i is made long ; as, ; 
 
 In verbs, a Ionic, where -(Ti does not follow, is shortened ; 
 as, karoLi for fylcu. 
 
 DORIC AND iEOLIC. 
 
 a Doric is made long : a ^Eolic is shortened ; as, A/- 
 vsia, D. for Aiveiou ; — Irtirold* &o\. for ; a/^/xrr 
 
 D. for a/pflu^rwv ; — vu/juptf, JEo\. for vujuc '7av, jEol. for 
 
 £7t^av ; vujuupds, iEol. for vu/xpas, accu, plur. 
 
 POETIC LICENSE. 
 
 A short and a long vowel, forming two syllables, fre- 
 quently coalesce, and are pronom «»uc syllable. In 
 Homer this takes place only in the same word, especially 
 in the genitive of the first declension in -?w, regularly ; as 
 IhjX*]Yatf=w 'AxiXrjos ; as also in the genitive plural of the 
 first declension in -swv ; as @srig 6 Thus 
 also Ssocr ; as u/jliv fA5v S e 6i (SoicV. Xpu<f?ui ava C>. 11. a, 
 15, ^pu(f?6v (J'xrj'jrrpov fp^ovra, Od.X', 568. >.ai o^piv 
 o(psXXoig:, Hes. "Epy. 33. Thus als 111. 
 j8a<fiX5j?s, Hes. 'Ep). 263. <roxr.\c, Horn. H. in C 
 Here the syllable which is contracted from two sylla- 
 bles, is long, as n^X^a ;, Likewise 
 the following after \ 
 
 £u$ ' e irsX0ov, Od. *j', 280. 1*3$ '?7 W tftp xeiva, Od. 5', 90. In 
 Attic writers this takes place sometimes in certain words. 
 as in Sso£, which is generally a monosyllable ; in £^paxa, 
 which is commonly a trisyllable . Sometinx ver, 
 
 two words are thus contracted : a- 
 pr\ aXXoL two syllables ; pq oJ, a monosyllable. 
 
 The 'aptf^ makes a short syllable long 
 
 Ai'ooiocr rs fjwi stftfi <piX? IxupS of 
 
 * Arsis moans the elevation of voice, which in Hexa ->e if 
 
 always upon the lirst syllable of a foot. We find, but very ran 
 short syllable lengthened at the end of a foot ; 
 
 I i l l. I 
 
 Ttj o ftri /xsv Fopyw oXo^upw**; 
 
Appendix — Prosody. 
 
 Be :ions from the usual rules of quant 
 
 the ancient p 
 
 I. I ted a syllable; I. by doubling, or insertin 
 
 I diphtl: . lor 
 
 • p£ov. 
 
 I I 
 diphthong ; I 
 
 III umber ef *», 
 ■ <lip 
 
 I \ . /,< I ft 
 
 fM/fta.t 
 
 ttyUmbb 
 
 a. 
 
 xa. 
 NeiUon'i Edition of Moor'* Grammar, 
 
235 
 
 Appendix — Prosody . 
 
 Antipastic, 
 
 dfjuapT^fxa. 
 
 Ionic a majore, 
 
 X0(fyX7]TGpa. 
 
 Ionic a minore, 
 
 ' crXeovsxT'/)^. 
 
 Paeon first, 
 
 cufrpo) 
 
 Paeon second, . 
 
 dvagiog. 
 
 Paeon third, 
 
 dva^'/j.aa. 
 
 "Paeon fourth, . 
 
 $soy \ 
 
 Epitrite first, 
 
 a/xapcwXr/ 
 
 Epitrite second, 
 
 avOpo^jovr^ 
 
 Epitrite third, 
 
 sCputfdsvijj. 
 
 Epetrite fourth 
 
 Xw/3*]T7)pa, 
 
 OF METRES. 
 
 A metre consists properly of two feet, because in beating 
 time, the foot was raised once in two feet. But by metres 
 is generally understood a verse, a stanza, or a system of 
 verses. 
 
 Of metres there are nine species, 
 
 Composed of simple feet, that is feet of two or three 
 syllables. 
 
 1. Dactylic, 3. Iambic, 
 
 2. Anapestic, 4. Trochaic. 
 
 Composed of compound feet, that is feet of four syllables. 
 
 5. Ionic a majore, Antipastic, 
 
 6. Ionic a minore, 9. Pueonic. 
 
 7. Choriambic, 
 
 These metres take their names from the feet, of which 
 they are principally composed. 
 
 The final syllable of every verse is in different, or may be 
 reckoned doubtful. 
 
 DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERSE. 
 
 Hexameter. 
 The hexameter, or heroic verse, consists of six feet. Of 
 these, the fifth is a dactyle, and the sixth a spondee : all 
 the rest may be either dactyles or spondt-i 
 
 Ai>tfo/A£|vos rs fotyalpa, (psjpwv r' affc jpSiCi dJ<roiva. 
 A spondee is frequently found in the fifth place ; whence, 
 the verse is called spondaic ; as, 
 
 SlstwaV sjx^v svj^eptfiv £|xi)§c/. - \X|wvo$. 
 
 The spondaic is used when any thing grave, slow, lar. 
 or sad, is expressed. It has commonly, though not alw 
 
Appendix — Prosoit; 
 
 & dactylc in the fourth place, and a word of four syllables 
 at ti 
 
 \\ J particular attention in .-canning, is the 
 
 after a t- re remains a syllable 
 
 in the word U is called the 
 
 W I lature of 
 
 I i • 
 
 inotj .. 
 
 as, 
 
 I v£ an I 
 
 th, 12th, 
 \ na- 
 il, 11th, 13th, i 
 ining into one ;* 
 
 ■ 
 
 i'jnnann. 
 
VII. 
 PARTICLES. 
 
 The particles may be conveniently distributed into the 
 following classes, viz : Those which denote, 
 
 I . Certainty or confirmation ; r h certainly, truly ; piv7oi, 
 assuredly, indeed : rip, altogether ; fy, ja/jv, and ye, which 
 are thus distinguished. Ay strongly asserts what the speak- 
 er considers as already established ; ^ goes on to press 
 the assertion, without relaxing as to what has preced 
 yi asserts with a limitation, fielding as to the past or other 
 things, but insisting upon this. Hence it is applied to an 
 individual object or part, when considered in reference to 
 a whole, or to a greater number ; I for my part, 
 
 or at least. Thus Plato says, " every where, certainly, 
 [Sr)\ men will maintain peace by means of laws/' The 
 other replies, tfoXXvjv ye ^ much at least" Plato proceeds, 
 " there being no contests among them, there certainly [f*ip] 
 is no danger, lest, &c." After interrogations following a 
 negative reply of the opposite party, \ih signifies then ; 
 r/$ |ii^v, who then ? 
 
 To Sy) is joined *k, [#7**] denoting certainly, to wit ; but in 
 some cases the irou which marks uncertainty, diminishes the 
 force of6>?, and the sense is perhaps. 
 
 2. Negation. This is expressed by oj and \tA\ with their 
 derivatives, but with this distinction in their use, that oi 
 conveys a direct, independent negation ; as, £x df'Xw, 1 will 
 not ; ou^ sVti ; is it not? thus representing things in their 
 actual relations. M/j is joined to hypothetical and depend- 
 ent propositions ; as, xx Xrj^ofxai. si /x^ (fi xs'hsCtig, I will not 
 receive it, unless you command me. It is. therefore, al- 
 ways used after sJ, ^v. sav, 67av, stsidav, £«£, and other words, 
 which represent a thing not as actual, but conditional. Te 
 i#si and eirsior n since, after that, ov is joined, because an ac- 
 tual state of things is denoted by those words. With iva 
 £t$, o<ppa, oVw$, wcf7s, which denote design, and are condi- 
 tional, fji>7 is used. 
 
 In sentences expressing a wish, prayer, intention, \ 
 hibttion, &c. some preceding clause may generally be 
 plied, which shows their dependent character ; and so like- 
 
n is increased b\ 
 ition 
 
 ie included -ru. 
 
 all. 
 
 The dif- 
 
 to a < 
 
 about to be deci- 
 if thf-ra 
 are altars, there are i 
 
 -•th- 
 are aka 
 
 true 
 
 bail 
 
 i racier ai 
 
 or a 1 
 
 tho 
 
 but. 
 
 1 
 

 242 Appendix — Particles. 
 
 10. Uncertainty. An uncertain event may be either pos- 
 sible^ or dependent on some other event, or likely to take 
 place, or highly probable. Possibility is expressed by Itfug, 
 dependence by av, (Poetic xs or xsv), verisimilitude by toJ, 
 probability by ri. Each of these words might have its place, 
 for example, in the following line. *+(£„&. & h f?£-V- 
 
 tfCv ts <$u' sp^ofxs'vcj, xal i tf oj $ tfpo o tou £vo7j<fev. 
 " When two are associated, one perchance sees more than 
 the other." Here possibility alone is asserted, without 
 any opinion as to the fact. Had it been stated as a fact* 
 no particle would have been used, but simply the wordo *po 
 
 TOU SVQrfiSV. 
 
 , Cuv rs 5u' sp^ofiicvw, xai' xfv tfpo o tou Ivorjtfpv, 
 
 signifies that one may or might, (as some event shall turn,) 
 see more than the other. If that condition were taken 
 away, and the event decided, the speaker would say, v u v- 
 <r u s tfpo o tou Iv6r ( (ffv, one, beyond all question, sees more 
 than the other, tfuv rs &5 1 spX°» asvcj > xa '' flrou ^P® °' roulvwitfev 
 signifies " it is Zi'AriZ^ that one. fcc." ; the mind of the speak 
 er inclines to that belief. Had the fact been certain, he 
 would have said, 'h 6r t tfpo o tou svot^sv, one certainly sees 
 more than the other. Finally the words actually useaby the 
 Poet, div T5 5v' sp^ojws'voj, xai rs crpo o tou b-vorjtfcv, signify that 
 when two are associated, one most probably « norc than 
 the other ; though not that the fact is necessarily so, which 
 would be expressed by dvajmar^g cpo o tou ivor^sv.* 
 
 11. Disjunction of particulai . either — or: dXX 
 — 5, but either — or : hypothetical disjunctioi 
 
 whether this — or that : negative disjunction, « nei- 
 
 ther — nor. 
 
 12. Exception, -tXtjv, except : si ju^, lav fx>j, unless ; aXX' 
 ^, unless ; xa/ ri, xav unless, even if. 
 
 13. Comparison, ou7w$, thus : 
 
 as if; ?*«£, as : &s -gives strength to the superlative and 
 *omelimes to the positive ; as, w$ Ta^i^a, as soon a 
 ble ; tig olXrj^, certainly. In some instances, ws is render- 
 ed by "about ;" as, wsVeCrfspaxovTa, about, i. e. [as it were] 
 forty : oV [with the accent] is used by th< 
 thus, and by prose writers in the phras and thus. 
 
 55' ws nor thus. 
 
 14. Reason or Cause of a thing ; &ts from 
 sense of specification, is often used to specif; \Yc 
 any thing ; as, ars ov&svog 2irt/3aXXov7o£, since o:- bea 
 it was the fact that] no one raised the price. 
 
 * Hermann de particula &v. 
 
Ij 
 
 p, after, 
 
 9 I he 
 
 truly, 
 
 >m the I 
 
 I for otherwise \ 
 
 1 at, and 
 
 - 
 
 pbratea 
 
 Int thing 
 
 * Ore. as an ail . 
 
 while 5rov, | 
 f "mi t « 
 
 •ib oi 
 | 
 
 I 
 is an I 
 
 I I 
 the 
 
 ■ 
 ' .(ifld, i. » 
 
 00 this a< < » like 
 
 stn -i <ra^itfTa, in- 
 
 ly as possible ; * ire united in one word ; 
 
 as, Uir)6itfTa % tin 
 
 1 i ! . that Ilenc? 
 
- i 4 Appendix — Particles. 
 
 i'va-W, denotes, wherefore, i. e. in order that what ?[shouid 
 take place] "Ivct is sometimes used in the sense of £<rrt, 
 so that, denoting the result, but not an intention ; as, r,v «a- 
 f>axcxaXufj,[iivov aV auJcJj, 1'va ^o a/(rt)wv7ai au76, it was cover- 
 ed from them, so that [not, in order that] they could not see 
 it. "ha is often an adverb of place, where. "CX?pa, that, 
 is used only .by the Poets. 
 
 f n$, that, in order that, is prefixed to the Subjunctive, 
 Optative, or Future Indicative ; and hence u$ ri 9 why, i. e. 
 (hat what ? [may be done] £g is likewise used in the sense of 
 Ztfrs, so that, and has sometimes, though more rarely. the cau- 
 sal signification/or or since. With the Optative, it has the 
 sense of, would God, or I could wish. "Ofruf, that, in order 
 l hat ; oVw£ ti, why I 
 
 "fioVs has rarely the sense of the final cause, [in order 
 that,] but denotes the result, so that, and hence is frequent- 
 ly rendered by "therefore," and corresponds nearly to ouv. 
 
 16. Inference or Conclusion. "Apa, therefore, con 
 quently, is used in the successive steps of a train of rea- 
 ing. in the rapidity of thought, the inference is sometimes 
 made before the reason has been given. Its other uses will 
 be given below. 
 
 Otv, wherefore, differs from apa, in drawing the final con- 
 clusion, and bringing the subject to a close, in view of all 
 that has been said. Its other uses will be given below. 
 
 Ouxojv is properly a negative inference, " is it not there- 
 fore so?" but often loses its character of negation, and de- 
 notes, " therefore." 
 
 Toi signifies the same as for this thing, for this rea- 
 
 son, therefore. Tor/ap is compounded of roi, js y and apa, 
 the first of which assigns a reason, the second considers it 
 individually,* and the third draws the inference ; when Sv 
 is add [roiyapoiJv] the ouv brings the whole to a conclusion, 
 and applies it to the case in hand ; 4k wherefore, since these 
 things, then, are so." 
 
 Nu or vuv, like now in English, properly denotes time, 
 and is used, chiefly by the Poets, as a particle of inferei 
 
 Toivuv, therefore, now therefore, much the same with : 
 
 17. Indefiniteness. Hots joined to indefinites, either 
 adds, liVe cunque in Latin, to their indefinite character 
 otfei'a ttot' Jtfriv aurrj of what kind soever it ma 
 
 case of doubt shows ihe interest and anxiety of the speak- 
 er ; as ihri /xoi, rivog irori ; tell me, whose then is it ! 
 
 * As in cyuyti I for mil part. 
 
Aj>pt hdix — Pi rtiL If 2 i b 
 
 e iudetin vliat 
 
 • r oi i nose * B 
 the 
 
 |MM, an-! 
 who: i 
 
 as oiovrou otva > afia^ouf Tpctf>.aoov?fc. tl • 
 
 ! 
 i the past In 
 
 lv r. I 
 
 same use ; a 
 
 away. ther. ,v ~ / 
 
24G Appendix — Particles. 
 
 6. Denoting hesitation or modesty. The most positive 
 statements often take av, expressing hesitation or modesty, 
 by the contingent turn given to the sentence; as, oux av 
 »/oa, I [should] hardly know ; wcr av jtxo; oo'xtj, as it seems 
 [would seem] to me* \\ hen av is repeated it may be 
 used in different senses, or it may be repeated to impress 
 more strongly the sense of contingency. 
 
 "Apa properly signifies u in the nature, or regular course 
 of things." Hence it is used, 
 
 1. In drawing inferences; " consequently," " therefore." 
 
 2. To express certainty, as w$ apa spXuapoujuosv how truly 
 did we trifle. Sometimes ironically ; as £)$ apaiyu, as if I 
 forsooth, Lc. 
 
 3. To denote what naturally follows in the order of time 
 or events ; as, " when the tenth day appeared, tot' a g 
 £f 8(pspov, then they of course bore away the body of Hector 
 with tears." 
 
 4. In making transitions to what naturally follows in the 
 progress of thought ; &£ spar', oS <? apa ifkvrsg 'scr/a^ov, thus 
 he spoke, and they all then shouted applause. Hence apa 
 often begins a sentence with the signification of /xav ouv or 
 f^sv 8rj wherefore, with reference to something which has 
 gone before. 
 
 5. With si, sccv &c. to express a conjecture ; as, si 'apa 
 (L'vovTai, if indeed (i. e. in the course of things) they can. In 
 such cases 'apa retains its appropriate meaning. 
 
 Ts, which confirms or urges the particular object in view, 
 (" at least," " certainly," " truly,") has sometimes the 
 sense of juaXitfTa, chiefly ; and is used in interrogations, ex- 
 pressions of admiration, &c. to increase their force. 
 
 Tovv (jrs-oSv) at least, even, for. yet. 
 
 ±-f) from TJSrj, as, an adverb signifies now. When join- 
 ed to v£Tv it denotes, in respect to present time " this very 
 moment ;" as, vuv rfiri fxa^rsov we must fight this moment. 
 In connection with verbs in the preterite, it denotes "just 
 now ;" as trspi d)v vuv *J&] ^^xpa.rr^ stays, of which Socrates 
 was just now speaking. As a Conjunction, it retains the 
 sense of now, 
 
 1. In exhorting, as \eys <>>}, come now, read. 
 
 2. In questions, indicating the earnestness of the speak- 
 er, and his desire of an immediate answer,Ti drj ; Why, now I 
 tcx Tola Sri tclvtol ; What, now, are these ? 
 
 3. In expressing admiration, when joined with tots, as 
 rl dytfoTS toutojv ; why, now, these ? 
 
 4. In commencing a subject ; as r PJs 8% tfxo^wfxsv a>? 
 Now, let us consider it in this way. 
 

 Appendix — Peculiar Idioms. 24? 
 
 5. In marking the successive stages of thought, as they 
 rise one after another. In each of these dy signifies " now" 
 or " truly," until at the last one, it signifies, "finally," 
 " chiefly," ' above all." Hence it is often joined to super- 
 latives ; as psy'drr] <ty. 
 
 6. In confirming or strengthening affirmations. This is 
 one of its most common uses. 
 
 7. In irony; as, w£ 6 ^ rovS' £vixa,&c.as if truly for this rea- 
 son Apollo had sent calamities upon us. Afyra has t^e same 
 meaning with or h 
 
 OiJv, Wherefore. 1 Draws an ultimate conclusion, in. 
 view of what has gone befi 
 
 2. Commences a paragraph or chapter, with some refer- 
 ence to what has preceded. 
 
 3. Continues or resumes a subject, after a digression or 
 parenthesis. 
 
 4. Introduces a transition to some new subject. 
 
 5. Has an affirmative force, particularly in replies ; as 
 ylyvsrai ouv outws, it is certanly so. This affirmative force 
 appears still more clearly in a sentence like this: siVsfjwJ 
 ypou^ei, sirs o u v, he either will not write, or he pill, 
 
 PECULIAR IDIOMS. 
 
 'AfxsXsi signifies " take no heed," and hence, doubtless, 
 certainly. 
 
 Ajtw, aMu without otiv, signifies " together with," as Sju 
 i avroJtfiv oysdyiv, two horses together with the carriages. 
 
 "Evsxa often signifies "as far as depends upon ;" as "with- 
 out the Sun, as far as depends upon (svsxa) the other hea- 
 venly bodies, it would be always night. /> 6 % **<*- u /" 
 
 'EvtoJs before the superlative, signifies among all, before 
 all ; as sv <ro7s tfpwco* tfapy-tfav o/ 'A^vaJoi, the Athenians were 
 present first of all. 
 
 'E<p' & for Wi rwrw &s, and entire for kti tovtu) &frs, signify 
 " on condition that." 
 
 'Exsiori joined to 6^lwc,Vpwra,or ra^iCra, signifies " at the 
 moment." 
 
 Movov oux, only not, i. e. almost : So, otfov ou, almost. 
 
 IIspi tfoXXou stfri fjiof, or flrip; creXXov tfoiouj-wu, or fjysV ai > " it 
 is of great importance to me." 
 
 So on the contrary, c:p; fwxpou, &c. 
 
 IIoXXou 05w, " I am far from," " certainly not," oXiyou 
 del "oearly," "almost." 'OXiyou and pixpev have some- 
 times this sense when alone. 
 
 *Qs stfos shrs?v so to speak. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Orthography, ... page 1 to 7 
 
 Etymology.— -Article, 8 
 
 Noun, ..... 9—23 
 
 Irregular Nouns, - - - - 23—26 
 
 Patronymics. — Diminutives, - - 26, 27 
 
 Adjectives, - - - - 27 — 38 
 
 Numerals, ----- 39 — 41 
 
 Pronouns, - 42 — 46 
 
 Verbs — Tenses, &c. - 46 — 54 
 
 Moods, - 54 — 62 
 
 Barytone Verbs — Conjugation, &c. - 63 — 71 
 
 Contract Verbs — Conjugation, Lc. - - 72 — 76 
 
 Reduplication and Argument, - - 76 — 80 
 
 Formation of the Tenses, - - - 81 — 91 
 
 Verbs in fw, - 91 — 97 
 
 Irregular Verbs in /xi, - - -97 — 100 
 
 Defective or Anomalous Verbs, - - 100 — 112 
 
 Adverbs, - - - - 113, 114 
 
 Syntax— Agreement, - - - 114 — 118 
 
 Relative and Article, - - 118—122 
 
 Government of Genitive, - - 122 — 126 
 
 of Dative, - - 126, 127 
 
 of Accusative, - - - 127, 128 
 
 of Substantives, - - 128,129 
 
 of Adjectives, - - 129—132 
 
 ofVerbs— Genitive, - 133—138 
 
 ofDative, - - - 138—140 
 
 of Accusative, - - 140, 111 
 
 of Passive Voice, - - 141, 142 
 
 of Impersonal Verbs, - 142 
 
 of Infinitive and Participle, - 143 — 148 
 
 Construction of Circumstances. - 148 — 150 
 
 Synecdoche and Case Absolute^ - - 150, 151 
 
 Case of Comparative, - - 151 
 
 Government of Adverbs — Place, Sec. - 152 — 154 
 
 Conjunction — Particles — Preposition, - 154 — Ico 
 
 Appendix I. Digamma, - - 169 — 
 
 IT. Subscript Iota. - - 173, 174 
 
 III. Article, - - - 174—190 
 
 IV. Dialects, 
 
 V. Accents, - - - 2 12— 
 
 VI. Prosody, - - 
 
 VII. Particles. - - —247 
 
■ «■ .*w.',_ '. V '." 
 
 ■' — 
 
r 
 

 
LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 
 
 003 038 298 5 
 
 II